Sunteți pe pagina 1din 644

0 2

27.JAN.2016 FOR INFORM


MATION M
M.J.KIM Y
Y.K.MIN S.H
H.JOUNG

REV. DATE DESCRIPT


TION D
DSGN C
CHKD APPD

FOR INFOR
RMATIO
ON
OWNER :

PROJECT NAME :

MIIRFA IN
NDEPEN
NDENT WATER
W R AND PO
OWER PROJEC
CT
CONTRAC
CTOR : SUB
BCONTRACTOR
R:

DESIGNE
ED BY: D
DATE TIT
TLE

M.J.K
KIM 27.JA
AN.2016
CHECKE
ED BY: D
DATE

Y.K.M
MIN 27.JA
AN.2016
O & M MA
ANUAL
APPROVE
ED BY: D
DATE FOR EMS
E
S.H.JOU
UNG 27.JA
AN.2016

SCALE DOCU
UMENT NUMBER
N R
NONE MF-VI-SS-78--1001

G
WOORI SYSTEM HYUNDAI
Co., Ltd. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL E&C
Document No. : MF-VI-SS-78-1001
PROJECT CODE : Revision : 0 Date: 2016/01/27
Item Name : EFFLUENT MONITORING SYSTEM

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1. SYSTEM SUMMARY

1.1 General Information


1.2 System Description
1.3 Operation
1.4 Maintenance
1.5 Trouble Shooting
1.6 Repair and Service
1.7 Clean & Storage
1.8. REFERENCE DRAWINGS

CHAPTER 2. MANUALS

2.1 Transmitter Manual(1056)


2.2 Transmitter Manual(1066)
2.3 Chlorine Analyzer
2.4 Chlorine Sensor
2.5 pH Sensor
2.6 Conductivity Sensor
2.7 Data logger Manual
2.8 UPS Manual
2.9 Pump Manual
WOORI SYSTEM HYUNDAI
Co., Ltd. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL E&C
Document No. : MF-VI-SS-78-1001
PROJECT CODE : Revision : 0 Date: 2016/01/27
Item Name : EFFLUENT MONITORING SYSTEM

CHAPTER 1. SYSTEM SUMMARY

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1 General Information

1.2 System Description

1.3 Operation

1.4 Maintenance

1.5 Troubleshooting

1.6 Repair and Service

1.7 Cleaning & Storage

1.8 REFERENCE DRAWINGS


WOORI SYSTEM HYUNDAI
Co., Ltd. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL E&C
Document No. : MF-VI-SS-78-1001
PROJECT CODE : Revision : 0 Date: 2016/01/27
Item Name : EFFLUENT MONITORING SYSTEM

1. 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

The system is designed according to vendors equipment specification of EFFLUENT MONITORING SYSTEM.(EMS)
is designed with permanent inlet line & analyzer shelter and pump control panels & analyzer shelter.

1.2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1.2.1 PURPOSE

The primary purpose of EFFLUENT MONITORING SYSTEM is to allow efficient operation, monitoring and control
of sampling, analyzing of the samples from Outfall & Sea Water.

1.2.2 SAMPLE CONDITIONING

a) EFFLUENT MONITORING SYSTEM


Sample line is provided with sample pump.

b) A sample header is provided to supply each sample.

c) A sample filter & strainer is provided for sample filtration at each sample line.

d) A sample rotameter is provided to control sample flow at each analyzer.

e) A lab sample facility is provided for each sample line.

1.2.3 ANALYSIS
Continuous analyzers and cells are mounted in shelter. Each continuous analyzer is provided with precise flow control
capability. Continuous analyzers are provided as indicated on the P&ID.

Analyzers have been selected based on their time proven ability to provide accurate analytical data in power &
chemical plant installations. Most analyzers are single point instruments.
WOORI SYSTEM HYUNDAI
Co., Ltd. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL E&C
Document No. : MF-VI-SS-78-1001
PROJECT CODE : Revision : 0 Date: 2016/01/27
Item Name : EFFLUENT MONITORING SYSTEM

1.3. OPERATION

1.3.1 START-UP

- EFFLUENT MONITORING SYSTEM

a) Open manual ball valve.

b) Check sample inlet lines. Permanent line provided with sample on/off valve at sample conditioning system.

c) Turn sample on/off switches to OPEN

d) Adjust the sample flowmeters for correct flow to each analyzer


pH 150 cc/min
Conductivity 150 cc/min
Chlorine Analyzer 150 cc/min

e) Turn each analyzer & data logger power switches to ON.

f) Calibration of each analyzer according to analyzer operation manual.

g) Check signal in data logger

1.3.2 SHUT-DOWN

a) EMS : Turn pump power switches to OFF

b) Turn analyzers & data logger power switch to OFF

1.4 MAINTENANCE

Refer to the each analyzer & data logger manual


WOORI SYSTEM HYUNDAI
Co., Ltd. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL E&C
Document No. : MF-VI-SS-78-1001
PROJECT CODE : Revision : 0 Date: 2016/01/27
Item Name : EFFLUENT MONITORING SYSTEM

1.5 TROUBLESHOOTING
Refer to the each analyzer & data logger manual

1.6 REPAIR AND SERVICE

a) After initial start up, frequently sample line, sample filter can be clogged by dust and mist inside of piping line during
a year. At this time the operator can do cleaning for each device as follows.

Sample filter : disconnect sample filter from the line and then replace filter element to new one.

b) Sometimes the analyzer signals can be hunting severely. At this time check leakage on the sample line, some signal
hunting caused by air bubble inside of sample line.

c) Field service is dispatched from WOORI.


All items for repair or replacement should be sent to the following address (approval required before shipment):

WOORI System Co., Ltd.


(Deogeun-ri) 134-26 Dareul-gil, Wollong-myeon, Paju-si, Gyeonggi-do, Korea
Tel. 82-31-945-4370 Fax. 82-31-945-4547

1.7. CLEANING & STORAGE

If you need to clean the analyzer sensor and electrodes of pH-meter for long time storage, clean the electrodes
and sample line inside of analyzer.

a) pH- Electrode : To store pH electrode for long time without using, washing the electrode with distilled water and
fill up 3 mol KCl solution on plastic cap of electrode. And then put in the cap. This will extend lifetime of the
electrode

1.8. REFERENCE DRAWINGS

P & ID DIAGRAM

GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING

ELECTRIC SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM


WOORI SYSTEM HYUNDAI
Co., Ltd. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL E&C
Document No. : MF-VI-SS-78-1001
PROJECT CODE : Revision : 0 Date: 2016/01/27
Item Name : EFFLUENT MONITORING SYSTEM

CHAPTER 2. MANUALS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.1 Transmitter Manual(1056)

2.2 Transmitter Manual(1066)

2.3 Chlorine Analyzer

2.4 Chlorine Sensor

2.5 pH Sensor

2.6 Conductivity Sensor

2.7 Data logger Manual

2.8 UPS Manual

2.9 Pump Manual


WOORI SYSTEM HYUNDAI
Co., Ltd. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL E&C
Document No. : MF-VI-SS-78-1001
PROJECT CODE : Revision : 0 Date: 2016/01/27
Item Name : EFFLUENT MONITORING SYSTEM

CHAPTER 2. MANUALS

2.1 Transmitter Manual(1056)


Instruction Manual
PN 51-1056/rev.H
April 2010 Model 1056

DUAL-INPUT INTELLIGENT ANALYZER


ESSENTIAL INSTRUCTIONS WARNING
READ THIS PAGE BEFORE PROCEEDING! RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Equipment protected throughout by double insulation.


Your instrument purchase from Rosemount
Analytical, Inc. is one of the finest available for your Installation and servicing of this product may expose personel
particular application. These instruments have been to dangerous voltages.
designed, and tested to meet many national and Main power wired to separate power source must be
international standards. Experience indicates that its disconnected before servicing.
performance is directly related to the quality of the Do not operate or energize instrument with case open!
installation and knowledge of the user in operating
and maintaining the instrument. To ensure their con- Signal wiring connected in this box must be rated at least
tinued operation to the design specifications, per- 240 V.
sonnel should read this manual thoroughly before Non-metallic cable strain reliefs do not provide grounding
proceeding with installation, commissioning, opera- between conduit connections! Use grounding type bushings
tion, and maintenance of this instrument. If this and jumper wires.
equipment is used in a manner not specified by the Unused cable conduit entries must be securely sealed by
manufacturer, the protection provided by it against non-flammable closures to provide enclosure integrity in
hazards may be impaired. compliance with personal safety and environmental protection
requirements. Unused conduit openings must be sealed with
Failure to follow the proper instructions may
NEMA 4X or IP65 conduit plugs to maintain the ingress
cause any one of the following situations to protection rating (NEMA 4X).
occur: Loss of life; personal injury; property dam-
age; damage to this instrument; and warranty Electrical installation must be in accordance with the National
invalidation. Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA-70) and/or any other applicable
national or local codes.
Ensure that you have received the correct model
and options from your purchase order. Verify that Operate only with front panel fastened and in place.
this manual covers your model and options. If Safety and performance require that this instrument be
not, call 1-800-854-8257 or 949-757-8500 to connected and properly grounded through a three-wire
request correct manual. power source.
For clarification of instructions, contact your Proper use and configuration is the responsibility of the
Rosemount representative. user.
Follow all warnings, cautions, and instructions
marked on and supplied with the product.
Use only qualified personnel to install, operate,
update, program and maintain the product.
CAUTION
Educate your personnel in the proper installation, This product generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
operation, and maintenance of the product. energy and thus can cause radio communication interference.
Install equipment as specified in the Installation Improper installation, or operation, may increase such interfer-
section of this manual. Follow appropriate local ence. As temporarily permitted by regulation, this unit has not
and national codes. Only connect the product to been tested for compliance within the limits of Class A comput-
electrical and pressure sources specified in this ing devices, pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15, of FCC Rules,
manual. which are designed to provide reasonable protection against
Use only factory documented components for such interference. Operation of this equipment in a residential
repair. Tampering or unauthorized substitution of area may cause interference, in which case the user at his own
parts and procedures can affect the performance expense, will be required to take whatever measures may be
and cause unsafe operation of your process. required to correct the interference.
All equipment doors must be closed and protec-
tive covers must be in place unless qualified per- CAUTION
sonnel are performing maintenance.
This product is not intended for use in the light industrial,
residential or commercial environments per the instru-
ments certification to EN50081-2.

Emerson Process Management


Liquid Division
2400 Barranca Parkway
Irvine, CA 92606 USA
Tel: (949) 757-8500
Fax: (949) 474-7250
http://www.raihome.com

Rosemount Analytical Inc. 2008


QUICK START GUIDE
Model 1056 Dual Input Analyzer

1. Refer to Section 2.0 for mechanical installation instructions.


2. Wire sensor(s) to the signal boards. See Section 3.0 for wiring instructions. Refer to the sensor instruction
sheet for additional details. Make current output, alarm relay and power connections.
3. Once connections are secured and verified, apply power to the analyzer.

WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Electrical installation must be in accordance with


the National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA-70)
and/or any other applicable national or local codes.

4. When the analyzer is powered up for the first time, Quick Start screens appear. Quick Start operating tips
are as follows:
a. A backlit field shows the position of the cursor.
b. To move the cursor left or right, use the keys to the left or right of the ENTER key. To scroll up or down
or to increase or decrease the value of a digit use the keys above and below the ENTER key . Use the
left or right keys to move the decimal point.
c. Press ENTER to store a setting. Press EXIT to leave without storing changes. Pressing EXIT during Quick
Start returns the display to the initial start-up screen (select language).
5. Complete the steps as shown in the Quick Start Guide flow diagram, Fig. A on the following page.
6. After the last step, the main display appears. The outputs are assigned to default values.
7. To change output, and temperature-related settings, go to the main menu and choose Program. Follow the
prompts. For a general guide to the Program menu, see the Quick Reference Guide, Fig.B.
8. To return the analyzer to the default settings, choose Reset Analyzer under the Program menu.
QUICK START GUIDE
Figure A. QUICK START GUIDE
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
Figure B. MODEL 1056 MENU TREE
About This Document
This manual contains instructions for installation and operation of the Model 1056 Dual-Input Intelligent
Analyzer. The following list provides notes concerning all revisions of this document.

Rev. Level Date Notes


A 01/07 This is the initial release of the product manual. The manual has been reformatted to reflect the
Emerson documentation style and updated to reflect any changes in the product offering.
B 2/07 Added CE mark to p.2. Replaced Quick Start Fig A.
C 9/07 Revised Sections 1,3,5,6, and 7. Added new measurements and features - Turbidity, Flow, Current
Input, Alarm relays and 4-electrode conductivity.
D 11/07 Added 24VDC power supply to Sec. 3.4. Added CSA and FM agency approvals for option codes
-01, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36 and 38.
E 05/08 Add HART and Profibus DP digital communication to Section 1 specifications.
F 08/08 Updates
G 09/08 FM and CSA agency approval, Class 1, Div 2. for 24 VDC and AC switching power supplies.
H 04/10 Update DNV logo and company name
MODEL 1056 TABLE OF CONTENTS

MODEL 1056
DUAL INPUT INTELLIGENT ANALYZER
TABLE OF CONTENTS

QUICK START GUIDE


QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page
1.0 DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................ 1
2.0 INSTALLATION ....................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Unpacking and Inspection........................................................................................ 11
2.2 Installation................................................................................................................ 11
3.0 WIRING.................................................................................................................... 19
3.1 General .................................................................................................................... 19
3.2 Preparing Conduit Openings.................................................................................... 19
3.3 Preparing Sensor Cable .......................................................................................... 20
3.4 Power, Output, Alarms and Sensor Connections..................................................... 20
4.0 DISPLAY AND OPERATION ................................................................................... 27
4.1 User Interface .......................................................................................................... 27
4.2 Instrument Keypad................................................................................................... 27
4.3 Main Display ............................................................................................................ 28
4.4 Menu System ........................................................................................................... 29
5.0 PROGRAMMING BASICS ................................................................................... 31
5.1 General .................................................................................................................... 31
5.2 Changing the StartUp Settings ................................................................................ 31
5.3 Choosing Temperature units and Automatic/Manual Temperature Compensation .. 32
5.4 Configuring and Ranging the Current Outputs......................................................... 32
5.5 Setting a Security Code ........................................................................................... 34
5.6 Security Access........................................................................................................ 35
5.7 Using Hold ............................................................................................................... 35
5.8 Resetting Factory Defaults Reset Analyzer .......................................................... 36
5.9 Alarm Relays............................................................................................................ 37
6.0 PROGRAMMING - MEASUREMENTS ................................................................... 41
6.1 Programming Measurements Introduction ........................................................... 41
6.2 pH ............................................................................................................................ 42
6.3 ORP ......................................................................................................................... 43
6.4 Contacting Conductivity .......................................................................................... 45
6.5 Toroidal Conductivity................................................................................................ 48
6.6 Chlorine.................................................................................................................... 51
6.6.1 Free Chlorine .................................................................................................. 51
6.6.2 Total Chlorine ................................................................................................. 53
6.6.3 Monochloramine ............................................................................................ 54
6.6.4 pH-independent Free Chlorine ....................................................................... 55
6.7 Oxygen..................................................................................................................... 57
6.8 Ozone ...................................................................................................................... 59

i
MODEL 1056 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTD

6.9 Turbidity ................................................................................................................... 60


6.10 Flow ......................................................................................................................... 63
6.11 Current Input ............................................................................................................ 64
7.0 CALIBRATION ...................................................................................................... 75
7.1 Calibration Introduction ......................................................................................... 75
7.2 pH Calibration .......................................................................................................... 76
7.3 ORP Calibration ....................................................................................................... 78
7.4 Contacting Conductivity Calibration ......................................................................... 79
7.5 Toroidal Conductivity Calibration ............................................................................. 82
7.6 Chlorine Calibration ................................................................................................. 84
7.6.1 Free Chlorine .................................................................................................. 84
7.6.2 Total Chlorine .................................................................................................. 86
7.6.3 Monochloramine ............................................................................................. 88
7.6.4 pH-Independent Free Chlorine ....................................................................... 90
7.7 Oxygen Calibration .................................................................................................. 92
7.8 Ozone Calibration .................................................................................................... 95
7.9 Temperature Calibration........................................................................................... 97
7.10 Turbidity ................................................................................................................... 98
7.11 Pulse Flow ............................................................................................................... 100
8.0 RETURN OF MATERIAL ........................................................................................ 112
Warranty................................................................................................................... 112

ii
MODEL 1056 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTD

LIST OF FIGURES
Fig# Section Figure Title Page
A PREFACE Quick Start Guide
B PREFACE Quick Reference Guide
2-1 SEC 2.0 Panel Mounting Dimensions .............................................................. 12
2-2 SEC 2.0 Pipe and Wall Mounting Dimensions ................................................. 13
2-3 SEC 2.0 CSA Certification drawing part 1 ........................................................ 14
2-4 SEC 2.0 CSA Certification drawing part 2 ........................................................ 15
2-5 SEC 2.0 FM Non-Incendive drawing part 1...................................................... 16
2-6 SEC 2.0 FM Non-Incendive drawing part 2...................................................... 17
3-1 SEC 3.4 115/230 VAC Power Supply ............................................................... 20
3-2 SEC 3.4 24VDC Power Supply ........................................................................ 20
3-3 SEC 3.4 Switching AC Power Supply............................................................... 20
3-4 SEC 3.4 Current Output Wiring ........................................................................ 21
3-5 SEC 3.4 Alarm Relay Wiring for Model 1056 Switching Power Supply............ 21
3-6 SEC 3.4 Contacting Conductivity board and sensor cable leads ..................... 22
3-7 SEC 3.4 Toroidal Conductivity signal board and sensor cable leads ............... 22
3-8 SEC 3.4 pH/ORP/ISE signal board and sensor cable leads ............................ 23
3-9 SEC 3.4 Amperometric board (Cl, O2, Ozone) and sensor cable leads .......... 23
3-10 SEC 3.4 Turbidity signal board wiht plug-in Sensor connection....................... 24
3-11 SEC 3.4 Flow/Current Input signal board and Sensor cable leads .................. 24
3-12 SEC 3.4 Power Wiring for Model 1056 115/230 VAC....................................... 25
3-13 SEC 3.4 Power Wiring for Model 1056 85-265 VAC ........................................ 25
3-14 SEC 3.4 Output Wiring for Model 1056 Main PCB........................................... 26
3-15 SEC 3.4 Power Wiring for Model 1056 24VDC ................................................ 26
4-1 SEC 4.3 Formatting the Main Display ............................................................. 30
5-1 SEC 5.3.2 Choosing Temp Units and Manual Auto Temp Compensation ........... 32
5-2 SEC 5.4.5 Configuring and Ranging the Current Outputs................................... 33
5-3 SEC 5.5.2 Setting A Security Code .................................................................... 34
5-4 SEC 5.7.2 Using Hold ......................................................................................... 35
5-5 SEC 5.8.2 Resetting Factory Default Settings .................................................... 36
6-1 SEC 6.2 Configuring pH/ORP Measurements ................................................. 67
6-2 SEC 6.4 Configure Contacting Measurements ............................................... 68
6-3 SEC 6.5 Configure Toroidal Measurements .................................................... 69
6-4 SEC 6.6 Configure Chlorine Measurements .................................................... 71
6-5 SEC 6.7 Configure Oxygen Measurements ..................................................... 70
6-6 SEC 6.8 Configure Ozone Measurements ....................................................... 71
6-7 SEC 6.9 Configure Turbidity Measurement...................................................... 72
6-8 SEC 6.10 Configure Flow Measurement............................................................ 73
6-9 SEC 6.11 Configure mA Current Input Measurement ........................................ 73
7-1 SEC 7.2 Calibrate pH ....................................................................................... 103
7-2 SEC 7.3 Calibrate ORP.................................................................................... 104
7-3 SEC 7.4 Calibrate Contacting and Toroidal Conductivity ................................. 105
7-4 SEC 7.6 Calibrate Chlorine .............................................................................. 106
7-5 SEC 7.7 Calibrate Oxygen ............................................................................... 107
7-6 SEC 7.8 Calibrate Ozone ................................................................................. 108
7-7 SEC 7.9 Calibrate Temperature ....................................................................... 109
7-8 SEC 7.10 Calibrate Turbidity .............................................................................. 110
7-9 SEC 7.11 Calibrate Flow .................................................................................... 111

iii
MODEL 1056 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTD

LIST OF TABLES
Number Section Table Title Page
5-1 SEC 5.2.1 Measurements and Measurement Units ............................................. 31
6-1 SEC 6.2.1 pH Measurement Programming ........................................................... 42
6-2 SEC 6.3.1 ORP Measurement Programming ........................................................ 43
6-3 SEC 6.4.1 Contacting Conductivity Measurement Programming.......................... 45
6-4 SEC 6.5.1 Toroidal Conductivity Measurement Programming............................... 48
6-5 SEC 6.6.1.1 Free Chlorine Measurement Programming.......................................... 51
6-6 SEC 6.6.2.1 Total Chlorine Measurement Programming ......................................... 53
6-7 SEC 6.6.3.1Monochloramine Measurement Programming..................................... 54
6-8 SEC 6.6.4 pH-Independent Free Chlorine Measurement Programming ............ 55
6-9 SEC. 6.7.1 Oxygen Measurement Programming.................................................... 57
6-10 SEC 6.8.1 Ozone Measurement Programming...................................................... 59
6-11 SEC 6.9.1 Turbidity Measurement Programming.................................................. 60
6-12 SEC 6.10.1 Flow Measurement Programming......................................................... 63
6-13 SEC 6.11.1 Curent Input Programming................................................................... 64
7-1 SEC 7.2 pH Calibration Routines ....................................................................... 76
7-2 SEC 7.3 ORP Calibration Routine...................................................................... 78
7-3 SEC 7.4 Contacting Conductivity Calibration Routines...................................... 79
7-4 SEC 7.5 Toroidal Conductivity Calibration ........................................... ............ 82
7-5 SEC 7.6.1 Free Chlorine Calibration Routines....................................................... 85
7-6 SEC 7.6.2 Total Chlorine Calibration Routines...................................................... 86
7-7 SEC 7.6.3 Monochloramine Calibration Routines.................................................. 88
7-8 SEC 7.6.4 pH-independent Free Chlorine Calibration Routines............................ 90
7-9 SEC 7.7 Oxygen Calibration Routines................................................................ 93
7-10 SEC 7.8 Ozone Calibration Routines.................................................................. 95
7-11 SEC 7.9 Temperature Calibration Routines........................................................ 97
7-12 SEC 7.10 Turbidity Calibration Routines............................................................... 98
7-13 SEC 7.11 Flow Calibration Routines................................................................... 100

iv
MODEL 1056 SECTION 1.0
DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 1.0.
DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS
MULTI-PARAMETER INSTRUMENT single or dual input. Choose from pH/ORP/ISE,
Resistivity/Conductivity, % Concentration, Chlorine, Oxygen, Ozone, Temperature, Turbidity, Flow,
and 4-20mA Current Input.

LARGE DISPLAY large easy-to-read process measurements.

EASY TO INSTALL modular boards, removable connectors, easy to wire power, sensors, and outputs.

INTUITIVE MENU SCREENS with advanced diagnostics and help screens.

SEVEN LANGUAGES included: English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, and Chinese.

HART AND PROFIBUS DP Digital Communications options

FEATURES AND APPLICATIONS MENUS: Menu screens for calibrating and programming
are simple and intuitive. Plain language prompts and
The Model 1056 dual-input analyzer offers single or help screens guide the user through these procedures.
dual sensor input with an unrestricted choice of dual
measurements. This multi-parameter instrument offers DUAL SENSOR INPUT AND OUTPUT: The Model
a wide range of measurement choices supporting most 1056 accepts single or dual sensor input.
industrial, commercial, and municipal applications. Standard 0/4-20 mA current outputs can be
The modular design allows signal input boards to be programmed to correspond to any measurement or
field replaced making configuration changes easy. temperature.
Conveniently, live process values are always displayed ENCLOSURE: The instrument fits standard DIN
during programming and calibration routines. panel cutouts. The versatile enclosure design supports
QUICK START PROGRAMMING: Exclusive Quick panel-mount, pipe-mount, and surface/wall-mount
Start screens appear the first time the Model 1056 installations.
is powered. The instrument auto-recognizes each ISOLATED INPUTS: Inputs are isolated from other
measurement board and prompts the user to configure signal sources and earth ground. This ensures clean
each sensor loop in a few quick steps for immediate signal inputs for single and dual input configurations.
deployment. For dual input configurations, isolation allows any
DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS: HART and Profibus combination of measurements and signal inputs with-
DP digital communications are available. Model 1056 out cross-talk or signal interference.
HART units communicate with the Model 375 HART TEMPERATURE: Most measurements require tem-
hand-held communicator and HART hosts, such as perature compensation. The Model 1056 will automat-
AMS Intelligent Device Manager. Model 1056 Profibus ically recognize Pt100, Pt1000 or 22k NTC RTDs built
units are fully compatible with Profibus DP networks into the sensor.
and Class 1 or Class 2 masters. HART and Profibus
SECURITY ACCESS CODES: Two levels of security
DP configured units will support any single or dual
access are available. Program one access code for
measurement configuration of Model 1056.
routine calibration and hold of current outputs; program
another access code for all menus and functions.

1
MODEL 1056 SECTION 1.0
DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

DIAGNOSTICS: The analyzer continuously monitors SPECIAL MEASUREMENTS: The Model 1056 offers
itself and the sensor(s) for problematic conditions. measuring capabilities for many applications.
The display flashes Fault and/or Warning when these  Single or Dual Turbidity: Ideal in municipal appli-
conditions occur. cations for measurement of low-NTU filtered drinking
water. Must be used with Clarity II sensor, sensor cable
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C Information about and debubbler.
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C each condition
Diagnostics is quickly accessible
Faults
by pressing DIAG on
Warnings
Sensor 1 the keypad. User
Sensor 2 help screens are
displayed for most
Model T1056
Out 1: 12.05 mA Clarity II
Out 2: 12.05 mA fault and warning
1056-01-20-32-HT conditions to assist in Turbidimeter
Instr SW VER: 2.12 troubleshooting. System
AC Freq. Used: 60Hz

DISPLAY: The high-contrast LCD provides live


measurement readouts in large digits and shows up to
four additional process variables or diagnostic
parameters. The display is back-lit and the format can
be customized to meet user requirements.  4-Electrode Conductivity:
The Model 1056 is compatible with Rosemount
Analytical 4-electrode Model 410VP in the PUR-SENSE
family of conductivity sensors. This sensor supports
a wide array of applications and is capable of measuring
a large range of conductivity with one geometric
configuration. Wired to the Model 1056, this sensor
can measure 2S/cm to 300mS/cm with an accuracy of
4% of reading throughout the entire range.
 4-20mA Current Input: Accepts any analog current
input from an external device for temperature compen-
LOCAL LANGUAGES : sation of measurements and atmospheric pressure
Rosemount Analytical extends its worldwide reach by input for partial pressure correction of oxygen.
offering seven local languages English, French,  Selective Ions: The analyzer is able to measure
German, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, and Chinese. ammonia and fluoride using commercially available
Every unit includes user programming menus; calibration ion-selective electrodes. All analyzers with installed pH
routines; faults and warnings; and user help screens boards can be programmed to measure selective ions.
in all seven languages. The displayed language can  pH Independent Free Chlorine: With Rosemount
be easily set and changed using the menus. Analyticals Model 498Cl-01 sensor, the analyzer is
able to measure free chlorine with automatic correction
for process pH without the need for a pH sensor.
 Inferential pH: The analyzer is able to derive and
display inferred pH (pHCalc) using two contacting con-
ductivity signal boards and the appropriate contacting
conductivity sensors. This method will calculate the
pH of condensate and boiler water from conductivity
and cation conductivity measurements.
 Differential Conductivity: Dual input conductivity
configurations can measure differential conductivity.
CURRENT OUTPUTS: Two 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA current The analyzer can be programmed to display dual
outputs are electrically isolated. Outputs are fully scalable conductivity as ratio, % rejection, or % passage.
and can be programmed to linear or logarithmic
modes. Output dampening can be enabled with time
constants from 0 to 999 seconds. Output 1 includes
digital signal 4-20 mA superimposed HART (option -HT
only)

2
MODEL 1056 SECTION 1.0
DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS - General Power: Code -01: 115/230 VAC 15%, 50/60 Hz. 10W.
Enclosure: Polycarbonate. NEMA 4X/CSA 4 (IP65). Code -02: 20 to 30 VDC. 15 W.
Dimensions: Overall 155 x 155 x 131mm (6.10 x 6.10 Code -03: 85 to 265 VAC, 47.5 to 65.0 Hz, switching.
x 5.15 in.). Cutout: 1/2 DIN 139mm x 139mm (5.45 x 15 W.
5.45 in.) Note: Code -02 and -03 power supplies include 4 pro-
grammable relays
Equipment protected by double insulation
RFI/EMI: EN-61326
LVD: EN-61010-1
Alarms relays*: Four alarm relays for process meas-
urement(s) or temperature. Any relay can be config-
ured as a fault alarm instead of a process alarm. Each
relay can be configured independently and each can
be programmed with interval timer settings.
Relays: Form C, SPDT, epoxy sealed
Conduit Openings: Accepts 1/2 or PG13.5 conduit Maximum Relay Current
fittings Resistive
Display: Monochromatic graphic liquid crystal display. 28 VDC 5.0 A
128 x 96 pixel display resolution. Backlit. Active
display area: 58 x 78mm (2.3 x 3.0 in.). 115 VAC 5.0 A
Ambient Temperature and Humidity: 0 to 55C 230 VAC 5.0 A
(32 to 131F). Turbidity only: 0 to 50C (32 to Inductive load: 1/8 HP motor (max.), 40 VAC
122F), RH 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
Storage Temperature Effect: -20 to 60C (-4 to 140F) CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK
Hazardous Location Approvals -
Options for CSA: -01, 02, 03, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, *Relays only available with -02 power supply (20 - 30 VDC) or -03
27, 30, 31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, AN, and HT. switching power supply (85 - 265 VAC)
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, & D
Class Il, Division 2, Groups E, F, & G WARNING
WARNING
Class Ill T4A Tamb= 50 C
Evaluated to the ANSI/UL Standards. The C and US indi- Exposure to some chemicals may degrade the
cators adjacent to the CSA Mark signify that the product has sealing properties used in the following devices:
been evaluated to the applicable CSA and ANSI/UL Zettler Relays (K1-K4) PN AZ8-1CH-12DSEA
Standards, for use in Canada and the U.S. respectively
Options for FM: -01, 02, 03, 20, 21, 22, 24, 25, 26, 30, Inputs: One or two isolated sensor inputs
31, 32, 34, 35, 36, 38, AN, and HT. Outputs: Two 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA isolated current out-
puts. Fully scalable. Max Load: 550 Ohm. Output 1
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, & D
has superimposed HART signal (configurations
Class Il & lll, Division 2, Groups E, F, & G
1056-0X-2X-3X-HT only)
T4A Tamb= 50 C Enclosure Type 4X
Current Output Accuracy: 0.05 mA @ 25 C
Terminal Connections Rating: Power connector
(3-leads): 24-12 AWG wire size. Signal board ter-
minal blocks: 26-16 AWG wire size. Current output
connectors (2-leads): 24-16 AWG wire size. Alarm
relay terminal blocks: 24-12 AWG wire size
(-02 24 VDC power supply and -03 85-265VAC
POLLUTION DEGREE 2: Normally only non-conductive power supply)
pollution occurs. Occasionally, however, a temporary
Weight/Shipping Weight: (rounded up to nearest lb or
conductivity caused by condensation must be expected.
nearest 0.5 kg): 3 lbs/4 lbs (1.5 kg/2.0 kg)
Altitude: for use up to 2000 meter (6562 ft.)

3
MODEL 1056 SECTION 1.0
DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

CONTACTING CONDUCTIVITY (Codes -20 and -30)


Measures conductivity in the range 0 to 600,000 S/cm Temperature Specifications:
(600mS/cm). Measurement choices are conductivity,
resistivity, total dissolved solids, salinity, and % concen- Temperature range 0-150C
tration. The % concentration selection includes the
choice of five common solutions (0-12% NaOH, 0-15% Temperature Accuracy,
HCl, 0-20% NaCl, and 0-25% or 96-99.7% H2SO4). 0.1C
Pt-1000, 0-50 C
The conductivity concentration algorithms for these
Temperature Accuracy,
solutions are fully temperature compensated. Three 0.5C
temperature compensation options are available: Pt-1000, Temp. > 50 C
manual slope (X%/C), high purity water (dilute sodium
chloride), and cation conductivity (dilute hydrochloric RECOMMENDED SENSORS FOR CONDUCTIVITY:
acid). Temperature compensation can be disabled,
allowing the analyzer to display raw conductivity. For All Rosemount Analytical ENDURANCE Model 400
more information concerning the use and operation of series conductivity sensors (Pt 1000 RTD) and
the contacting conductivity sensors, refer to the product Model 410 sensor.
data sheets.
Note: When two contacting conductivity sensors are
used, Model 1056 can derive an inferred pH value
called pHCalc. pHCalc is calculated pH, not directly
measured pH. (Model 1056-0X-20-30-AN required)
Note: Selected 4-electrode, high-range contacting
conductivity sensors are compatible with Model 1056.
Input filter: time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 2 sec.
family
Response time: 3 seconds to 100% of final reading 4-electrode sensors
Salinity: uses Practical Salinity Scale
Total Dissolved Solids: Calculated by multiplying
conductivity at 25C by 0.65
ENDURANCE series of
TM

conductivity sensors

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Recommended Range Contacting Conductivity

Cell 0.01S/cm 0.1S/cm 1.0S/cm 10S/cm 100S/cm 1000S/cm 10mS/cm 100mS/cm 1000mS/cm
Constant

0.01
0.01S/cm to 200S/cm 200S/cm to 6000S/cm

0.1 0.1S/cm to 2000S/cm 2000S/cm to 60mS/cm

1.0
1 S/cm to 20mS/cm 20mS/cm to 600mS/cm

4-electrode 2 S/cm to 300mS/cm

Cell Constant Linearity


0.6% of reading in recommended range
+2 to -10% of reading outside high recommended range

4 5% of reading outside low recommended range


4% of reading in recommended range
MODEL 1056 SECTION 1.0
DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

TOROIDAL CONDUCTIVITY (Codes -21 and -31)


Measures conductivity in the range of 1 (one) S/cm to Temperature Specifications:
2,000,000 S/cm (2 S/cm), Measurement choices are
conductivity, resistivity, total dissolved solids, salinity,
and % concentration. The % concentration selection Temperature range -25 to 210C (-13 to 410F)
includes the choice of five common solutions (0-12%
NaOH, 0-15% HCl, 0-20% NaCl, and 0-25% or Temperature Accuracy,
0.5C
96-99.7% H2SO4). The conductivity concentration Pt-100, -25 to 50 C
algorithms for these solutions are fully temperature Temperature Accuracy,
compensated. For other solutions, a simple-to-use 1C
Pt-100,. 50 to 210C
menu allows the customer to enter his own data. The
analyzer accepts as many as five data points and fits
either a linear (two points) or a quadratic function (three
or more points) to the data. Two temperature compensation RECOMMENDED SENSORS:
options are available: manual slope (X%/C) and neutral All Rosemount Analytical submersion/immersion and
salt (dilute sodium chloride). Temperature compensation flow-through toroidal sensors.
can be disabled, allowing the analyzer to display raw
conductivity. Reference temperature and linear temper-
ature slope may also be adjusted for optimum results.
For more information concerning the use and operation
of the toroidal conductivity sensors, refer to the product
data sheets.
Repeatability: 0.25% 5 S/cm after zero cal
Input filter: time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 2 sec.
Response time: 3 seconds to 100% of final reading
Salinity: uses Practical Salinity Scale
Total Dissolved Solids: Calculated by multiplying
conductivity at 25C by 0.65 High performance toroidal conductivity sensors
Models 226 and 225

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Recommended Range - Toroidal Conductivity

Model 1S/cm 10S/cm 100S/cm 1000S/cm 10mS/cm 100mS/cm 1000mS/cm 2000mS/cm

226
5S/cm to 500mS/cm 500mS/cm to 2000mS/cm
225 & 228
15S/cm to 1500mS/cm 1500mS/cm to 2000mS/cm

242
100S/cm to 2000mS/cm

222
(1in & 2in) 500S/cm to 2000mS/cm

LOOP PERFORMANCE (Following Calibration)


Model 226: 1% of reading 5S/cm in recommended range
Models 225 & 228: 1% of reading 10S/cm in recommended range
Models 222,242: 4% of reading in recommended range

Model 225, 226 & 228: 5% of reading outside high recommended range

Model 226: 5S/cm outside low recommended range


Models 225 & 228: 15S/cm outside low recommended range
5
MODEL 1056 SECTION 1.0
DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

pH/ORP/ISE (Codes -22 and -32)


For use with any standard pH or ORP sensor. PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS -
Measurement choices are pH, ORP, Redox, ammonia, ANALYZER (ORP INPUT)
fluoride or custom ISE. The automatic buffer recognition
feature uses stored buffer values and their temperature Measurement Range [ORP]: -1500 to +1500 mV
curves for the most common buffer standards available Accuracy: 1 mV
worldwide. The analyzer will recognize the value of the
buffer being measured and perform a self stabilization Temperature coefficient: 0.12mV / C
check on the sensor before completing the calibration. Input filter: time constant 1 - 999 seconds, default 4
Manual or automatic temperature compensation is seconds.
menu selectable. Change in pH due to process temper-
ature can be compensated using a programmable tem- Response time: 5 seconds to 100% of final reading
perature coefficient. For more information concerning
the use and operation of the pH or ORP sensors, refer
to the product data sheets. RECOMMENDED SENSORS FOR pH:

Model 1056 can also derive an inferred pH value called All standard pH sensors.
pHCalc (calculated pH). pHCalc can be derived and RECOMMENDED SENSORS FOR ORP:
displayed when two contacting conductivity sensors are
All standard ORP sensors.
used. (Model 1056-0X-20-30-AN)

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS -
ANALYZER (pH INPUT)
Measurement Range [pH]: 0 to 14 pH
Accuracy: 0.01 pH
Diagnostics: glass impedance, reference impedance
Temperature coefficient: 0.002pH/ C
Solution temperature correction: pure water, dilute
base and custom.
Buffer recognition: NIST, DIN 19266, JIS 8802, BSI,
DIN19267, Ingold, and Merck.
Input filter: time constant 1 - 999 seconds, default 4
seconds.
Response time: 5 seconds to 100%

General purpose and high performance pH sensors


Temperature Specifications: Models 396PVP, 399VP and 3300HT

Temperature range 0-150C

Temperature Accuracy, Pt-100, 0-50 C 0.5C

Temperature Accuracy, Temp. > 50 C 1C

6
MODEL 1056 SECTION 1.0
DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

FLOW (Code -23 and -33)


For use with most pulse signal flow sensors, the Model Totalized Flow: 0 9,999,999,999,999 Gallons or m3,
1056 user-selectable units of measurement include flow 0 999, 999,999,999 cu ft.
rates in GPM (Gallons per minute), GPH (Gallon per Accuracy: 0.5%
hour), cu ft/min (cubic feet per min), cu ft/hour (cubic
feet per hour), LPM (liters per minute), LPH (liters per Input filter: time constant 0-999 sec., default 5 sec.
hour), or m3/hr (cubic meters per hour), and velocity in
ft/sec or m/sec. When configured to measure flow, the
unit also acts as a totalizer in the chosen unit (gallons, RECOMMENDED SENSORS*
liters, or cubic meters). +GF+ Signet 515 Rotor-X Flow sensor
Dual flow instruments can be configured as a % recovery,
flow difference, flow ratio, or total (combined) flow.
* Input voltage not to exceed 36V
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency Range: 3 to 1000 Hz
Flow Rate: 0 - 99,999 GPM, LPM, m3/hr, GPH, LPH,
cu ft/min, cu ft/hr.

4-20mA Current Input (Codes -23 and -33)


For use with any transmitter or external device that This feature leverages the large display variables on the
transmits 4-20mA or 0-20mA current outputs. Typical Model 1056 as a convenience for technicians.
uses are for temperature compensation of live meas- Temperature can be displayed in degrees C or degrees
urements (except ORP, turbidity and flow) and for F. Partial pressure can be displayed in inches Hg, mm
continuous atmospheric pressure input for determina- Hg, atm (atmospheres), kPa (kiloPascals), bar or mbar.
tion of partial pressure, needed for compensation of live The current input board can be used with devices that
dissolved oxygen measurements. External input of do not actively power their 4-20mA output signals. The
atmospheric pressure for DO measurement allows Model 1056 actively powers to the + and lines of the
continuous partial pressure compensation while the current input board to enable current input from a
Model 1056 enclosure is completely sealed. (The 4-20mA output device.
pressure transducer component on the DO board can
only be used for calibration when the case is open to Note: this Model 1056 signal input board (-23, -33
atmosphere.) model option code) also includes flow measurement
functionality. The signal board, however, must be
Externally sourced current input is also useful for configured to measure either mA current input or flow.
calibration of new or existing sensors that require
temperature measurement or atmospheric pressure
inputs (DO only).
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
For externally sourced temp or pressure compensation,
the user must program the Model 1056 to input the Measurement Range *[mA]: 0-20 or 4-20
4-20mA current signal from the external device. Accuracy: 0.03mA
In addition to live continuous compensation of live Input filter: time constant 0-999 sec., default 5 sec.
measurements, the current input board can also be
used simply to display the measured temperature. or
the calculated partial pressure from the external device. *Current input not to exceed 22mA

7
MODEL 1056 SECTION 1.0
DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

CHLORINE (Code -24 and -34)


Free and Total Chlorine RECOMMENDED SENSORS
The Model 1056 is compatible with the Model 499ACL-01 Rosemount Analytical Model 499ACL-03 Monochloramine
free chlorine sensor and the Model 499ACL-02 total sensor
chlorine sensor. The Model 499ACL-02 sensor must be
used with the Model TCL total chlorine sample pH-Independent Free Chlorine
conditioning system. The Model 1056 fully compensates The Model 1056 is compatible with the Model 498CL-01
free and total chlorine readings for changes in membrane pH-independent free chlorine sensor. The Model 498CL-01
permeability caused by temperature changes. For free sensor is intended for the continuous determination of
chlorine measurements, both automatic and manual pH free chlorine (hypochlorous acid plus hypochlorite ion)
correction are available. For automatic pH correction in water. The primary application is measuring chlorine
select code -32 and an appropriate pH sensor. For more in drinking water. The sensor requires no acid pre-treat-
information concerning the use and operation of the ment, nor is an auxiliary pH sensor required for pH
amperometric chlorine sensors and the TCL measurement correction. The Model 1056 fully compensates free
system, refer to the product data sheets. chlorine readings for changes in membrane
permeability caused by temperature. For more information
concerning the use and operation of the amperometric
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS chlorine sensors, refer to the product data sheets.
Resolution: 0.001 ppm or 0.01 ppm selectable
Input Range: 0nA 100A
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
Automatic pH correction (requires Code -32): 6.0 to
Resolution: 0.001 ppm or 0.01 ppm selectable
10.0 pH
Input Range: 0nA 100A
Temperature compensation: Automatic (via RTD) or
manual (0-50C). Automatic pH correction: 6.5 to 10.0 pH
Input filter: time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 5 sec. Temperature compensation: Automatic (via RTD) or
manual (0-50C).
Response time: 6 seconds to 100% of final reading
Input filter: time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 5 sec.
Response time: 6 seconds to 100% of final reading
RECOMMENDED SENSORS*
Chlorine: Model 499ACL-01 Free Chlorine or Model
499ACL-02 Total Residual Chlorine RECOMMENDED SENSORS
pH: The following pH sensors are recommended for Rosemount Analytical Model 498CL-01 pH independent
automatic pH correction of free chlorine readings: free chlorine sensor
Models: 399-09-62, 399-14, and 399VP-09

Monochloramine
The Model 1056 is compatible with the Model 499A CL-03
Monochloramine sensor. The Model 1056 fully
compensates readings for changes in membrane
permeability caused by temperature changes. Because
monochloramine measurement is not affected by pH of
the process, no pH sensor or correction is required. For
more information concerning the use and operation of the
amperometric chlorine sensors, refer to the product data
sheets.
Chlorine sensors with Variopol connection
and cable connection
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS Model 498CL-01
Resolution: 0.001 ppm or 0.01 ppm selectable
Input Range: 0nA 100A
Temperature compensation: Automatic (via RTD) or
manual (0-50C).
Input filter: time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 5 sec.
Response time: 6 seconds to 100% of final reading

8
MODEL 1056 SECTION 1.0
DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

DISSOLVED OXYGEN DISSOLVED OZONE


(Codes -25 and -35) (Code -26 and -36)
The Model 1056 is compatible with the Model 499ADO, The Model 1056 is compatible with the Model 499AOZ
499ATrDO, Hx438, and Gx438 dissolved oxygen sensors sensor. The Model 1056 fully compensates ozone
and the Model 4000 percent oxygen gas sensor. The readings for changes in membrane permeability
Model 1056 displays dissolved oxygen in ppm, mg/L, caused by temperature changes. For more information
ppb, g/L, % saturation, % O2 in gas, ppm O2 in gas. concerning the use and operation of the amperometric
The analyzer fully compensates oxygen readings for ozone sensors, refer to the product data sheets.
changes in membrane permeability caused by tempera-
ture changes. An atmospheric pressure sensor is
included on all dissolved oxygen signal boards to allow PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
automatic atmospheric pressure determination at the Resolution: 0.001 ppm or 0.01 ppm selectable
time of calibration. If removing the sensor from the Input Range: 0nA 100A
process liquid is impractical, the analyzer can be calibrat- Temperature Compensation: Automatic (via RTD) or
ed against a standard instrument. Calibration can be manual (0-35C)
corrected for process salinity. For more information on
the use of amperometric oxygen sensors, refer to the Input filter: time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 5 sec.
product data sheets. Response time: 6 seconds to 100% of final reading

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS RECOMMENDED SENSOR


Resolution: 0.01 ppm; 0.1 ppb for 499A TrDO sensor Rosemount Analytical Model 499A OZ ozone sensor
(when O2 <1.00 ppm); 0.1%
Input Range: 0nA 100A
Temperature Compensation: Automatic (via RTD) or
manual (0-50C).
Input filter: time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 5 sec.
Response time: 6 seconds to 100% of final reading

RECOMMENDED SENSORS
Rosemount Analytical amperometric membrane and
steam-sterilizable sensors listed above

Dissolved Ozone sensors with Polysulfone body


Variopol connection and cable connection
Model 499AOZ

Dissolved Oxygen sensor with Variopol connection


Model 499ADO

9
MODEL 1056 SECTION 1.0
DESCRIPTION AND SPECIFICATIONS

Turbidity (Codes -27 and -37)


The Model 1056 instrument is available in single and PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
dual turbidity configurations for the Clarity II turbidime-
ter. It is intended for the determination of turbidity in fil- Units: Turbidity (NTU, FTU, or FNU); total suspended
tered drinking water. The other components of the solids (mg/L, ppm, or no units)
Clarity II turbidimeter sensor(s), debubbler/measuring Display resolution-turbidity: 4 digits; decimal point
chamber(s), and cable for each sensor must be moves from x.xxx to xxx.x
ordered separately or as a complete system with the
Display resolution-TSS: 4 digits; decimal point moves
Model 1056.
from x.xxx to xxxx
The Model 1056 turbidity instrument accepts inputs
Calibration methods: user-prepared standard, com-
from both USEPA 180.1 and ISO 7027-compliant sensors
mercially prepared standard, or grab sample. For total
When ordering the Model 1056 turbidity instrument, the suspended solids user must provide a linear calibration
-02 (24VDC power supply) or the -03 (switching equation.
115/230VAC power supply) are required. Both of these
Inputs: Choice of single or dual input, EPA 180.1 or
power supplies include four fully programmable relays
ISO 7027 sensors.
with timers.
Field wiring terminals: removable terminal blocks for
Note: Model 1056 Turbidity must be used with Clarity
sensor connection.
II sensor, sensor cable and debubbler.
Accuracy after calibration at 20.0 NTU:
0-1 NTU 2% of reading or 0.015 NTU, whichever is
greater.
0-20 NTU: 2% of reading.

Clarity ll Turbidimeter

10
MODEL 1056 SECTION 2.0
INSTALLATION

SECTION 2.0.
INSTALLATION

2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION


2.2 INSTALLATION

2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION


Inspect the shipping container. If it is damaged, contact the shipper immediately for instructions. Save the box. If
there is no apparent damage, unpack the container. Be sure all items shown on the packing list are present. If
items are missing, notify Rosemount Analytical immediately.

2.2 INSTALLATION
2.2.1 General Information
1. Although the analyzer is suitable for outdoor use, do not install it in direct sunlight or in areas of extreme tem-
peratures.
2. Install the analyzer in an area where vibration and electromagnetic and radio frequency interference are min-
imized or absent.
3. Keep the analyzer and sensor wiring at least one foot from high voltage conductors. Be sure there is easy
access to the analyzer.
4. The analyzer is suitable for panel, pipe, or surface mounting. Refer to the table below.

Type of Mounting Figure


Panel 2-1
Wall and Pipe 2-2

WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Electrical installation must be in accordance with


the National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA-70)
and/or any other applicable national or local codes.

11
FIGURE 2-1 PANEL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS

MILLIMETER
INCH

126.4
5.0
17.13
1.1 101.6
4.00

154.9
6.1

154.9
6.1

Front View
Side View

( 126.4
5.0 )

76.2
3.0
41.4
1.6

Bottom View

152.73
6.0

Note: Panel mounting seal integrity (4/4X) for outdoor applications is the responsibility of the end user.

12
FIGURE 2-2 PIPE AND WALL MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
(Mounting bracket PN:23820-00)
MILLIMETER
INCH

154.9 Wall / Surface Mount


6.1
232
9.1
102
4.0 33.5
1.3

130
5.1

187 154.9 165


7.4 6.1 6.5

Side View
Front View
Pipe Mount

232
Bottom View 9.1
33.5
1.3

130
5.1

80.01
3.2

165
6.5
45.21
1.8

108.9
4.3

Side View

71.37
2.8

The front panel is hinged at the bottom. The panel swings down for easy access to the wiring locations.

13
14
MODEL 1056

FIGURE 2-3 CSA Non-Incendive Class I, Division 2 Certified product for selected configurations (for approved models, see Fig. 2-4)
INSTALLATION
SECTION 2.0
MODEL 1056

FIGURE 2-4 CSA Non-Incendive Class I, Division 2 Certified product for selected configurations
INSTALLATION
SECTION 2.0

15
16
MODEL 1056

FIGURE 2-5 FM Non-Incendive Class I, Division 2 Certified product for selected configurations (for approved models, see Fig. 2-6)
INSTALLATION
SECTION 2.0
MODEL 1056

FIGURE 2-6 FM Non-Incendive Class I, Division 2 Certified product for selected configurations
INSTALLATION
SECTION 2.0

17
MODEL 1056 SECTION 2.0
INSTALLATION

18 This page left blank intentionally


MODEL 1056 SECTION 3.0
WIRING

SECTION 3.0.
WIRING
3.1 GENERAL
3.2 PREPARING CONDUIT OPENINGS
3.3 PREPARING SENSOR CABLE
3.4 POWER, OUTPUT, AND SENSOR
CONNECTIONS
3.1 GENERAL
The Model 1056 is easy to wire. It includes removable connectors and slide-out signal input boards. The front
panel is hinged at the bottom. The panel swings down for easy access to the wiring locations.
3.1.1. Removable connectors and signal input boards
Model 1056 uses removable signal input boards and communication boards for ease of wiring and instal-
lation. Each of the signal input boards can be partially or completely removed from the enclosure for wiring.
The Model 1056 has three slots for placement of up to two signal input boards and one communication
board. Slot 1-Left Slot 2 Center Slot 3 Right
Comm. board Input Board 1 Input Board 2

3.1.2. Signal Input boards


Slots 2 and 3 are for signal input measurement boards. Wire the sensor leads to the measurement board
following the lead locations marked on the board. After wiring the sensor leads to the signal board, carefully slide
the wired board fully into the enclosure slot and take up the excess sensor cable through the cable gland. Tighten
the cable gland nut to secure the cable and ensure a sealed enclosure.

3.1.3. Digital Communication boards


HART and Profibus DP communication boards will be available in the future as options for Model 1056 digital
communication with a host. The HART board supports Bell 202 digital communications over an analog
4-20mA current output. Profibus DP is an open communications protocol which operates over a dedicated
digital line to the host.

3.1.4 Alarm relays


Four alarm relays are supplied with the switching power supply (85 to 265VAC, -03 order code) and the 24VDC
power supply (20-30VDC, -02 order code). All relays can be used for process measurement(s) or temperature.
Any relay can be configured as a fault alarm instead of a process alarm. Each relay can be configured
independently and each can be programmed as an interval timer, typically used to activate pumps or control
valves. As process alarms, alarm logic (high or low activation or USP*) and deadband are user-programmable.
Customer-defined failsafe operation is supported as a programmable menu function to allow all relays to be
energized or not-energized as a default condition upon powering the analyzer.
The USP* alarm can be programmed to activate when the conductivity is within a user-selectable
percentage of the limit. USP alarming is available only when a contacting conductivity measurement board is
installed.

3.2 PREPARING CONDUIT OPENINGS


There are six conduit openings in all configurations of Model 1056. (Note that four of the openings will be fitted
with plugs upon shipment.)

Conduit openings accept 1/2-inch conduit fittings or PG13.5 cable glands. To keep the case watertight, block
unused openings with NEMA 4X or IP65 conduit plugs.

NOTE: Use watertight fittings and hubs that comply with your requirements. Connect the conduit hub to the
conduit before attaching the fitting to the analyzer.

19
MODEL 1056 SECTION 3.0
WIRING
3.3 PREPARING SENSOR CABLE
The Model 1056 is intended for use with all Rosemount Analytical sensors. Refer to the sensor installation instructions
for details on preparing sensor cables.

3.4 POWER, OUTPUT, AND SENSOR CONNECTIONS


3.4.1 Power wiring
Three Power Supplies are offered for Model 1056:
a. 115/230VAC Power Supply (-01 ordering code)
b. 24VDC (20 30V) Power Supply (-02 ordering code)
c. 85 265 VAC Switching Power Supply (-03 ordering code)
AC mains (115 or 230V) leads and 24VDC leads are wired to the Power Supply board which is mounted vertically
on the left side of the main enclosure cavity. Each lead location is clearly marked on the Power Supply board.
Wire the power leads to the Power Supply board using the lead markings on the board.
The grounding plate is connected to the earth terminal of power supply input connector TB1 on the -01
(115/230VAC) and -03 (85-265VAC) power supplies. The green colored screws on the grounding plate are intend-
ed for connection to some sensors to minimize radio frequency interference. The green screws are not intended
to be used for safety purposes.

115/230VAC Power Supply (-01


ordering code) is shown below:

CAUTION
AC Power switch shipped in the 230VAC
position.
Adjust switch upwards to 115VAC position
for 110VAC 120VAC operation.
Figure 3-1

24VDC Power Supply (-02 ordering code)


is shown below:

This power supply automatically detects DC power and


accepts 20VDC to 30VDC inputs.
Four programmable alarm relays are included.
Figure 3-2

Switching AC Power Supply (-03 ordering


code) is shown below:

This power supply automatically detects AC line condi-


tions and switches to the proper line voltage and line
frequency.
Four programmable alarm relays are included.
Figure 3-3
20
MODEL 1056 SECTION 3.0
WIRING
3.4.2 Current Output wiring
All instruments are shipped with two 4-20mA current
outputs. Wiring locations for the outputs are on the
Main board which is mounted on the hinged door of the
instrument. Wire the out put leads to the correct posi-
tion on the Main board using the lead markings (+/positive,
-/negative) on the board. Male mating connectors are
provided with each unit.

Figure 3.4
3.4.3 Alarm relay wiring
Four alarm relays are supplied with the switching power supply (85 to 265VAC, -03 order code) and the 24VDC
power supply (20-30VDC, -02 order code). Wire the relay leads on each of the independent relays to the correct
position on the power supply board using the printed lead markings (NO/Normally Open, NC/Normally Closed, or
Com/Common) on the board. See Fig 3-4.

NO1
COM1 RELAY 1
NC1
NO2
COM2 RELAY 2
NC2
NO3
COM3 RELAY 3
NC3
NO4
COM4 RELAY 4
NC4
Figure 3-5 Alarm Relay Wiring for Model 1056 Switching Power Supply (-03 Order Code)

3.4.4 Sensor wiring to signal boards


Wire the correct sensor leads to the measurement board using the lead locations marked directly on the b o a r d .
After wiring the sensor leads to the signal board, carefully slide the wired board fully into the enclosure slot and
take up the excess sensor cable through the cable gland.

For best EMI/RFI protection use shielded output signal cable enclosed in an earth-grounded metal conduit.
Connect the shield to earth ground. AC wiring should be 14 gauge or greater. Provide a switch or breaker to dis-
connect the analyzer from the main power supply. Install the switch or breaker near the analyzer and label it as
the disconnecting device for the analyzer.

Keep sensor and output signal wiring separate from power wiring. Do not run sensor and power wiring in the same
conduit or close together in a cable tray.

WARNING
RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK

Electrical installation must be in accordance with


the National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA-70)
and/or any other applicable national or local codes. 21
MODEL 1056 SECTION 3.0
WIRING

Sec. 3.4 Signal board wiring

Figure 3-6 Contacting Conductivity signal board and Sensor cable leads

Figure 3-7 Toroidal Conductivity Signal board and Sensor cable leads

22
MODEL 1056 SECTION 3.0
WIRING

Figure 3-8 pH/ORP/ISE signal board and Sensor cable leads

Figure 3-9 Amperometric signal (Chlorine, Oxygen, Ozone) board and Sensor cable leads

23
MODEL 1056 SECTION 3.0
WIRING

Figure 3-10 Turbidity signal board with plug-in Sensor connection

Figure 3-11 Flow/Current Input signal board and Sensor cable leads

24
MODEL 1056 SECTION 3.0
WIRING

FIGURE 3-12 Power Wiring for Model 1056 115/230VAC Power Supply (-01 Order Code)

FIGURE 3-13 Power Wiring for Model 1056 85-265 VAC Power Supply (-03 ordering code)

25
MODEL 1056 SECTION 3.0
WIRING

FIGURE 3-14 Output Wiring for Model 1056 Main PCB


To Main PCB

FIGURE 3-15 Power Wiring for Model 1056 24VDC Power Supply (-02 ordering code)

26
MODEL 1056 SECTION 4.0
DISPLAY AND OPERATION

SECTION 4.0
DISPLAY AND OPERATION

4.1 USER INTERFACE


4.2 KEYPAD
4.3 MAIN DISPLAY
4.4 MENU SYSTEM

4.1 USER INTERFACE


The Model 1056 has a large display which shows two
live measurement readouts in large digits and up to four
additional process variables or diagnostic parameters
concurrently. The display is back-lit and the format can
be customized to meet user requirements. The intu-
itive menu system allows access to Calibration, Hold (of
current outputs), Programming, and Display functions by
pressing the MENU button. In addition, a dedicated
DIAGNOSTIC button is available to provide access to
useful operational information on installed sensor(s)
and any problematic conditions that might occur. The
display flashes Fault and/or Warning when these condi-
tions occur. Help screens are displayed for most fault
and warning conditions to guide the user in trou-
bleshooting.
During calibration and programming, key presses cause
different displays to appear. The displays are self-
explanatory and guide the user step-by-step through
the procedure.

4.2 INSTRUMENT KEYPAD


There are 4 Function keys and 4 Selection keys on the
instrument keypad.

Function keys:
The MENU key is used to access menus for program-
ming and calibrating the instrument. Four top-level
menu items appear when pressing the MENU key:
 Calibrate: calibrate attached sensors and
analog outputs.
 Hold: Suspend current outputs.
 Program: Program outputs, measurement,
temperature, security and reset.
 Display: Program display format, language,
warnings, and contrast
Pressing MENU always causes the main menu screen
to appear. Pressing MENU followed by EXIT causes
the main display to appear.

27
MODEL 1056 SECTION 4.0
DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Pressing the DIAG key displays active Faults and Offset, selected measurement range, Cable
Warnings, and provides detailed instrument information Resistance, Temperature Sensor Resistance, Signal
and sensor diagnostics including: Faults, Warnings, Board software version.
Sensor 1 and 2 information, Out 1 and Out 2 live current
values, model configuration string e.g. 1056-01-20-31- The ENTER key. Pressing ENTER stores numbers and
AN, Instrument Software version, and AC frequency settings and moves the display to the next screen.
used. Pressing ENTER on Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 pro-
vides useful diagnostics and information (as applica- The EXIT key. Pressing EXIT returns to the previous
ble): Measurement, Sensor Type, Raw signal value, screen without storing changes.
Cell constant, Zero Offset, Temperature, Temperature

Selection keys:
Surrounding the ENTER key, four Selection keys up,
down, right and left, move the cursor to all areas of the
screen while using the menus.
Selection keys are used to:
1. select items on the menu screens
2. scroll up and down the menu lists.
3. enter or edit numeric values.
4. move the cursor to the right or left
5. select measurement units during operations

4.3 MAIN DISPLAY


The Model 1056 displays one or two primary measurement
values, up to four secondary measurement values, a
fault and warning banner, alarm relay flags, and a
digital communications icon.

Process measurements:
Two process variables are displayed if two signal boards are installed. One process variable and process tem-
perature is displayed if one signal board is installed with one sensor. The Upper display area shows the Sensor
1 process reading. The Center display area shows the Sensor 2 process reading. For dual conductivity, the Upper
and Center display areas can be assigned to different process variables as follows:

Process variables for Upper display- example: Process variables for Center display- example:
Measure 1 Measure 1
% Reject Measure 2
% Pass % Reject
Ratio % Pass
Ratio
Blank

For single input configurations, the Upper display area Displayable Secondary Values
shows the live process variable and the Center display
area can be assigned to Temperature or blank. Slope 1 Man Temp 2
Ref Off 1 Output 1 mA
Secondary values: Gl Imp 1 Output 2 mA
Up to four secondary values are shown in four display
quadrants at the bottom half of the screen. All four Ref Imp 1 Output 1 %
secondary value positions can be programmed by the Raw Output 2 %
user to any display parameter available. Possible
secondary values include: mV Input Measure 1
Temp 1 Blank
Man Temp 1
28
MODEL 1056 SECTION 4.0
DISPLAY AND OPERATION

Fault and Warning banner:


If the analyzer detects a problem with itself or the sensor the word Fault or Warning will appear at the bottom of
the display. A fault requires immediate attention. A warning indicates a problematic condition or an impending fail-
ure. For troubleshooting assitance, press Diag.

Formatting the Main Display


The main display screen can be programmed to show primary process variables, secondary process variables and
diagnostics.
1. Press MENU
2. Scroll down to Display. Press ENTER.
3. Main Format will be highlighted. Press ENTER.
4. The sensor 1 process value will be highlighted in reverse video. Press the selection keys to navigate down
to the screen sections that you wish to program. Press ENTER.
5. Choose the desired display parameter or diagnostic for each of the four display sections in the lower screen.
6. Continue to navigate and program all desired screen sections. Press MENU and EXIT. The screen will
return to the main display.
For single sensor configurations, the default display shows the live process measurement in the upper display area
and temperature in the center display area. The user can elect to disable the display of temperature in the cen-
ter display area using the Main Format function. See Fig. 4-1 to guide you through programming the main display
to select process parameters and diagnostics of your choice.
For dual sensor configurations, the default display shows Sensor 1 live process measurement in the upper display
area and Sensor 2 live process measurement temperature in the center display area. See Fig. 4-1 to guide you
through programming the main display to select process parameters and diagnostics of your choice.

4.4 MENU SYSTEM


Model 1056 uses a scroll and select menu system.
Pressing the MENU key at any time opens the top-level
menu including Calibrate, Hold, Program and Display
functions.
To find a menu item, scroll with the up and down keys
until the item is highlighted. Continue to scroll and
select menu items until the desired function is chosen.
To select the item, press ENTER. To return to a previ-
ous menu level or to enable the main live display,
press the EXIT key repeatedly. To return immediately
to the main display from any menu level, simply press
MENU then EXIT.

The selection keys have the following functions:


 The Up key (above ENTER) increments numerical values, moves the decimal place one place to the right,
or selects units of measurement.
 The Down key (below ENTER) decrements numerical values, moves the decimal place one place to the
left, or selects units of measurement
 The Left key (left of ENTER) moves the cursor to the left.
 The Right key (right of ENTER) moves the cursor to the right.
To access desired menu functions, use the Quick Reference Figure B. During all menu displays (except main
display format and Quick Start), the live process measurements and secondary measurement values are
displayed in the top two lines of the Upper display area. This conveniently allows display of the live values during
important calibration and programming operations.
Menu screens will time out after two minutes and return to the main live display.

29
MODEL 1056 SECTION 4.0
DISPLAY AND OPERATION

FIGURE 4-1 Formatting the Main Display

30
MODEL 1056 SECTION 5.0
PROGRAMMING THE ANALYZER - BASICS

SECTION 5.0.
PROGRAMMING THE ANALYZER - BASICS
5.1 GENERAL
5.2 CHANGING START-UP SETTINGS
5.3 PROGRAMMING TEMPERATURE
5.4 CONFIGURING AND RANGING 4-20MA OUTPUTS
5.5 SETTING SECURITY CODES
5.6 SECURITY ACCESS
5.7 USING HOLD
5.8 RESETTING FACTORY DEFAULTS RESET ANALYZER
5.9 PROGRAMMING ALARM RELAYS
5.1 GENERAL
Section 5.0 describes the following programming functions:
 Changing the measurement type, measurement units and temperature units.
 Choose temperature units and manual or automatic temperature compensation mode
 Configure and assign values to the current outputs
 Set a security code for two levels of security access
 Accessing menu functions using a security code
 Enabling and disabling Hold mode for current outputs
 Choosing the frequency of the AC power (needed for optimum noise rejection)
 Resetting all factory defaults, calibration data only, or current output settings only

5.2 CHANGING STARTUP SETTINGS


5.2.1 Purpose
To change the measurement type, measurement units, or temperature units that were initially entered in Quick
Start, choose the Reset analyzer function (Sec. 5.9) or access the Program menus for sensor 1 or sensor 2 (Sec.
6.0). The following choices for specific measurement type, measurement units are available for each sensor meas-
urement board.
TABLE 5-1. Measurements and Measurement Units
Signal board Available measurements Measurements units:
pH, ORP, Redox, Ammonia, Fluoride, pH, mV (ORP)
pH/ORP (-22, -32)
Custom ISE %, ppm, mg/L, ppb, g/L, (ISE)
Conductivity, Resistivity, TDS, Salinity,
Contacting conductivity S/cm, mS/cm, S/cm
NaOH (0-12%), HCl (0-15%), Low H2SO4,
(-20, -30) % (concentration)
High H2SO4, NaCl (0-20%),
Custom Curve
Conductivity, Resistivity, TDS, Salinity,
Toroidal conductivity S/cm, mS/cm, S/cm
NaOH (0-12%), HCl (0-15%), Low H2SO4,
(-21, -31) % (concentration)
High H2SO4, NaCl (0-20%),
Custom Curve
Chlorine Free Chlorine, pH Independ. Free Cl, Total
ppm, mg/L
(-24, -34) Chlorine, Monochloramine
Oxygen ppm, mg/L, ppb, g/L % Sat, Partial
Oxygen (ppm), Trace Oxygen (ppb),
(-25, -35) Pressure, % Oxygen In Gas, ppm
Percent Oxygen in gas, Salinity
Oxygen In Gas
Ozone (-26, -36) Ozone ppm, mg/L, ppb, g/L
Temperature (all) Temperature C. F
5.2.2 Procedure.
Follow the Reset Analyzer procedure (Sec 5.8) to reconfigure the analyzer to display new measurements or
measurement units. To change the specific measurement or measurement units for each signal board type,
refer to the Program menu for the appropriate measurement (Sec. 6.0).
31
MODEL 1056 SECTION 5.0
PROGRAMMING THE ANALYZER - BASICS

5.3 CHOOSING TEMPERATURE UNITS AND AUTOMATIC/MANUAL TEMPERATURE


COMPENSATION

5.3.1 Purpose
Most liquid analytical measurements (except ORP)
require temperature compensation. The Model 1056
performs temperature compensation automatically by S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
applying internal temperature correction algorithms. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Temperature correction can also be turned off. If tem- Temperature
perature correction is off, the Model 1056 uses the tem- Units: C
perature entered by the user in all temperature correc- S1 Temp Comp: Auto
tion calculations. S2 Temp Comp: Auto
S1 Manual: +25.0C
5.3.2 Procedure.
Follow the menu screens in Fig. 5.1 to select automatic S2 Manual: +25.0C
or manual temp compensation, set the manual
reference temperature, and to program temperature
units as C or F.

Figure 5-1. Choosing Temp Units and Manual Auto Temp Compensation

5.4 CONFIGURING AND RANGING THE CURRENT OUTPUTS


5.4.1 Purpose The low and high current outputs can be set to any
The Model 1056 accepts inputs from two sensors and value.
has two analog current outputs. Ranging the outputs 2. ASSIGNING OUTPUTS. Assign a measurement to
means assigning values to the low (0 or 4 mA) and high Output 1 or Output 2.
(20 mA) outputs. This section provides a guide for 3. DAMPEN. Output dampening smooths out noisy
configuring and ranging the outputs. ALWAYS readings. It also increases the response time of the
CONFIGURE THE OUTPUTS FIRST. output. Output dampening does not affect the
response time of the display.
5.4.2 Definitions 4. MODE. The current output can be made directly
1. CURRENT OUTPUTS. The analyzer provides a con- proportional to the displayed value (linear mode) or
tinuous output current (4-20 mA or 0-20 mA) directly directly proportional to the common logarithm of the
proportional to the process variable or temperature. displayed value (log mode).

32
MODEL 1056 SECTION 5.0
PROGRAMMING THE ANALYZER - BASICS

5.4.3 Procedure: Configure Outputs. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Under the Program/Outputs menu, the adjacent screen S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
will appear to allow configuration of the outputs. Follow OutputM Configure
the menu screens in Fig. 5-2 to configure the outputs. Assign: S1 Meas
Range: 4-20mA
Scale: Linear
Dampening: 0sec

Fault Mode: Fixed


Fault Value: 21.00mA

5.4.4 Procedure: Assigning Measurements the Low S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


and High Current Outputs S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
The adjacent screen will appear when entering the OutputM Assign
Assign function under Program/Output/Configure. S1 Measurement
These screens allow you to assign a measurement, S1 Temperature
process value, or temperature input to each output. S2 Measurement
Follow the menu screens in Fig. 5-2 to assign S2 Temperature
measurements to the outputs.

5.4.5 Procedure: Ranging the Current Outputs S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The adjacent screen will appear under S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Program/Output/Range. Enter a value for 4mA and Output Range
20mA (or 0mA and 20mA) for each output. Follow the OM SN 4mA: 0.000S/cm
menu screens in Fig. 5-2 to assign values to the out- OM SN 20mA: 20.00S/cm
puts. OM SN 4mA: 00.00pH
OM SN 20mA: 14.00pH

Figure 5-2. Configuring and Ranging the Current Outputs

33
MODEL 1056 SECTION 5.0
PROGRAMMING THE ANALYZER - BASICS

5.5 SETTING A SECURITY CODE 2. Scroll down to Security. Select Security.


3. The security entry screen appears. Enter a
5.5.1 Purpose. three digit security code for each of the desired
The security codes prevent accidental or unwanted security levels. The security code takes effect
changes to program settings, displays, and calibration. two minutes after the last key stroke.
Model 1056 has two levels of security code to control Record the security code(s) for future access
access and use of the instrument to different types of and communication to operators or techni-
users. The two levels of security are: cians as needed.
- All: This is the Supervisory security level. It
allows access to all menu functions, including 4. The display returns to the security menu
Programming, Calibration, Hold and Display. screen. Press EXIT to return to the previous
- Calibration/Hold: This is the operator or screen. To return to the main display, press
technician level menu. It allows access to MENU followed by EXIT.
only calibration and Hold of the current outputs.
Fig. 5-3 displays the security code screens.
5.5.2 Procedure.
1. Press MENU. The main menu screen appears.
Choose Program.

Figure 5-3. Setting a Security Code


MAIN MENU

S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Program

S2: 12.34pH 25.0C


Program
Outputs
Measurement
Temperature
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Security
Security
Calibration/Hold: 000
Diagnostic Setup All: 000
Ambient AC Power:Unk
Reset Analyzer

34
MODEL 1056 SECTION 5.0
PROGRAMMING THE ANALYZER - BASICS

5.6 SECURITY ACCESS 5.7 USING HOLD


5.6.1 How the Security Code Works 5.7.1 Purpose
When entering the correct access code for the The analyzer output is always proportional to measured
Calibration/Hold security level, the Calibration and value. To prevent improper operation of systems or
Hold menus are accessible. This allows operators or pumps that are controlled directly by the current
technicians to perform routine maintenance. This output, place the analyzer in hold before removing
security level does not allow access to the Program or the sensor for calibration and maintenance. Be sure
Display menus. to remove the analyzer from hold once calibration is
When entering the correct access code for All security complete. During hold, both outputs remain at the last
level, the user has access to all menu functions, includ- value. Once in hold, all current outputs remain on
ing Programming, Calibration, Hold and Display. Hold indefinitely.

5.6.2 Procedure. 5.7.2 Using the Hold Function


1. If a security code has been programmed, selecting To hold the outputs,
the Calibrate, Hold, Program or Display top menu 1. Press MENU. The main menu screen appears.
items causes the security access screen to appear Choose Hold.
2. The Hold Outputs and Alarms? screen
2. Enter the three-digit security code for the appropriate appears. Choose Yes to place the analyzer in
security level. hold. Choose No to take the analyzer out of
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C hold.
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C Note: There are no alarm relays with this con
Security Code figuration. Current outputs are included with all
000 configurations.
3. The Hold screen will then appear and Hold
will remain on indefinitely until Hold is
3. If the entry is correct, the appropriate menu screen disabled.
appears. If the entry is incorrect, the Invalid Code
screen appears. The Enter Security Code screen See figure 5-1 below.
reappears after 2 seconds.

Figure 5-4. Using Hold


MAIN MENU

S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Hold

S2: 12.34pH 25.0C


S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Hold S1 Hold outputs
S1 Hold: No and alarms?
No
S2 Hold: No
Yes

35
MODEL 1056 SECTION 5.0
PROGRAMMING THE ANALYZER - BASICS

5.8 RESETTING FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS

5.8.1 Purpose.
This section describes how to restore factory calibration and default values. The process also clears all fault messages
and returns the display to the first Quick Start screen. The Model 1056 offers three options for resetting factory
defaults.
a. reset all settings to factory defaults
b. reset sensor calibration data only
c. reset analog output settings only

5.8.2. Procedure.
To reset to factory defaults, reset calibration data only or reset analog outputs only, follow the Reset Analyzer flow
diagram.

Figure 5-5. Resetting Factory Default Settings

36
MODEL 1056 SECTION 5.0
PROGRAMMING THE ANALYZER - BASICS

5.9 Programming Alarm Relays

5.9.1 Purpose.
The Model 1056 24VDC (-02 order code) and the AC switching power supply (-03 order code) provide four alarm
relays for process measurement or temperature. Each alarm can be configured as a fault alarm instead of a
process alarm. Also, each relay can be programmed independently and each can be programmed as an interval
timer. This section describes how to configure alarm relays, simulate relay activation, and synchronize timers for
the four alarm relays. This section provides details to program the following alarm features:

Sec. Alarm relay feature: default Description


5.9.2 Enter Setpoint 100.0uS/cm Enter alarm trigger value
5.9.3 Assign measurement S1 Measure Select alarm assignment
5.9.4 Set relay logic High Program relay to activate at High or Low reading
5.9.5 Deadband: 0.00uS/cm Program the change in process value after the relay deactivates
5.9.6 USP Safety: 0% Program percentage of the limit to activate the alarm
5.9.7 Normal state: Open Program relay default condition as open or closed for failsafe operation
5.9.8 Interval time: 24.0 hr Time in hours between relay activations
5.9.9 On-Time: 10 min Enter the time in seconds that the relay is activated.
5.9.10 Recover time: 60 sec Enter time after the relay deactivation for process recovery
5.9.11 Hold while active: S1 Holds current outputs during relay activation
5.9.12 Simulate Manually simulate alarms to confirm relay operation
5.9.13 Synchronize Timers Yes Control the timing of two or more relay timers set as Interval timers

Under the Program/Alarms menu, this screen will S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
appear to allow configuration of the alarm relays. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Follow the menu screens in Fig. XX to configure the Alarms
outputs. Configure/Setpoint
Simulate
Synchronize Timers: Yes

This screen will appear to allow selection of a specific S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
alarm relay. Select the desired alarm and press S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
ENTER. Configure/Setpoint
Alarm 1
Alarm 2
Alarm 3
Alarm 4

This screen will appear next to allow complete pro- S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
gramming of each alarm. Factory defaults are dis- S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
played as they would appear for an installed contact- AlarmM Settings
ing conductivity board. USP Safety only appears if Setpoint: 100.0uS/cm
alarm logic is set to USP. Interval timer, On Time, Assign: S1 Measure
Recover Time, and Hold While Active only appear if Logic: High
Deadband: 0.00uS/cm
the alarm is configured as an Interval timer.
USP Safety: 0%

Interval time: 24.0 hr


On Time: 120 sec
Recover time: 60 sec
Hold while active: Sens1

37
MODEL 1056 SECTION 5.0
PROGRAMMING THE ANALYZER - BASICS

5.9.2 Procedure Enter Setpoints S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Under the Program/Alarms menu, this screen will S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
appear to allow configuration of the alarm relays. Alarm1 S2 Setpoint
Enter the desired value for the process measurement +100.0uS/cm
or temperature at which to activate an alarm event.

5.9.3 Procedure Assign Measurement S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Under the Alarms Settings menu, this screen will S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
appear to allow assignment of the alarm relays. select AlarmM Assign:
an alarm assignment. Additional assignment choices S1 Measurement
are shown in Figure X-X depending on which meas- S1 Temperature
urement board(s) is installed. S2 Measurement
S2 Temperature
Interval Timer
Fault
Off

5.9.4 Procedure Set Relay Logic S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Under the Alarms Settings menu, this screen will S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
appear to set the alarm logic. Select the desired relay AlarmM Logic:
logic to activate alarms at a High reading or a Low High
reading. USP Safety only appears if a contacting con- Low
ductivity board is installed. USP

5.9.5 Procedure Deadband S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Under the Alarms Settings menu, this screen will S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
appear to program the deadband as a measurement Alarm1 Deadband
value. Enter the change in the process value needed +000.5uS/cm
after the relay deactivates to return to normal (and
thereby preventing repeated alarm activation).

5.9.6 Procedure USP Safety S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Under the Alarms Settings menu, this screen will S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
appear to program the USP alarm setting. Enter the Alarm1 USP Safety
percentage below the limit at which to activate the +0%
alarm.

5.9.7 Procedure Normal state S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The user can define failsafe condition in software by S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
programming the alarm default state to normally open Alarm2 Normal State
or normally closed upon power up. To display this Open
alarm configuration item, enter the Expert menus by Closed
holding down the EXIT key for 6 seconds while in the
main display mode. Select Yes upon seeing the screen
prompt: Enable Expert Menu?
Under the Alarms Settings menu, this screen will
appear to set the normal state of the alarms. Select the
alarm condition that is desired each time the analyzer is
powering up.

38
MODEL 1056 SECTION 5.0
PROGRAMMING THE ANALYZER - BASICS

5.9.8 Procedure Interval time S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Under the Alarms Settings menu, this screen will S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
appear to set the interval time. Enter the fixed time in Alarm1 Interval Time
hours between relay activations. 024.0 hrs

5.9.9 Procedure On time S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Under the Alarms Settings menu, this screen will S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
appear to set the relay on time. Enter the time in sec- Alarm1 On-Time
onds that the relay is activated. 00.00sec

5.9.10 Procedure Recovery time S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Under the Alarms Settings menu, this screen will S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
appear to set the relay recovery time. Enter time after Alarm1 Recovery
the relay deactivation for process recovery. 060sec

5.9.11 Procedure Hold while active S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Under the Alarms Settings menu, this screen will S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

appear to program the feature that Holds the current Alarm1 Hold while active
outputs while alarms are active. Select to hold the Sensor 1
current outputs for Sensor 1, Sensor 2 or both sensors Sensor 2
while the relay is activated. Both
None

5.9.12 Procedure Simulate S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Alarm relays can be manually set for the purposes of S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

checking devices such as valves or pumps. Under the Simulate Alarm M


Alarms Settings menu, this screen will appear to allow Dont simulate
manual forced activation of the alarm relays. Select De-energize
the desired alarm condition to simulate. Energize

5.9.13 Procedure Synchronize S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Under the Alarms Settings menu, this screen will S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
appear to allow Synchronization of alarms that are set Synchronize Timers
to interval timers. Select yes or no to Synchronize Yes
two or more timers. No

39
MODEL 1056 SECTION 5.0
PROGRAMMING THE ANALYZER - BASICS

40 This page left blank intentionally


MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING - MEASUREMENTS
6.1 CONFIGURING MEASUREMENTS INTRODUCTION
6.2 pH
6.3 ORP
6.4 CONTACTING CONDUCTIVITY
6.5 TOROIDAL CONDUCTIVITY
6.6 CHLORINE
6.6.1 FREE CHLORINE
6.6.2 TOTAL CHLORINE
6.6.3 MONOCHLORAMINE
6.6.4 pH-INDEPENDENT FREE CHLORINE
6.7 OXYGEN
6.8 OZONE
6.9 TURBIDITY
6.10 FLOW
6.11 CURRENT INPUT

6.1 PROGRAMMING MEASUREMENTS INTRODUCTION


The Model 1056 automatically recognizes each installed measurement board upon first power-up and each time
the analyzer is powered. Completion of Quick Start screens upon first power up enable measurements, but addi-
tional steps may be required to program the analyzer for the desired measurement application. This section cov-
ers the following programming and configuration functions;
1. Selecting measurement type or sensor type (all sections)
2. Identifying the preamp location (pH-see Sec. 6.2)
3. Enabling manual temperature correction and entering a reference temperature (all sections)
4. Enabling sample temperature correction and entering temperature correction slope (selected sections)
5. Defining measurement display resolution (pH and amperometric)
6. Defining measurement display units (all sections)
7. Adjusting the input filter to control display and output reading variability or noise (all sections)
8. Selecting a measurement range (conductivity see Secs 6.4, 6.5)
9. Entering a cell constant for a contacting or toroidal sensor (see Secs 6.4, 6.5)
10. Entering a temperature element/RTD offset or temperature slope (conductivity-see Secs 6.4)
11. Creating an application-specific concentration curve (conductivity-see Secs 6.4, 6.5)
12. Enabling automatic pH correction for free chlorine measurement (Sec. 6.6.1)

To fully configure the analyzer for each installed measurement board, you may use the following:
1. Reset Analyzer function to reset factory defaults and configure the measurement board to the desired
measurement. Follow the Reset Analyzer menu (Fig. 5-5) to reconfigure the analyzer to display new
measurements or measurement units.
2. Program menus to adjust any of the programmable configuration items. Use the following configuration
and programming guidelines for the applicable measurement.

41
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.2 pH MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING

6.2.1 Description
This section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for pH measurements. The following programming and
configuration functions are covered.

TABLE 6-1. pH Measurement Programming


Measure Sec. Menu function: default setting Description
pH 6.2.2 Measurement type: pH Select pH, ORP, Redox, Ammonia, Fluoride, Custom ISE
6.2.3 Preamp location: Analyzer Identify preamp location
6.2.4 Solution temperature correction Off Select Off, ultra-pure, high pH, custom
6.2.5 Temp coefficient (custom) Enter the temp coefficient
6.2.6 Resolution: 0.01pH Select 0.01pH or 0.1pH for pH display resolution
6.2.7 Filter: 4 sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
6.2.8 Reference Z: Low Select low or high reference impedance

A detailed flow diagram for pH programming is provided at the end of Sec. 6 to guide you through
all basic programming and configuration functions.

To configure the pH measurement board: S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


1. Press MENU S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. SN Configure
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Measure: pH
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to Preamp: Analyzer
Soln Temp Corr: Off
pH. Press ENTER.
T Coeff: -0.029pH/C
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults
are shown). To program any function, scroll to the Resolution: 0.01pH
desired item and press ENTER. Filter: 4 sec
Reference Z: Low

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each configuration function.
Use the flow diagram for pH programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the Model 1056 live screen prompts for each
function to complete configuration and programming.
6.2.2 Measurement S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for selecting the measurement is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Measurement
Refer to the pH/ORP Programming flow diagram to pH
complete this function. ORP
Redox
Ammonia

Fluoride
Custom ISE

6.2.3 Preamp S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for identifying the Preamp location is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Preamp
Refer to the pH/ORP Programming flow diagram to Analyzer
complete this function. Sensor/JBox

42
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.2.4 Solution Temperature Correction


S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for selecting the Solution S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
temperature correction algorithm is shown. The default SN Soln Temp Corr.
value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the pH/ORP Off
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. Ultra Pure Water
High pH
Custom

6.2.5 Temperature Coefficient


The display screen for entering the custom solution tem- S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
perature coefficient is shown. The default value is dis- S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

played in bold type. Refer to the pH/ORP SN Soln Temp Coeff.


- 0.032pH/C
Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

6.2.6 Resolution S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting 0.01pH or 0.1pH for pH S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
display resolution is shown. The default value is displayed SN Resolution
in bold type. Refer to the pH/ORP Programming flow 0.01pH
diagram to complete this function. 0.1pH

6.2.7 Filter
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for entering the input filter value in
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Input filter
bold type. Refer to the pH/ORP Programming flow diagram 04 sec
to complete this function.

6.2.8 Reference Impedence S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting Low or High Reference S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
impedance is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Reference Z
bold type. Refer to the pH/ORP Programming flow diagram Low
to complete this function. High

6.3 ORP MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING

6.3.1 Description
The section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for ORP measurements. The following programming
and configuration functions are covered:

TABLE 6-2. ORP Measurement Programming


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
ORP 6.3.2 Measurement type: pH Select pH, ORP, Redox, Ammonia, Fluoride, Custom ISE
6.3.3 Preamp location: Analyzer Identify preamp location
6.3.4 Filter: 4 sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
6.3.5 Reference Z: Low Select low or high reference impedance

43
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

A detailed flow diagram for ORP programming is


provided at the end of Sec. 6 to guide you through
all basic programming and configuration functions. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
To configure the ORP measurement board:
SN Configure
1. Press MENU Measure: pH
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Preamp: Analyzer
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Flter: 4 sec
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to Reference Z: Low
ORP. Press ENTER.
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults
are shown). To program any displayed function, scroll
to the desired item and press ENTER.

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each configuration function.
Use the flow diagram for ORP programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the Model 1056 live screen prompts for
each function to complete configuration and programming.

S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


6.3.2 Measurement
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
The display screen for selecting the measurement is
SN Measurement
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. pH
Refer to the pH/ORP Programming flow diagram to ORP
complete this function. Redox
Ammonia
Fluoride
Custom ISE

6.3.3 Preamp S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for identifying the Preamp location is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Preamp
Refer to the pH/ORP Programming flow diagram to Analyzer
complete this function. Sensor/JBox

6.3.4 Filter S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Input filter
bold type. Refer to the pH/ORP Programming flow diagram 04 sec
to complete this function.

6.3.5 Reference Impedence S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for Selecting Low or high Reference S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
impedance is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Reference Z
bold type. Refer to the pH/ORP Programming flow diagram Low
to complete this function. High

44
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.4 CONTACTING CONDUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING

6.4.1 Description
The section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for conductivity measurements using contacting
conductivity sensors. The following programming and configuration functions are covered.

TABLE 6-3. Contacting Conductivity Measurement Programming


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
Contacting 6.4.2 Type: 2-Electrode Select 2-Electrode or 4-Electrode type sensors
Conductivity
6.4.3 Measure: Conductivity Select Conductivity, Resistivity, TDS. Salinity or % conc
6.4.4 Range: Auto Select measurement Auto-range or specific range
6.4.5 Cell K: 1.00000/cm Enter the cell Constant for the sensor
6.4.6 RTD Offset: 0.00C Enter the RTD Offset
6.4.7 RTD Slope: 0 Enter the RTD Slope
6.4.8 Temp Comp: Slope Select Temp Comp: Slope, Neutral Salt, Cation or Raw
6.4.9 Slope: 2.00%/C Enter the linear temperature coefficient
6.4.10 Ref Temp: 25.0C Enter the Reference temp
6.4.11 Filter: 2 sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
6.4.12 Custom Setup Enter 2-5 data points in ppm and S/cm for custom curves
6.4.13 Cal Factor: 0.95000/cm Enter the Cal Factor for 4-Electrode sensors from the sensor tag

A detailed flow diagram for contacting conductivity programming is provided at the end of Sec. 6 to
guide you through all basic programming and configuration functions.

To configure the contacting conductivity measurement S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


board: S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
1. Press MENU SN Configure
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Type: 2-Electrode
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Measure: Cond
Range: Auto
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to
Cell K: 1.00000/cm
contacting conductivity. Press ENTER.
RTD Offset: 0.00C
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults RTD Slope: 0
are shown). To program any displayed function, scroll Temp Comp: Slope
to the desired item and press ENTER. Slope: 2.00%/C
Ref Temp: 25.0C
Filter: 2 sec
Custom Setup

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each configuration function.
Use the flow diagram for contacting conductivity programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the Model 1056 live
screen prompts for each function to complete configuration and programming.

6.4.2 Sensor Type


S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for selecting 2-Electrode or
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
4-Electrode type sensors is shown. The default value
SN Type
is displayed in bold type. Refer to the contacting 2-Electrode
conductivity Programming flow diagram to complete this 4-Electrode
function.
45
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.4.3 Measure S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the measurement is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Measurement


Refer to the contacting conductivity Programming flow Conductivity
Resistivity
diagram to complete this function.
TDS
Salinity
NaOH (0-12%)
HCl (0-15%)
Low H2SO4
High H2SO4
NaCl (0-20%)
Custom Curve

6.4.4 Range S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for Selecting Auto-ranging or a specific S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

range is shown. The default value is displayed in bold SN Range


Auto
type. Note: Ranges are shown as conductance, not
50 S
conductivity. Refer to the contacting conductivity 500 S
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 2000 S
20 mS
200 mS
600 mS

6.4.5 Cell Constant S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering a cell Constant for the S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
sensor is shown. The default value is displayed in bold SN Cell Constant
type. Refer to the contacting conductivity Programming 1.00000 /cm
flow diagram to complete this function.

6.4.6 RTD Offset


S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for Entering the RTD Offset for the S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
sensor is shown. The default value is displayed in bold SN RTD Offset
type. Refer to the contacting conductivity Programming 0.00C
flow diagram to complete this function.

6.4.7 RTD Slope S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the RTD slope for the S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

sensor is shown. The default value is displayed in bold SN RTD Slope


type. Refer to the contacting conductivity Programming 2.00%/C
flow diagram to complete this function.

6.4.8 Temp Comp S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for Selecting Temperature S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Compensation as Slope, Neutral Salt, Cation or Raw is SN Temp Comp
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Slope
Refer to the contacting conductivity Programming flow Neutral Salt
diagram to complete this function. Cation
Raw

46
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.4.9 Slope
The display screen for Entering the conductivity/temp S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Slope is shown. The default value is displayed in bold
SN Slope
type. Refer to the contacting conductivity Programming
2.00 %/C
flow diagram to complete this function.

6.4.10 Reference Temp S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for manually entering the Reference S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
temperature is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Ref Temp
bold type. Refer to the contacting conductivity (25.0C normal)
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. +25.0C

6.4.11 Filter S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Input filter
bold type. Refer to the contacting conductivity
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 02 sec

6.4.12 Custom Setup S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screens for creating a custom curve for S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
converting conductivity to concentration is shown. SN Custom Curve
Refer to the contacting conductivity Programming Configure
flow diagram to complete this function. Enter Data Points
Calculate Curve

When the custom curve data entry is complete, press S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
ENTER. The display will confirm the determination of a S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
custom curve fit to the entered data by displaying this SN Calculate Curve
screen: Custom curve
fit completed.
In Process Cal
recommended.

If the custom curve fit is not completed or is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


unsuccessful, the display will read as follows and the S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
screen will return to the beginning custom curve screen. SN Calculate Curve
Failure

6.4.13 Cal Factor The display screen for entering Cal Factor is shown.
Upon initial installation and power up, if 4-electrode The default value is displayed in bold type. If necessary
was selected for the sensor type in the Quick Start after initial installation and start-up, enter the Cal
menus, the user enters a Cell Constant and a Cal Factor as printed on the sensor tag.
Factor using the instrument keypad. The cell constant
is needed to convert measured conductance to S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
conductivity as displayed on the analyzer screen. The S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Cal Factor entry is needed increase the accuracy of SN Cal Factor
the live conductivity readings, especially at low conduc- 0.95000/cm
tivity readings below 20uS/cm. Both the Cell Constant
and the Cal Factor are printed on the tag attached to
the 4-electrode sensor/cable.

47
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.5 TOROIDAL CONDUCTIVITY MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING

6.5.1 Description
The section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for conductivity measurements using
inductive/toroidal sensors. The following programming and configuration functions are covered.

TABLE 6-4. Toroidal Conductivity Measurement Programming


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
Toroidal 6.5.2 Model: 228 Select sensor type
conductivity
6.5.3 Measure: Conductivity Select Conductivity, Resistivity, TDS, Salinity or % conc
6.5.4 Range: Auto Select measurement Auto-range or specific range
6.5.5 Cell K: 3.00000/cm Enter the cell Constant for the sensor
6.5.6 Temp Comp: Slope Select Temp Comp: Slope, Neutral Salt, or Raw
6.5.7 Slope: 2.00%/C Enter the linear temperature coefficient
6.5.8 Ref Temp: 25.0C Enter the Reference temp
6.5.9 Filter: 2 sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
6.5.10 Custom Setup Enter 2-5 data points in ppm and S/cm for custom curves

A detailed flow diagram for toroidal conductivity programming is provided at the end of Sec. 6 to guide
you through all basic programming and configuration functions.
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
To configure the toroidal conductivity measurement S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
board: SN Configure
1. Press MENU Model: 228
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Measure: Cond
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Range: Auto
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to
toroidal conductivity. Press ENTER. Cell K: 3.00000/cm
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults RTD Offset: 0.00C
RTD Slope: 0
are shown). To program any displayed function, scroll
Temp Comp: Slope
to the desired item and press ENTER. Slope: 2.00%/C
Ref Temp: 25.0C
Filter: 2 sec
Custom Setup

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each configuration function.
Use the flow diagram for toroidal conductivity programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the Model 1056 live
screen prompts for each function to complete configuration and programming.

6.5.2 Sensor Model S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the sensor model is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Model


228
Refer to the toroidal conductivity Programming flow
225
diagram to complete this function. 226
247

Other

48
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.5.3 Measure S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the measurement is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Measurement
Refer to the toroidal conductivity Programming flow diagram Conductivity
Resistivity
to complete this function.
TDS
Salinity

NaOH (0-12%)
HCl (0-15%)
Low H2SO4
High H2SO4
NaCl (0-20%)
Custom Curve

6.5.4 Range S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for Selecting Auto-ranging or a S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
specific range is shown. The default value is displayed SN Range
in bold type. Note: Ranges are shown as conductance, Auto
not conductivity. Refer to the toroidal conductivity 2000 mS
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 50 mS
2 mS
200S

6.5.5 Cell Constant S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering a cell Constant for the S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
sensor is shown. The default value is displayed in bold SN Cell Constant
type. Refer to the toroidal conductivity Programming 3.00000 /cm
flow diagram to complete this function.

6.5.6 Temp Comp S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
The display screen for Selecting Temperature
SN Temp Comp
Compensation as Slope, Neutral Salt, or Raw is shown.
Slope
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the
Neutral Salt
toroidal conductivity Programming flow diagram to com-
Raw
plete this function.

49
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.5.7 Slope S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for Entering the conductivity/temp S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Slope is shown. The default value is displayed in bold SN Slope
type. Refer to the toroidal conductivity Programming 2.00%/C
flow diagram to complete this function.

6.5.8 Ref Temp S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for manually Entering the Reference S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
temperature is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Ref Temp
bold type. Refer to the toroidal conductivity (25.0C normal)
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. +25.0C

6.5.9 Filter S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Input filter
bold type. Refer to the toroidal conductivity
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 02 sec

S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


6.5.10 Custom Setup
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
The display screens for creating custom curves for con-
SN Custom Curve
verting conductivity to concentration is shown. Refer to Configure
the toroidal conductivity Programming flow diagram to Enter Data Points
complete this function. Calculate Curve

When the custom curve data entry is complete, press S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
ENTER. The display will confirm the determination of a S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
custom curve fit to the entered data by displaying this SN Calculate Curve
screen: Custom curve
fit completed.
In Process Cal
recommended.

If the custom curve fit is not completed or is


S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
unsuccessful, the display will read as follows and the S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
screen will return to the beginning custom curve screen. SN Calculate Curve
Failure

50
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.6 CHLORINE MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING


With a Chlorine measurement board installed, Model 1056 can measure any of four variants of Chlorine:
Free Chlorine
Total Chlorine
Monochloramine
pH-independent Free Chlorine
The section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for Chlorine measurements.

6.6.1 FREE CHLORINE MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING

6.6.1.1 Description
This Chlorine sub-section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for Free Chlorine measurement
using amperometric chlorine sensors. The following programming and configuration functions are covered:

TABLE 6-5. Free Chlorine Measurement Programming


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
Free 6.6.1.2 Measure: Free Chlorine Select Free Chlorine, pH Ind. Free Cl. Total Cl, Monochloramine
Chlorine
6.6.1.3 Units: ppm Select units ppm or mg/L
6.6.1.4 Filter: 5sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
6.6.1.5 Free Cl Correct: Live Select Live/Continuous pH correction or Manual
6.6.1.6 Manual pH: 7.00 pH For Manual pH correction, enter the pH value
6.6.1.7 Resolution: 0.001 Select display resolution 0.01 or 0.001

A detailed flow diagram for programming of all chlorine measurements is provided at the end of Sec. 6 to
guide you through all basic programming and configuration functions.

To configure the chlorine measurement board for free


chlorine:
1. Press MENU
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER.
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER.
SN Configure
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to Measure: Free Chlorine
chlorine. Press ENTER. Units: ppm
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults
are shown). To program any displayed function, scroll Filter: 5sec
to the desired item and press ENTER. Free Cl Correct: Live
Manual pH: 7.00 pH
Resolution: 0.001

51
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each configuration function.
Use the flow diagram for chlorine programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the Model 1056 live screen prompts
for each function to complete configuration and programming.

6.6.1.2 Measure S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the measurement is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Measurement
Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow diagram to Free Chlorine
complete this function. pH Independ. Free Cl
Total Chlorine
Monochloramine

6.6.1.3 Units S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting units as ppm or mg/L S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
is shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Units
Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow diagram to ppm
complete this function. mg/L

6.6.1.4 Filter S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Input filter
bold type. Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow
diagram to complete this function. 05 sec

6.6.1.5 Free Chlorine pH Correction S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for Selecting Live/Continuous pH S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

correction or Manual pH correction is shown. The SN Free Cl


default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the pH Correction
Live/Continuous
Chlorine Programming flow diagram to complete this
Manual
function.

6.6.1.6 Manual pH Correction S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for manually entering the pH value S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
of the measured process liquid is shown. The default SN Manual pH
value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine 07.00 pH
Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

6.6.1.7 Resolution S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting display resolution as S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
0.001 or 0.01 is shown. The default value is displayed SN Resolution -
in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow 0.001
diagram to complete this function. 0.01

52
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.6.2 TOTAL CHLORINE MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING

6.6.2.1 Description
This Chlorine sub-section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for Total Chlorine measurement using
amperometric chlorine sensors. The following programming and configuration functions are covered:

TABLE 6-6. Total Chlorine Measurement Programming


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
Total 6.6.2.2 Measure: Free Chlorine Select Free Chlorine, pH Ind. Free Cl. Total Cl, Monochloramine
Chlorine
6.6.2.3 Units: ppm Select units ppm or mg/L
6.6.2.4 Filter: 5sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
6.6.2.5 Resolution: 0.001 Select 0.01 or 0.001 display resolution

A detailed flow diagram for programming of all chlorine measurements is provided at the end of Sec. 6 to
guide you through all basic programming and configuration functions.

To configure the chlorine measurement board for total S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
chlorine: S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
1. Press MENU SN Configure
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Measure: Free Chlorine
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Units: ppm
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to Filter: 5sec
chlorine. Press ENTER. Resolution: 0.001

The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults


are shown). To program any displayed function, scroll
to the desired item and press ENTER.

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each configuration function.
Use the flow diagram for chlorine programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the Model 1056 live screen prompts for
each function to complete configuration and programming.

6.6.2.2 Measure S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the measurement is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Measurement


Refer to the chlorine Programming flow diagram to Free Chlorine
pH Independ. Free Cl
complete this function.
Total Chlorine
Monochloramine

6.6.2.3 Units S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting units as ppm or mg/L S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
is shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Units
Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow diagram to ppm
mg/L
complete this function

53
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.6.2.4 Filter S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Input filter
bold type. Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow
diagram to complete this function. 05 sec

6.6.2.5 Resolution S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting display resolution as S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
0.001 or 0.01 is shown. The default value is displayed SN Resolution
in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow 0.001
diagram to complete this function. 0.01

6.6.3 MONOCHLORAMINE MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING

6.6.3.1 Description
This Chlorine sub-section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for Monochloramine measurement
using amperometric chlorine sensors. The following programming and configuration functions are covered:

TABLE 6-7. Monochloramine Measurement Programming


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
Monochloramine 6.6.3.2 Measure: Free Chlorine Select Free Chlorine, pH Ind. Free Cl. Total Cl, Monochloramine
6.6.3.3 Units: ppm Select units ppm or mg/L
6.6.3.4 Filter: 5sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
6.6.3.5 Resolution: 0.001 Select 0.01pH or 0.1ppm/mg/L for display Resolution

A detailed flow diagram for programming of all chlorine measurements is provided at the end of Sec. 6 to
guide you through all basic programming and configuration functions.

To configure the chlorine measurement board for S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


monochloramine: S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
1. Press MENU SN Configure
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Measure: Free Chlorine
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Units: ppm
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to Filter: 5sec
chlorine. Press ENTER. Resolution: 0.001

The following screen format will appear (factory defaults


are shown). To program any displayed function, scroll
to the desired item and press ENTER.
The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each configuration function.
Use the flow diagram for chlorine programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the Model 1056 live screen prompts
for each function to complete configuration and programming.

6.6.3.2-Measure: Monochloramine S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the measurement is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Measurement
Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow diagram to Free Chlorine
complete this function. pH Independ. Free Cl
Total Chlorine
Monochloramine

54
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.6.3.3 Units S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting units as ppm or mg/L is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Units
Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow diagram to ppm
complete this function. mg/L

6.6.3.4 Filter S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Input filter
bold type. Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow diagram
to complete this function. 05 sec

6.6.3.5 Resolution S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting display resolution as S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
0.001 or 0.01 is shown. The default value is displayed SN Resolution
in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow 0.001
diagram to complete this function. 0.01

6.6.4 pH-INDEPENDENT FREE CHLORINE MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING

6.6.4.1 Description
This Chlorine sub-section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for Free Chlorine measurements
using the pH-independent free chlorine sensor, Model 498CL-01, manufactured by Rosemount Analytical. The following
programming and configuration functions are covered:

TABLE 6-8. pH-independent Free Chlorine Measurement Programming

Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description


pH-independent 6.6.4.2 Measure: pH Indep Free Cl Select Free Chlorine, pH Ind. Free Cl. Total Cl, Monochloramine
Free Chlorine
6.6.4.3 Units: ppm Select units ppm or mg/L
6.6.4.4 Filter: 5sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
6.6.4.5 Resolution: 0.001 Select 0.01pH or 0.1ppm/mg/L for display Resolution

A detailed flow diagram for programming of all chlorine measurements is provided at the end of Sec. 6 to
guide you through all basic programming and configuration functions.

To configure the chlorine measurement board for S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


pH-independent free chlorine: S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
1. Press MENU SN Configure
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Measure: Free Chlorine
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Units: ppm
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to Filter: 5sec
chlorine. Press ENTER. Resolution: 0.001

The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults


are shown). To program any displayed function, scroll
to the desired item and press ENTER.

55
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each configuration function.
Use the flow diagram for chlorine programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the Model 1056 live screen prompts
for each function to complete configuration and programming.

6.6.4.2 Measurement: pH-independent Free Chlorine S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the measurement is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Measurement
Refer to the chlorine Programming flow diagram to Free Chlorine
complete this function. pH Independ. Free Cl
Total Chlorine
Monochloramine

6.6.4.3 Units S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting units as ppm or mg/L S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
is shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Units
Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow diagram to ppm
complete this function. mg/L

6.6.4.4 Filter S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Input filter
bold type. Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow
diagram to complete this function. 05 sec

6.6.4.5 Resolution S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting display resolution as S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
0.001 or 0.01 is shown. The default value is displayed SN Resolution
in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow 0.001
diagram to complete this function. 0.01

56
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.7 OXYGEN MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING


6.7.1 Description
This section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for dissolved and gaseous oxygen measurement
using amperometric oxygen sensors. The following programming and configuration functions are covered:

TABLE 6-9. Oxygen Measurement Programming


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
Oxygen 6.7.2 Type: Water/Waste Select Water/Waste, Trace. BioRx, BioRx-Other, Brew, %O2 In Gas
6.7.3 Units: ppm Select ppm, mg/L, ppb, g/L, % Sat, %O2-Gas, ppm Oxygen-Gas
6.7.4 Partial Press: mmHg Select mm Hg, in Hg. atm, kPa, mbar or bar for Partial pressure
6.7.5 Salinity: 00.0 Enter Salinity as
6.7.6 Filter: 5sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
6.7.7 Pressure Units: bar Select pressure units: mm Hg, in Hg,. Atm, kPa, mbar, bar
6.7.8 Use Press: At Air Cal Select atmospheric pressure source internal or mA Input

A detailed flow diagram for oxygen programming is provided at the end of Sec. 6 to guide you through all basic pro-
gramming and configuration functions.
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
To configure the Oxygen measurement board: S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
1. Press MENU SN Configure
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Type: Water/Waste
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Units: ppm
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to Oxygen. Partial Press: mmHg
Press ENTER.
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults are Salinity: 00.0
shown). To program any displayed function, scroll to the Filter: 5sec
Pressure Units: bar
desired item and press ENTER.
Use Press: At Air Cal
Custom Setup

The following sub-sections show the initial display screen that appears for each configuration function. Use the
flow diagram for oxygen programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the Model 1056 live screen prompts for each
function to complete configuration and programming.

6.7.2 Oxygen Measurement application S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for programming the measurement S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

is shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Type


Refer to the Oxygen Programming flow diagram to Water/Waste
Trace Oxygen
complete this function.
BioRx-Rosemount
BioRx-Other
Brewing
Oxygen In Gas

6.7.3 Units S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting units as ppm , mg/L, S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

ppb, g/L, % Saturation, %Oxygen in Gas, or ppm SN Units


ppm
Oxygen in Gas is shown. The default value is displayed
mg/L
in bold type. Refer to the Oxygen Programming flow ppb
diagram to complete this function. g/L

% Saturation
Partial Pressure
% Oxygen In Gas
ppm Oxygen In Gas

57
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.7.4 Partial Press S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting pressure units for S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Partial pressure is shown. This selection is needed if SN Partial Press
the specified measurement is Partial pressure. The mm Hg
default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the in Hg
atm
Oxygen Programming flow diagram to complete this
kPa
function.
mbar
bar

6.7.5 Salinity
The display screen for Entering the Salinity (as parts S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
per thousand) of the process liquid to be measured is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Salinity
Refer to the Oxygen Programming flow diagram to 00.0
complete this function.
Enter Salinity as

6.7.6 Filter
The display screen for entering the input filter value in S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

bold type. Refer to the Oxygen Programming flow SN Input filter


diagram to complete this function.
05 sec

6.7.7 Pressure Units S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting pressure units for S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
atmospheric pressure is shown. This selection is needed Pressure Units
for the display of atmospheric pressure measured by mm Hg
the onboard pressure transducer on the Oxygen in Hg
atm
measurement board. The default value is displayed in
kPa
bold type. Refer to the Oxygen Programming flow
diagram to complete this function. mbar
bar

6.7.8 Use Pressure


The display screen for selecting atmospheric pressure S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
source. The default value is displayed in bold type.
SN Use Pressure?
Refer to the Oxygen Programming flow diagram to com-
At Air Cal
plete this function. mA Input

58
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.8 OZONE MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING

6.8.1 Description
This section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for ozone measurement using amperometric
ozone sensors. The following programming and configuration functions are covered:
TABLE 6-10. Ozone Measurement Programming
Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
Ozone 6.8.2 Units: ppm Select units ppm, mg/L, ppb, g/L
6.8.3 Filter: 5sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
6.8.4 Resolution: 0.001 Select 0.01or 0.001 for display resolution

A detailed flow diagram for ozone programming is provided at the end of Sec. 6 to guide you through all
basic programming and configuration functions.
To configure the Ozone measurement board:
1. Press MENU
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER.
SN Configure
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to
Units: ppm
Ozone. Press ENTER. Filter: 5 sec
Resolution: 0.001
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults
are shown). To program any displayed function, scroll to
the desired item and press ENTER.

The following sub-sections show the initial display screen that appears for each configuration function. Use the
flow diagram for ozone programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the Model 1056 live screen prompts for each
function to complete configuration and programming.

Note: Ozone measurement boards are detected automatically by the analyzer. No measurement selection is necessary.

6.8.2 Units S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting measurement units is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. SN Units
Refer to the Ozone Programming flow diagram to ppm
complete this function. mg/L
ppb
g/L

6.8.3 Filter S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Input filter


bold type. Refer to the Ozone Programming flow
05 sec
diagram to complete this function.

6.8.4 Resolution S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting display resolution as S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
0.001 or 0.01 is shown. The default value is displayed SN Resolution
in bold type. Refer to the Ozone Programming flow 0.001
diagram to complete this function. 0.01

59
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.9 TURBIDITY MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING

6.9.1 DESCRIPTION
This section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for Turbidity measurements. The following
programming and configuration functions are covered.

TABLE 6-11 TURBIDITY MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
Turbidity 6.9.2 Measurement type: Turbidity Select Turbidity or TSS calculation (estimated TSS)
6.9.3 Measurement units: NTU NTU, FTU, FNU
6.9.4 Enter TSS* Data: Enter TSS and NTU data to calculate TSS based on Turbidity
6.9.5 Filter: 20 sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
Intelligent software algorithm to eliminate erroneous readings
6.9.6 Bubble Rejection: On
caused by bubble accumulation in the sample
*TSS: Total Suspended Solids

A detailed flow diagram for Turbidity programming is provided at the end of Sec. 6 to guide you through all basic
programming and configuration functions.
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
To configure the Turbidity measurement board: SN Configure
1. Press MENU Measure: Turbidity
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Units: NTU
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Enter TSS Data
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to Turbidity. Press ENTER. Filter: 20sec

The following screen format will appear (factory defaults are shown). Bubble Rejection: On

To program Turbidity, scroll to the desired item and press ENTER.

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each programming routine.
Use the flow diagram for Turbidity programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the live screen prompts to complete
programming.

6.9.2 Measurement S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the measurement is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default measurement is displayed in bold SN Measurement
type. Refer to the Turbidity Programming flow diagram Turbidity
to complete this function. Calculated TSS

6.9.3 Units
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for selecting the measurement S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
units is shown. The default value is displayed in bold SN Units
type. Refer to the Turbidity Programming flow diagram NTU
to complete this function. FTU
FNU

60
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

If TSS data (Total Suspended Solids) calculation is


S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
selected, the following screen will be displayed. Refer
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
to the Turbidity programming flow diagram to complete
SN Units
this function. ppm
mg/L
none

6.9.4 Enter TSS Data S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering TSS Data is shown. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
The default values are displayed. Refer to the SN TSS Data
Turbidity Programming flow diagram to complete this Pt1 TSS: 0.000ppm
function Pt1 Turbid: 0.000NTU
Pt2 TSS: 100.0ppm
Pt2 Turbid: 100.0NTU

Calculate

Note: Based on user-entered NTU data, calculating


TSS as a straight line curve could cause TSS to go S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
below zero. The following screen lets users know that
SN TSS Data
TSS will become zero below a certain NTU value.
Calculation Complete
Calculated TSS = 0 below
xxxx NTU

The following illustration shows the potential for calculated TSS to go below zero

Normal case: TSS is always a positive number when Turbidity is a positive number.

Abnormal case: TSS can be a negative number when Turbidity is a positive number.

61
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

When the TSS data entry is complete, press ENTER.


The display will confirm the determination of a TSS S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
straight line curve fit to the entered NTU/turbidity data
SN TSS Data
by displaying this screen:
Calculation
Complete

The following screen may appear if TSS calculation is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
unsuccessful. Re-entry of NTU and TSS data is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
required. SN TSS Data
Data Entry Error

Press EXIT

6.9.5 Filter
The display screen for entering the input filter value in S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in
SN Input Filter
bold type. Refer to the Turbidity Programming flow
020sec
diagram to complete this function.

6.9.6 Bubble Rejection


Bubble rejection is an internal software algorithm that S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
characterizes turbidity readings as bubbles as S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
opposed to true turbidity of the sample. With Bubble SN Bubble Rejection
rejection enabled, these erroneous readings are elimi- On
nated from the live measurements shown on the dis- Off
play and transmitted via the current outputs.

The display screen for selecting bubble rejection algo-


rithm is shown. The default setting is displayed in bold
type. Refer to the Turbidity Programming flow diagram
to complete this function.

62
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.10 FLOW MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING

6.10.1 DESCRIPTION
This section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for flow measurement when used with a compatible
pulse flow sensor. The following programming and configuration functions are covered.

TABLE 6-12 FLOW MEASUREMENT PROGRAMMING


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
Flow 6.10.2 Measurement type Pulse Flow Select Pulse Flow or mA Current Input
6.10.3 Measurement units: GPH Select GPM, GPH, cu ft/min, cu ft/hour, LPM, L/hour, m3/hr
6.10.4 Enter TSS* Data: 0 Sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds

To configure the flow measurement board: S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


1. Press MENU S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. SN Configure
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Measure: Pulse Flow
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to Units: GPM
flow. Press ENTER. Filter: 5sec

The following screen format will appear (factory defaults


are shown).

To program pulse flow, scroll to the desired item and press ENTER.

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each programming routine.
Use the diagram for pulse flow programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the live screen prompts to complete
programming.

6.10.2 Measurement
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for selecting the measurement is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default measurement is displayed in bold SN Measurement
type. Refer to the pulse flow Programming diagram to Pulse Flow
complete this function. mA Input

6.10.3 Units
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for selecting measurement units is
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default units are displayed in bold type.
SN Units
Refer to the pulse flow Programming diagram to com- GPM
plete this function. GPH
cu ft/min
cu ft/hour

L/min
L/hour
m3/hour

6.10.4 Filter
The display screen for entering the input filter value in S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

bold type. Refer to the pulse flow Programming dia- SN Input Filter
005sec
gram to complete this function.

63
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.11 CURRENT INPUT PROGRAMMING

6.11.1 DESCRIPTION
This section describes how to configure the Model 1056 analyzer for current input measurement when wired to an
external device that transmits 4-20mA or 0-20mA analog current output. The following programming and configu-
ration functions are covered.

TABLE 6-13 CURRENT INPUT PROGRAMMING


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
Current 6.11.2 Measurement type mA input Override the default (Flow) and select mA current input
Input 6.11.3 mA Input Temperature Select Temperature, Pressure, Flow or Other
6.11.4 Measurement units: C Select measurement units based on selected input device type
6.11.5 Input Range: 4-20mA Select 4-20mA or 0-20mA
6.11.6 Low Value: 0.000C Enter the low measurement value to assign to 4mA
6.11.7 High Value: 100.0C Enter the high measurement value to assign to 20mA
6.11.8 Filter: 05 sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
A detailed flow diagram for current input programming is provided at the end of Sec. 6 to guide you through all
basic programming and configuration functions.

To configure the current input measurement board:


1. Press MENU S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. SN Configure
4. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to Measure: mA Input
mA Input: Temperature
current input. Press ENTER.
Units: C
Input Range: 4-20mA
Note that factory default is Pulse Flow not mA Input.
The user must override the factory default and select Low Value: 0.001%
mA Input to enable the current input functionality. Upon High Value : 100.0%
selecting mA Input, the following menu screen will Filter: 5sec
appear to allow complete programming of mA Current
Input.

To program current input, scroll to the desired item and press ENTER.

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each programming routine.
Use the flow diagram for current input programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the live screen prompts to complete
programming.

6.11.2 Measurement S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the signal board func- S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
tionality is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Measurement
bold type. Scroll down to select mA Input to enable Pulse Flow
the current input functionality. Refer to the current mA Input
input Programming flow diagram to complete this func-
tion.

6.11.3 mA Input S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the type of measure- S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
ment is shown. The default measurement type for mA SN mA Input
Input is displayed in bold type. Refer to the current Temperature
input Programming flow diagram to complete this function. Pressure
Flow
Other
64
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.11.4 Units S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting measurement units is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

shown. The default value for temperature is displayed in SN Units


bold type. Refer to the current input Programming flow C
F
diagram to complete this function.

If Pressure is selected as the measurement type for S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


mA Input, the following display screen is shown: S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Units
mm Hg
in Hg
atm
kPa
mbar
bar

The current input board can also be used to accept a S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
4-20mA current input from a pulse flow sensor. If S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Flow is selected as the measurement type for the SN Units
4-20mA current input board, the following display GPM
screen is shown: GPH
cu ft/min
cu ft/hour
L/min
L/hour
m3/hour

Current input can serve as a universal measurement S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


board. 4-20mA current input can be accepted from any S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
device and assigned to represent a wide range of SN Units
measurements. If Other is selected as the measure- %
% Saturation
ment type for the 4-20mA current input board, the fol-
pH
lowing display screen is shown: mV

Any of the following units can also be selected to represent the 4-20mA current input. Simply scroll down to
identify and select the desired measurement units as listed in the table below.
S/cm ppm g/L NTU ft/sec
mS/cm ppb mg/L FTU m/sec
M-cm g/L FNU
k-cm none

6.11.5 Input Range S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the Input Range is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
shown. The default value for mA Input is displayed in SN Input Range
bold type. Refer to the current input Programming 4-20mA
flow diagram to complete this function. 0-20mA

65
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

6.11.6 Low Value S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the Low Value to be S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
assigned to 4mA (or 0mA) current input is shown. The SN Low Value
default value for temperature is displayed in bold type. 0.000C
Refer to the current input Programming flow diagram
to complete this function.

6.11.7 High Value S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the High Value to be S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
assigned to 20mA current input is shown. The default SN High Value
value for temperature is displayed in bold type. Refer 100.0C
to the current input Programming flow diagram to com-
plete this function.

6.11.8 Filter S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

seconds is shown. The default value is displayed in SN Input Filter


bold type. Refer to the current input Programming 005sec
diagram to complete this function. .

66
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

FIGURE 6-1 Configuring pH/ORP Measurements

67
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

FIGURE 6-2 Configure Contacting Measurements

68
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

FIGURE 6-3 Configure Toroidal Measurements

69
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

FIGURE 6-5 Configure Oxygen Measurements

70
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

FIGURE 6-4 Configure Chlorine Measurements

FIGURE 6-6 Configure Ozone Measurements

71
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

FIGURE 6-7 Configure Turbidity Measurement

72
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

FIGURE 6-8 Configure Flow Measurement

FIGURE 6-9 Configure mA Current Input Measurement

73
MODEL 1056 SECTION 6.0
PROGRAMMING THE MEASUREMENTS

74 This page left blank intentionally


MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION
7.1 CALIBRATION INTRODUCTION
7.2 pH CALIBRATION
7.3 ORP CALIBRATION
7.4 CONTACTING CONDUCTIVITY CALIBRATION
7.5 TOROIDAL CONDUCTIVITY CALIBRATION
7.6 CHLORINE CALIBRATION
7.6.1 FREE CHLORINE
7.6.2 TOTAL CHLORINE
7.6.3 MONOCHLORAMINE
7.6.4 pH-INDEPENDENT FREE CHLORINE
7.7 OXYGEN CALIBRATION
7.8 OZONE CALIBRATION
7.9 TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION
7.10 TURBIDITY CALIBRATION
7.11 FLOW CALIBRATION

7.1 CALIBRATION INTRODUCTION 4. Standardization calibration (1-point) for pH, ORP


Calibration is the process of adjusting or standardizing and Redox (pH Cal - Sec.7.2 and 7.3)
the analyzer to a lab test or a calibrated laboratory 5. Entering the cell constant of a conductivity
instrument, or standardizing to some known reference sensor (Conductivity Cal - Sec. 7.4 and 7.5)
(such as a commercial buffer). 6. Calibrating the sensor in a conductivity standard
Conductivity Cal - Sec. 7.4 and 7.5)
The auto-recognition feature of the analyzer will enable 7. Calibrating the analyzer to a laboratory
the appropriate calibration screens to allow calibration for instrument (Contacting Conductivity Cal - Sec.7.4)
any single sensor configuration or dual sensor config- 8. Zeroing an chlorine, oxygen or ozone sensor
uration of the analyzer. Completion of Quick Start upon (Amperometric Cal - Secs 7.6, 7.7, 7.8)
first power up enables live measurements but does not 9. Calibrating an oxygen sensor in air (Oxygen Cal
ensure accurate readings in the lab or in process. - Secs 7.6)
Calibration should be performed with each attached 10. Calibrating the sensor to a sample of known
sensor to ensure accurate, repeatable readings. concentration (Amperometric Cal - Secs 7.6, 7.7, 7.8)
11. Enter a manual reference temperature for
This section covers the following programming and temperature compensation of the process
configuration functions: measurement

1. Auto buffer cal for pH (pH Cal - Sec.7.2)


2. Manual buffer cal for pH (pH Cal - Sec.7.2)
3. Set calibration stabilization criteria for pH (pH Cal -
Sec.7.2)

75
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.2 pH CALIBRATION

7.2.1 DESCRIPTION
New sensors must be calibrated before use. Regular recalibration is also necessary. Use auto calibration instead of manual
calibration. Auto calibration avoids common pitfalls and reduces errors. The analyzer recognizes the buffers and uses
temperature-corrected pH values in the calibration. Once the Model 1056 successfully completes the calibration, it calcu-
lates and displays the calibration slope and offset. The slope is reported as the slope at 25C.
THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE THE MODEL 1056 WITH A pH SENSOR. THE FOLLOWING
CALIBRATION ROUTINES ARE COVERED.

TABLE 7-1 pH Calibration Routines


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
pH 7.2.2 Auto Calibration - pH 2 point buffer calibration with auto buffer recognition
7.2.3 Manual Calibration - pH 2 point buffer calibration with manual buffer value entry
7.2.4 Entering A Known Slope Value - pH Slope calibration with manual entry of known slope value
7.2.5 Standardization - pH 1 point buffer calibration with manual buffer value entry

A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines.
To calibrate pH: The following screen will appear. To calibrate pH or
1. Press the MENU button Temperature scroll to the desired item and press
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER. ENTER.
3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
pH. Press ENTER. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
4. Select pH. Press ENTER. SN Calibrate?
pH
Temperature

The following sub-sections show the initial display screen that appears for each calibration routine. Use the flow
diagram for pH calibration at the end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts to complete calibration.

7.2.2 AUTO CALIBRATION pH S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


This screen appears after selecting pH calibration. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN pH Cal
Buffer Cal
Standardize
Slope: 59.16mV/pH
Offset: 600 mV

Note that pH auto calibration criteria can be changed. The following screen will appear to allow adjustment of
The following criteria can be adjusted: these criteria:
 Stabilization time (default 10 sec.)
 Stabilization pH value (default 0.02 pH)
 Type of Buffer used for AUTO CALIBRATION
(default is Standard, non-commercial buffers). S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The following commercial buffer tables are recognized S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

by the analyzer: SN Setup


Stable Time: 10 sec
 Standard (NIST plus pH7)
Stable Delta: 0.02 pH
 DIN 19267 Buffer: Standard
 Ingold
 Merck

76
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

The following screen will appear if the auto cal is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
successful. The screen will return to the pH Buffer Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Menu. SN pH Auto Cal
Slope: 59.16 mV/pH
Offset: 60 mV

The following screens may appear if the auto cal is unsuccessful.


1. A High Slope Error will generate this screen display: S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN pH Auto Cal
High Slope Error
Calculated: 62.11 mV/pH
Max: 62.00 mV/pH
Press EXIT

2. A Low Slope Error will generate this screen display: S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN pH Auto Cal
Low Slope Error
Calculated: 39.11mV/pH
Min: 40.00 mV/pH
Press EXIT

3. An Offset Error will generate this screen display: S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN pH Auto Cal
Offset Error
Calculated: 61.22mV
Max: 60.00mV
Press EXIT

7.2.3 MANUAL CALIBRATION pH tion.


New sensors must be calibrated before use. Regular S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
recalibration is also necessary. Use manual calibration S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
if non-standard buffers are being used; otherwise, use SN pH Manual Cal
auto calibration. Auto calibration avoids common pitfalls Buffer 1
and reduces errors. Buffer 2
The adjacent appears after selecting Manual pH calibra-

7.2.4 ENTERING A KNOWN SLOPE VALUE pH S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


If the electrode slope is known from other measure- S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
ments, it can be entered directly in the Model 1056 ana- SN pH Slope@25C
lyzer. The slope must be entered as the slope at 25C. 59.16 mV/pH

7.2.5 STANDARDIZATION pH
The pH measured by the Model 1056 analyzer can be
changed to match the reading from a second or referee
instrument. The process of making the two readings
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
agree is called standardization. During standardization, S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
the difference between the two pH values is converted SN Enter Value
to the equivalent voltage. The voltage, called the reference 07.00pH
offset, is added to all subsequent measured cell voltages
before they are converted to pH. If a standardized sensor
is placed in a buffer solution, the measured pH will differ
from the buffer pH by an amount equivalent to the
standardization offset.

77
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

The following screen may appear if ORP Cal is unsuccessful. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
An Offset Error will generate this screen display: S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Standardize
Offset Error
If the ORP Cal is successful, the screen will return to the
Calculated: 96mV
Cal sub-menu. Max: 60mV
Press EXIT

7.3 ORP CALIBRATION

7.3.1 DESCRIPTION
For process control, it is often important to make the measured ORP agree with the ORP of a standard solution. During
calibration, the measured ORP is made equal to the ORP of a standard solution at a single point.

THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE THE MODEL 1056 WITH AN ORP SENSOR. THE FOL-
LOWING CALIBRATION ROUTINE IS COVERED.

TABLE 7-2 ORP Calibration Routine


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
ORP 7.3.2 Standardization ORP 1 point buffer calibration with manual buffer value entry
A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines.

To calibrate ORP: The following screen will appear. To calibrate ORP or


1. Press the MENU button Temperature, scroll to the desired item and press
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER. ENTER.
3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
ORP. Press ENTER.
SN Calibrate?
4. Select ORP. Press ENTER.
ORP
Temperature

The following sub-sections show the initial display screen that appears for each calibration routine. Use the flow
diagram for ORP calibration at the end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts to complete calibration.

7.3.2 STANDARDIZATION ORP Cal sub-menu.


For process control, it is often important to make the
measured ORP agree with the ORP of a standard S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
solution. During calibration, the measured ORP is made S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
equal to the ORP of a standard solution at a single SN Enter Value
point. This screen appears after selecting ORP cali- +0600 mV
bration:

If the ORP Cal is successful, the screen will return to the

The following screen may appear if ORP Cal is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
unsuccessful. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Standardize
Offset Error
Calculated: 61.22mV
Max: 60.00mV
Press EXIT

78
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.4 CONTACTING CONDUCTIVITY CALIBRATION standard solution. Use this method if the sensor can be easily
removed from the process piping and a standard is
7.4.1 DESCRIPTION available. Be careful using standard solutions having
PLACING A NEW CONDUCTIVITY SENSOR IN SERVICE conductivity less than 100 S/cm. Low conductivity standards
New conductivity sensors rarely need calibration. The cell are highly susceptible to atmospheric contamination. Avoid
constant printed on the label is sufficiently accurate for most calibrating sensors with 0.01/cm cell constants against
applications. conductivity standards having conductivity greater than 100
CALIBRATING AN IN-SERVICE CONDUCTIVITY SENSOR S/cm. The resistance of these solutions may be too low for
1. After a conductivity sensor has been in service for a period an accurate measurement. Calibrate sensors with 0.01/cm
of time, recalibration may be necessary. There are three cell constant using method c.
ways to calibrate a sensor.
c. To calibrate a 0.01/cm sensor, check it against a standard
a. Use a standard instrument and sensor to measure the instrument and 0.01/cm sensor while both sensors are
conductivity of the process stream. It is not necessary to measuring water having a conductivity between 5 and 10
remove the sensor from the process piping. The temperature S/cm. To avoid drift caused by absorption of atmospheric
correction used by the standard instrument may not exactly carbon dioxide, saturate the sample with air before making
match the temperature correction used by the Model 1056. the measurements.
To avoid errors, turn off temperature correction in both the To ensure adequate flow past the sensor during calibration,
analyzer and the standard instrument. take the sample downstream from the sensor. For best
results, use a flow-through standard cell. If the process
b. Place the sensor in a solution of known conductivity and temperature is much different from ambient, keep
make the analyzer reading match the conductivity of the connecting lines short and insulate the flow cell.

THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE THE MODEL 1056 WITH AN ATTACHED CONTACTING
CONDUCTIVITY SENSOR. THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION ROUTINES ARE COVERED.

TABLE 7-3 Contacting Conductivity Calibration Routines


Measure Sec. Menu function: default Description
Contacting 7.4.2 Cell K: 1.00000/cm Enter the cell Constant for the sensor
Conductivity 7.4.3 Zero Cal Zero the analyzer with the sensor attached
7.4.4 In Process Cal Standardize the sensor to a known conductivity
7.4.5 Meter Cal Calibrate the analyzer to a lab conductivity instrument
7.4.6 Cal Factor: 0.95000/cm Enter the Cal Factor for 4-Electrode sensors from the sensor tag

A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines
To calibrate contacting conductivity:
1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
contacting conductivity. Press ENTER.
SN Calibrate?
4. Select Conductivity. Press ENTER.
Conductivity
Temperature
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate
Conductivity or Temperature, scroll to the desired item
and press ENTER.

The following sub-sections show the initial display S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
screen that appears for each calibration routine. Use S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
the flow diagram for Conductivity calibration at the SN Calibration
end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts for each rou- Zero Cal
tine to complete calibration. In Process Cal
Meter Cal
The adjacent screen appears after selecting Cell K: 1.00000/cm
Conductivity calibration:
79
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.4.2 ENTERING THE CELL CONSTANT


New conductivity sensors rarely need calibration. The
cell constant printed on the label is sufficiently accurate
for most applications. The cell constant should be
entered:
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
When the unit is installed for the first time
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
When the probe is replaced SN Cell Constant
1.00000 /cm
The display screen for entering a cell Constant for the
sensor is shown. The default value is displayed in bold
type.

7.4.3 ZEROING THE INSTRUMENT


This procedure is used to compensate for small offsets
to the conductivity signal that are present even when
there is no conductivity to be measured. This procedure
is affected by the length of extension cable and should
always be repeated if any changes in extension cable or
sensor have been made. Electrically connect the
conductivity probe as it will actually be used and S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
place the measuring portion of the probe in air. Be
SN Zero Cal
sure the probe is dry.
In Air
In Water
The adjacent screen will appear after selecting Zero
Cal from the Conductivity Calibration screen:

The adjacent screen will appear if zero Cal is successful. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The screen will return to the conductivity Cal Menu. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Zero Cal
Sensor Zero Done

The adjacent screen may appear if zero Cal is unsuccessful. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Zero Cal
Sensor Zero Fail
Offset too high

Press EXIT

7.4.4 CALIBRATING THE SENSOR IN A CONDUCTIVITY


STANDARD (IN PROCESS CAL)
This procedure is used to calibrate the sensor and
analyzer against a solution of known conductivity.
This is done by submerging the probe in the sample of
known conductivity, then adjusting the displayed value, if
necessary, to correspond to the conductivity value of
the sample. Turn temperature correction off and use the
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
conductivity of the standard. Use a calibrated ther-
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
mometer to measure temperature. The probe must be
SN InProcess Cal
cleaned before performing this procedure. Wait for stable
reading.
The adjacent screen will appear after selecting In
Process Cal from the Conductivity Calibration screen:

80
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

The adjacent screen will appear if In Process Cal is suc- S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
cessful. The screen will return to the conductivity Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

Menu. SN InProcess Cal


Updated cell
constant:
1.00135/cm

The adjacent screen may appear if In Process Cal is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
unsuccessful. The screen will return to the conductivity S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Cal Men SN InProcess Cal
Calibration
Error

Press EXIT

7.4.5 CALIBRATING THE SENSOR TO A LABORATORY


INSTRUMENT (METER CAL)
This procedure is used to check and correct the
conductivity reading of the Model 1056 using a laboratory
conductivity instrument. This is done by submerging the
conductivity probe in a bath and measuring the conduc-
tivity of a grab sample of the same bath water with a
separate laboratory instrument. The Model 1056 reading
is then adjusted to match the conductivity reading of the S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
lab instrument. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Meter Cal
The adjacent screen will appear after selecting Meter Use precision
Cal from the Conductivity Calibration screen: resistors only

After pressing ENTER, the display shows the live value S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
measured by the sensor S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Enter Value
xx.xx k

If the meter cal is successful the screen will return to the S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
conductivity Cal Menu. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Meter Cal
The adjacent screen will appear if Meter Cal is unsuccessful. Calibration
Error
The screen will return to the conductivity Cal Menu.
Press EXIT

7.4.6 Cal Factor The display screen for entering Cal Factor is shown.
Upon initial installation and power up, if 4-electrode The default value is displayed in bold type. If neces-
was selected for the sensor type in the Quick Start sary after initial installation and start-up, enter the Cal
menus, the user enters a Cell Constant and a Cal Factor as printed on the sensor tag.
Factor using the instrument keypad. The cell constant
is needed to convert measured conductance to conduc-
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
tivity as displayed on the analyzer screen. The Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Factor entry is needed increase the accuracy of the live SN Cal Factor
conductivity readings, especially at low conductivity 0.95000 /cm
readings below 20uS/cm. Both the Cell Constant and
the Cal Factor are printed on the tag attached to the
4-electrode sensor/cable.

81
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.5 TOROIDAL CONDUCTIVITY CALIBRATION

7.5.1 DESCRIPTION
Calibration is the process of adjusting or standardizing the analyzer to a lab test or a calibrated laboratory instru-
ment, or standardizing to some known reference (such as a conductivity standard). This section contains procedures
for the first time use and for routine calibration of the Model 1056 analyzer.

THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE THE MODEL 1056 WITH AN ATTACHED INDUC-
TIVE/TOROIDAL CONDUCTIVITY SENSOR. THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION ROUTINES ARE COVERED

TABLE 7-4 Toroidal Conductivity Calibration

Measure Sec. Calibration function: default value Description


Toroidal 7.5.2 Cell K: 3.00000/cm Enter the cell Constant for the sensor
Conductivity
7.5.3 Zero Cal Zeroing the analyzer with the sensor attached
7.5.4 In Process Cal Standardizing the sensor to a known conductivity

A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines.

To calibrate toroidal conductivity:


1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to
Toroidal Conductivity. Press ENTER.
4. Select Conductivity. Press ENTER. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate Toroidal SN Calibrate?
Conductivity or Temperature, scroll to the desired item Conductivity
and press ENTER Temperature

The following sub-sections show the initial display


screen that appears for each calibration routine. Use
the flow diagram for Conductivity calibration at the
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts to complete
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
calibration.
SN Calibration
Zero Cal
The adjacent screen appears after selecting In Process Cal
Conductivity calibration: Cell K: 1.00000/cm

82
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.5.2 ENTERING THE CELL CONSTANT


New conductivity sensors rarely need calibration. The
cell constant printed on the label is sufficiently accurate
for most applications. The cell constant should be
entered:
When the unit is installed for the first time
When the probe is replaced
During troubleshooting
This procedure sets up the analyzer for the probe type
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
connected to the analyzer. Each type of probe has a S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
specific cell constant: SN Cell Constant
3.00000 /cm
The display screen for entering a cell constant for the
sensor is shown. The default value is displayed in bold
type.

7.5.3 ZEROING THE INSTRUMENT


This procedure is used to compensate for small offsets
to the conductivity signal that are present even when
there is no conductivity to be measured. This procedure
is affected by the length of extension cable and should
always be repeated if any changes in extension cable
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
or sensor have been made. Electrically connect the S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
conductivity probe as it will actually be used and place SN Zero Cal
the measuring portion of the probe in air. In Air
In Water
The adjacent screen will appear after selecting Zero
Cal from the Conductivity Calibration screen:

The adjacent screen will appear if zero Cal is successful. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The screen will return to the conductivity Cal Menu. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Zero Cal
Sensor Zero Done
.

The adjacent screen may appear if zero Cal is unsuccessful. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Zero Cal
Sensor Zero Fail
Offset too high

Press EXIT

7.5.4 CALIBRATING THE SENSOR IN A CONDUCTIVITY


STANDARD (IN PROCESS CAL)
This procedure is used to check and correct the
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
conductivity reading of the Model 1056 to ensure that
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
the reading is accurate. This is done by submerging the
SN InProcess Cal
probe in the sample of known conductivity, then adjusting Wait for stable
the displayed value, if necessary, to correspond to the reading.
conductivity value of the sample. The probe must be
cleaned before performing this procedure. The temper-
ature reading must also be checked and standardized if
necessary, prior to performing this procedure.

The adjacent screen will appear after selecting In


Process Cal from the Conductivity Calibration screen: 83
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

The following screen will appear if In Process Cal is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
successful. The screen will return to the conductivity S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Cal Menu. SN InProcess Cal
Updated cell
constant:
3.01350/cm

This screen may appear if In Process Cal is unsuccessful. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The screen will return to the conductivity Cal Menu. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
Calibration
Error

Press EXIT

7.6 CALIBRATION CHLORINE


With a Chlorine measurement board and the appropriate sensor, Model 1056 can measure any of four variants of
Chlorine:
Free Chlorine
Total Chlorine
Monochloramine
pH-independent Free Chlorine
The section describes how to calibrate any compatible amperometric chlorine sensor. The following calibration
routines are covered in the family of supported Chlorine sensors:
Air Cal
Zero Cal
In Process Cal

7.6.1 CALIBRATION FREE CHLORINE

7.6.1.1 DESCRIPTION
A free chlorine sensor generates a current directly proportional to the concentration of free chlorine in the sam-
ple. Calibrating the sensor requires exposing it to a solution containing no chlorine (zero standard) and to a solu-
tion containing a known amount of chlorine (full-scale standard). The zero calibration is necessary because chlo-
rine sensors, even when no chlorine is in the sample, generate a small current called the residual current. The
analyzer compensates for the residual current by subtracting it from the measured current before converting the
result to a chlorine value. New sensors require zeroing before being placed in service, and sensors should be
zeroed whenever the electrolyte solution is replaced. Either of the following makes a good zero standard:
Deionized water containing about 500 ppm sodium chloride. Dissolve 0.5 grams (1/8 teaspoonful) of table
salt in 1 liter of water. DO NOT USE DEIONIZED WATER ALONE FOR ZEROING THE SENSOR. THE
CONDUCTIVITY OF THE ZERO WATER MUST BE GREATER THAN 50 S/cm.
Tap water known to contain no chlorine. Expose tap water to bright sunlight for at least 24 hours.
The purpose of the In Process calibration is to establish the slope of the calibration curve. Because stable chlorine
standards do not exist, the sensor must be calibrated against a test run on a grab sample of the process liquid.
Several manufacturers offer portable test kits for this purpose. Observe the following precautions when taking
and testing the grab sample.
Take the grab sample from a point as close to the sensor as possible. Be sure that taking the sample does not alter
the flow of the sample to the sensor. It is best to install the sample tap just downstream from the sensor.
Chlorine solutions are unstable. Run the test immediately after taking the sample. Try to calibrate the sensor
when the chlorine concentration is at the upper end of the normal operating range.

THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE THE MODEL 1056 WITH A FREE CHLORINE SENSOR.
THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION ROUTINES ARE COVERED.

84
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

TABLE 7-5 Free Chlorine Calibration Routines


Measure Sec. Calibration function: default value Description
Free Chlorine 7.6.1.2 Zero Cal Zeroing the sensor in solution with zero free chlorine
7.6.1.3 In Process Cal Standardizing to a sample of known chlorine concentration

A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines.
To calibrate free chlorine:
1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to
Free Chlorine. Press ENTER.
4. Select Free Chlorine. Press ENTER. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate Free SN Calibrate?
Chlorine or Temperature, scroll to the desired item and Free Chlorine
press ENTER. Temperature

The following sub-sections show the initial display


screen that appears for each calibration routine. Use
the flow diagram for Chlorine calibration at the end S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts to complete cal- S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
ibration. SN Calibration
Zero Cal
In Process Cal
The adjacent screen appears after selecting Free
Chlorine calibration:

7.6.1.2 ZEROING THE SENSOR. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The adjacent screen will appear during Zero Cal. Be S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
sure sensor has been running in zero solution for at SN Zero Cal
least two hours before starting zero step. Zeroing
Wait

The adjacent screen will appear if In Zero Cal is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
successful. The screen will return to the Amperometric S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

Cal Menu. SN Zero Cal


Sensor zero done

The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is unsuc- S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
cessful. The screen will return to the Amperometric Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Menu. SN Zero Cal
Sensor zero failed

Press EXIT

7.6.1.3 IN PROCESS CALIBRATION S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The adjacent screen will appear prior to In Process Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
Wait for stable
reading.

85
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

If the In Process Cal is successful, the screen will return S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
to the Cal sub-menu. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is unsuc- SN InProcess Cal
cessful. The screen will return to the Amperometric Cal Calibration
Menu. Error

Press EXIT

7.6.2 CALIBRATION TOTAL CHLORINE zeroed whenever the electrolyte solution is replaced.
The best zero standard is deionized water.
7.6.2.1 DESCRIPTION
Total chlorine is the sum of free and combined chlorine. The purpose of the In Process Calibration is to
The continuous determination of total chlorine requires establish the slope of the calibration curve.
two steps. First, the sample flows into a conditioning Because stable total chlorine standards do not exist, the
system (TCL) where a pump continuously adds acetic sensor must be calibrated against a test run on a
acid and potassium iodide to the sample. The acid grab sample of the process liquid. Several manufac-
lowers the pH, which allows total chlorine in the sample turers offer portable test kits for this purpose. Observe
to quantitatively oxidize the iodide in the reagent to the following
iodine. In the second step, the treated sample flows precautions when taking and testing the grab sample:
to the sensor. The sensor is a membrane-covered Take the grab sample from a point as close as
amperometric sensor, whose output is proportional to possible to the inlet of the TCL sample conditioning system.
the concentration of iodine. Because the concentration Be sure that taking the sample does not alter the flow
of iodine is proportional to the concentration of total through the TCL.
chlorine, the analyzer can be calibrated to read total Chlorine solutions are unstable. Run the test immedi-
chlorine. Because the sensor really measures iodine, ately after taking the sample. Try to calibrate the sensor
calibrating the sensor requires exposing it to a solution when the chlorine concentration is at the upper end of
containing no iodine (zero standard) and to a solution the normal operating range.
containing a known amount of iodine (full-scale standard).
The Zero calibration is necessary because the sensor, Note this measurement must be made using the Model
even when no iodine is present, generates a small TCL total chlorine sample conditioning system.
current called the residual current. The analyzer
compensates for the residual current by subtracting it THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE
from the measured current before converting the result THE MODEL 1056 WITH AN ATTACHED TOTAL
to a total chlorine value. New sensors require zeroing CHLORINE SENSOR. THE FOLLOWING
before being placed in service, and sensors should be CALIBRATION ROUTINES ARE COVERED.

TABLE 7- 6 Total Chlorine Calibration Routines


Measure Sec. Calibration function: default value Description
Total Chlorine 7.6.2.2 Zero Cal Zeroing the sensor in solution with zero total chlorine
7.6.2.3 In Process Cal Standardizing to a sample of known chlorine concentration

A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines.

To calibrate total chlorine:


1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Total Chlorine. Press ENTER. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
4. Select Total Chlorine. Press ENTER. SN Calibrate?
Total Chlorine
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate Total Temperature
Chlorine or Temperature, scroll to the desired item and
press ENTER

86
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
display screen that appears for each calibration routine. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Use the flow diagram for Chlorine calibration at the SN Calibration
end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts to complete Zero Cal
calibration. In Process Cal

This adjacent screen appears after selecting Total


Chlorine calibration:

7.6.2.2 ZEROING THE SENSOR. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The adjacent screen will appear during Zero Cal. Be S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
sure sensor has been running in zero solution for at SN Zero Cal
least two hours before starting zero step. Zeroing
Wait

The adjacent screen will appear if In Zero Cal is suc- S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
cessful. The screen will return to the Amperometric S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Cal Menu. SN Zero Cal
Sensor zero done

The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
unsuccessful. The screen will return to the
Amperometric Cal Menu. SN Zero Cal
Sensor zero failed

Press EXIT

7.6.2.3 IN PROCESS CALIBRATION S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The adjacent screen will appear prior to In Process Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
Wait for stable
reading.

If the In Process Cal is successful, the screen will S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
return to the Cal sub-menu. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
The adjacent screen may appear if In Process Cal is Calibration error
unsuccessful. The screen will return to the
Press EXIT
Amperometric Cal Menu.

87
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.6.3 CALIBRATION - MONOCHLORAMINE

7.6.3.1 DESCRIPTION The purpose of the In Process calibration is to establish


A monochloramine sensor generates a current directly the slope of the calibration curve. Because stable
proportional to the concentration of monochloramine in monochloramine standards do not exist, the sensor
the sample. Calibrating the sensor requires exposing it must be calibrated against a test run on a grab sample
to a solution containing no monochloramine (zero of the process liquid. Several manufacturers offer
standard) and to a solution containing a known amount portable test kits for this purpose. Observe the following
of monochloramine (full-scale standard). The Zero precautions when taking and testing the grab sample.
calibration is necessary because monochloramine
sensors, even when no monochloramine is in the Take the grab sample from a point as close to the sen-
sample, generate a small current called the residual or sor as possible. Be sure that taking the sample does not
zero current. The analyzer compensates for the residual alter the flow of the sample to the sensor. It is best to
current by subtracting it from the measured current install the sample tap just downstream from the sensor.
before converting the result to a monochloramine value.
New sensors require zeroing before being placed in Monochloramine solutions are moderately unstable.
service, and sensors should be zeroed whenever the Run the test as soon as possible after taking the sam-
electrolyte solution is replaced. The best zero standard ple. Try to calibrate the sensor when the monochlo-
is deionized water. ramine concentration is at the upper end of the normal
operating range.
THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE THE MODEL 1056 WITH AN ATTACHED MONO-
CHLORAMINE SENSOR. THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION ROUTINES ARE COVERED.

TABLE 7-7 Monochloramine Calibration Routines


Measure Sec. Calibration function: default value Description
Monochloramine 7.6.3.2 Zero Cal Zeroing the sensor in solution with zero monochloramine
7.6.3.3 In Process Cal Standardizing to a sample of known chlorine concentration

A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines.
To calibrate monochloramine:
1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to
Monochloramine. Press ENTER.
4. Select Monochloramine. Press ENTER. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate SN Calibrate?
Monochloramine or Temperature, scroll to the desired Monochloramine
item and press ENTER. Temperature

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial


display screen that appears for each calibration routine.
Use the flow diagram for Chlorine calibration at the
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts to complete
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
calibration.
SN Calibration
Zero Cal
The adjacent screen appears after selecting In Process Cal
Monochloramine calibration:

88
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.6.3.2 ZEROING THE SENSOR. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The adjacent screen will appear during Zero Cal. Be S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
sure sensor has been running in zero solution for at SN Zero Cal
least two hours before starting zero step. Zeroing
Wait

The adjacent screen will appear if In Zero Cal is suc- S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
cessful. The screen will return to the Amperometric S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Cal Menu. SN Zero Cal
Sensor zero done

The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
unsuccessful. The screen will return to the S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

Amperometric Cal Menu. SN Zero Cal


Sensor zero failed

Press EXIT

7.6.3.3 IN PROCESS CALIBRATION S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The adjacent screen will appear prior to In Process Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
Wait for stable
reading.

If the In Process Cal is successful, the screen will


return to the Cal sub-menu.
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen may appear if In Process Cal is S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
unsuccessful. The screen will return to the SN InProcess Cal
Amperometric Cal Menu. Calibration
Error

Press EXIT

89
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.6.4 pH-INDEPENDENT FREE CHLORINE The purpose of the In Process calibration is to


MEASUREMENT establish the slope of the calibration curve. Because
stable chlorine standards do not exist, the sensor must
7.6.4.1 DESCRIPTION be calibrated against a test run on a grab sample of
A free chlorine sensor generates a current directly the process liquid.
proportional to the concentration of free chlorine in the Several manufacturers offer portable test kits for this
sample. Calibrating the sensor requires exposing it to a purpose. Observe the following precautions when taking
solution containing no chlorine (zero standard) and to a and testing the grab sample.
solution containing a known amount of chlorine (full- Take the grab sample from a point as close to the sensor
scale standard). The zero calibration is necessary as possible. Be sure that taking the sample does
because chlorine sensors, even when no chlorine is in not alter the flow of the sample to the sensor. It is best
the sample, generate a small current called the residual to install the sample tap just downstream from the
current. The analyzer compensates for the residual sensor.
current by subtracting it from the measured current Chlorine solutions are unstable. Run the test immediately
before converting the result to a chlorine value. New after taking the sample. Try to calibrate the sensor
sensors require zeroing before being placed in service, when the chlorine concentration is at the upper end of
and sensors should be zeroed whenever the electrolyte the normal operating range.
solution is replaced. Either of the following makes a
good zero standard: Note: This measurement is made using the model
Deionized water. 498CL-01 - pH-independent Free Chlorine sensor
Tap water known to contain no chlorine. Expose tap manufactured by Rosemount Analytical.
water to bright sunlight for at least 24 hours.

THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE T H E M O D E L 1 0 5 6 W I T H A N AT TA C H E D PH-


INDEPENDENT FREE CHLORINE SENSOR. THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION ROUTINES ARE COVERED.

TABLE 7- 8 pH-independent Free Chlorine Calibration Routines


Measure Sec. Calibration function: default value Description

pH-independent 7.6.4.2 Zero Cal Zeroing the sensor in solution with zero free chlorine
Free Chlorine 7.6.4.3 In Process Cal Standardizing to a sample of known chlorine concentration

A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines.

To calibrate pH-independent free chlorine:


1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
pH-independent free chlorine. Press ENTER.
SN Calibrate?
4. Select pH Ind. Free Cl. Press ENTER. pH Ind. Free Cl
Temperature
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate pH-independent
Free Chlorine or Temperature, scroll to the desired item and
press ENTER.

90
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial


display screen that appears for each calibration
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
routine. Use the flow diagram for Chlorine
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
calibration at the end of Sec. 7 and the live screen
SN Calibration
prompts to complete calibration.
Zero Cal
In Process Cal
The adjacent screen appears after selecting pH-inde-
pendent free chlorine calibration:

7.6.4.2 ZEROING THE SENSOR. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The adjacent screen will appear during Zero Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Zero Cal
Zeroing
Wait

The adjacent screen will appear if In Zero Cal is suc- S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
cessful. The screen will return to the Amperometric S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Cal Menu. SN Zero Cal
Sensor zero done

The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
unsuccessful. The screen will return to the S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Amperometric Cal Menu. SN Zero Cal
Sensor zero failed

Press EXIT

7.6.4.3 IN PROCESS CALIBRATION S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The following screen will appear prior to In Process Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
Wait for stable
reading.

If the In Process Cal is successful, the screen will S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
return to the Cal sub-menu. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
The adjacent screen may appear if In Process Cal is Calibration
unsuccessful. The screen will return to the Error
Amperometric Cal Menu.
Press EXIT

91
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.7 CALIBRATION OXYGEN diffusion rate depends on the difference in chemical


potential between oxygen in the sensor and oxygen in
7.7.1 DESCRIPTION the sample. An electrochemical reaction, which
Oxygen sensors generate a current directly proportional destroys any oxygen molecules entering the sensor,
to the concentration of dissolved oxygen in the sample. keeps the concentration (and the chemical potential) of
Calibrating the sensor requires exposing it to a solution oxygen inside the sensor equal to zero. Therefore, the
containing no oxygen (zero standard) and to a solution chemical potential of oxygen in the sample alone deter-
containing a known amount of oxygen (full-scale mines the diffusion rate and the sensor current.
standard). The Zero Calibration is necessary because
oxygen sensors, even when no oxygen is present in the When the sensor is calibrated, the chemical potential of
sample, generate a small current called the residual oxygen in the standard determines the sensor current.
current. The analyzer compensates for the residual Whether the sensor is calibrated in air or air-saturated
current by subtracting it from the measured current water is immaterial. The chemical potential of oxygen
before converting the result to a dissolved oxygen is the same in either phase. Normally, to make the
value. New sensors require zeroing before being placed calculation of solubility in common units (like ppm DO)
in service, and sensors should be zeroed whenever the simpler, it is convenient to use water-saturated air for
electrolyte solution is replaced. The recommended zero calibration. Automatic air calibration is standard. The
standard is 5% sodium sulfite in water, although user simply exposes the sensor to water-saturated air.
oxygen-free nitrogen can also be used. The Model The analyzer monitors the sensor current. When the
499A TrDO sensor, used for the determination of current is stable, the analyzer stores the current and
trace (ppb) oxygen levels, has very low residual measures the temperature using a temperature element
current and does not normally require zeroing. The inside the oxygen sensor. The user must enter the
residual current in the 499A TrDO sensor is equivalent barometric pressure.
to less than 0.5 ppb oxygen.
From the temperature the analyzer calculates the
The purpose of the In Process Calibration is to saturation vapor pressure of water. Next, it calculates
establish the slope of the calibration curve. Because the the pressure of dry air by subtracting the vapor pressure
solubility of atmospheric oxygen in water as a function from the barometric pressure. Using the fact that dry air
of temperature and barometric pressure is well known, always contains 20.95% oxygen, the analyzer calcu-
the natural choice for a full-scale standard is air-saturated lates the partial pressure of oxygen. Once the analyzer
water. However, air-saturated water is difficult to knows the partial pressure of oxygen, it uses the
prepare and use, so the universal practice is to use air Bunsen coefficient to calculate the equilibrium solubility
for calibration. From the point of view of the oxygen of atmospheric oxygen in water at the prevailing tem-
sensor, air and air-saturated water are identical. The perature. At 25C and 760 mm Hg, the equilibrium sol-
equivalence comes about because the sensor really ubility is 8.24 ppm. Often it is too difficult or messy to
measures the chemical potential of oxygen. Chemical remove the sensor from the process liquid for calibra-
potential is the force that causes oxygen molecules to tion. In this case, the sensor can be calibrated against
diffuse from the sample into the sensor where they can a measurement made with a portable laboratory instru-
be measured. It is also the force that causes oxygen ment. The laboratory instrument typically uses a mem-
molecules in air to dissolve in water and to continue to brane-covered amperometric sensor that has been cali-
dissolve until the water is saturated with oxygen. Once brated against water-saturated air.
the water is saturated, the chemical potential of oxygen
in the two phases (air and water) is the same. THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE
THE MODEL 1056 WITH AN OXYGEN SENSOR.
Oxygen sensors generate a current directly proportional THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION ROUTINES ARE
to the rate at which oxygen molecules diffuse through a COVERED.
membrane stretched over the end of the sensor. The

92
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

TABLE 7- 9 Oxygen Calibration Routines


Measure Sec. Calibration function: default value Description
Oxygen 7.7.2 Zero Cal Zeroing the sensor in a medium with zero oxygen
7.7.3 Air Cal Calibrating the sensor in a water-saturated air sample
7.7.4 In Process Cal Standardizing to a sample of known oxygen concentration
7.7.5 Sen@ 25C:2500nA/ppm Entering a known slope value for sensor response
7.7.6 Zero Current: 0nA Entering a known zero current for a specific sensor

A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines.

Oxygen sensors generate a current directly proportional


to the concentration of dissolved oxygen in the sample.
Calibrating the sensor requires exposing it to a solution
containing no oxygen (zero standard) and to a solution
containing a known amount of oxygen (full-scale standard).
Automatic air calibration is standard. The user simply
exposes the sensor to water-saturated air.

To calibrate oxygen:
1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to
oxygen. Press ENTER. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C

4. Select Oxygen. Press ENTER. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C


SN Calibrate?
Oxygen
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate Oxygen
Temperature
or Temperature, scroll to the desired item and press
ENTER

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
display screen that appears for each calibration routine. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Use the flow diagram for Oxygen calibration at the SN Calibration
end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts for each routine Air Cal
to complete calibration. Zero Cal
In Process Cal
Sen@ 25C:2500nA/ppm
The adjacent screen appears after selecting Oxygen
calibration: Zero Current: 1234nA

Air calibration criteria can be changed. The following S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
criteria can be adjusted: S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Setup
 Stabilization time (default 10 sec.)
Stable Time: 10 sec
 Stabilization pH value (default 0.05 ppm) Stable Delta: 0.05 ppm
 Salinity of the solution to be measured (default Salinity: 00.0
00.0 parts per thousand)
The adjacent screen will appear to allow adjustment of
these criteria

93
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.7.2 ZEROING THE SENSOR. S1: 1.234 nA


The adjacent screen will appear during Zero Cal S2: 1.456 nA
SN Zero Cal
. Zeroing
Wait

The adjacent screen will appear if In Zero Cal is suc- S1: 1.234 nA
cessful. The screen will return to the Amperometric S2: 1.456 nA

Cal Menu. SN Zero Cal


Sensor zero done

The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is S1: 1.234 nA


unsuccessful. The screen will return to the S2: 1.456 nA
Amperometric Cal Menu. SN Zero Cal
Sensor zero failed

Press EXIT

7.7.3 CALIBRATING THE SENSOR IN AIR S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The adjacent screen will appear prior to Air Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Air Cal
Start Calibration
Setup

The adjacent screen will appear if In Air Cal is suc- S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
cessful. The screen will return to the Amperometric S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

Cal Menu. SN Air Cal


Done

The adjacent screen will appear if In Air Cal is suc- S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
cessful. The screen will return to the Amperometric
SN Air Cal
Cal Menu. Failure
Check Sensor

Press EXIT

7.7.4 CALIBRATING THE SENSOR AGAINST A S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


STANDARD INSTRUMENT (IN PROCESS CAL) S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
The adjacent screen will appear prior to In Process Cal Wait for stable
reading.

If the In Process Cal is successful, the screen will S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
return to the Cal sub-menu. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is Calibration
unsuccessful. The screen will return to the Error
Amperometric Cal Menu.
Press EXIT

94
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.8 CALIBRATION OZONE against a test run on a grab sample of the process liquid.
Several manufacturers offer portable test kits for this
7.8.1 DESCRIPTION purpose. Observe the following precautions when taking
An ozone sensor generates a current directly and testing the grab sample.
proportional to the concentration of ozone in the sample. Take the grab sample from a point as close to the sensor
Calibrating the sensor requires exposing it to a solution as possible. Be sure that taking the sample does not
containing no ozone (zero standard) and to a solution alter the flow of the sample to the sensor. It is best to
containing a known amount of ozone (full-scale install the sample tap just downstream from the sensor.
standard). The Zero Calibration is necessary because Ozone solutions are unstable. Run the test immedi-
ozone sensors, even when no ozone is in the sample, ately after taking the sample. Try to calibrate the sensor
generate a small current called the residual or zero when the ozone concentration is at the upper end of the
current. The analyzer compensates for the residual normal operating range.
current by subtracting it from the measured current
before converting the result to an ozone value. New THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE
sensors require zeroing before being placed in service, THE MODEL 1056 WITH AN OZONE SENSOR. THE
and sensors should be zeroed whenever the electrolyte FOLLOWING CALIBRATION ROUTINES ARE COV-
solution is replaced. The best zero standard is deionized ERED.
water.

The purpose of the In Process Calibration is to establish


the slope of the calibration curve. Because stable ozone
standards do not exist, the sensor must be calibrated

TABLE 7- 10 Ozone Calibration Routines


Measure Ozone Sec. Calibration function: default value Description
7.8.2 Zero Cal Zeroing the sensor in solution with zero ozone
7.8.3 In Process Cal Standardizing to a sample of known ozone concentration

A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines.

To calibrate ozone:
1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C

ozone. Press ENTER. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

4. Select Ozone. Press ENTER. SN Calibrate?


Ozone
Temperature
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate Ozone or
Temperature, scroll to the desired item and press
ENTER.

95
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

The following sub-sections provide you with the S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
initial display screen that appears for each calibration S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
routine. Use the flow diagram for Ozone calibration SN Calibration
at the end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts to Zero Cal
complete calibration. In Process Cal

The adjacent screen appears after selecting Ozone


calibration:

7.8.2 ZEROING THE SENSOR. S1: 1.234 nA


The following screen will appear during Zero Cal S2: 1.456 nA
SN Zero Cal
Zeroing
Wait

The following screen will appear if In Zero Cal is S1: 1.234 nA


successful. The screen will return to the S2: 1.456 nA
Amperometric Cal Menu. SN Zero Cal
Sensor zero done

The following screen may appear if In Zero Cal is S1: 1.234 nA


unsuccessful. The screen will return to the S2: 1.456 nA
Amperometric Cal Menu. SN Zero Cal
Sensor zero failed

Press EXIT

7.8.3 IN PROCESS CALIBRATION S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The following screen will appear after selecting In S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

Process Cal SN InProcess Cal


Wait for stable
reading.

If the In Process Cal is successful, the screen will S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
return to the Cal sub-menu. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
Calibration
The following screen may appear if In Zero Cal is
Error
unsuccessful. The screen will return to the
Amperometric Cal Menu. Press EXIT

96
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.9 CALIBRATING TEMPERATURE

7.9.1 DESCRIPTION
Most liquid analytical measurements require temperature compensation (except ORP). The Model 1056 performs
temperature compensation automatically by applying internal temperature correction algorithms. Temperature cor-
rection can also be turned off. If temperature correction is off, the Model 1056 uses the manual temperature entered by
the user in all temperature correction calculations.

THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE TEMPERATURE IN THE MODEL 1056 ANALYZER. THE
FOLLOWING CALIBRATION ROUTINE IS COVERED.

TABLE 7- 11 Temperature Calibration Routine


Measure Sec. Calibration function: default value Description
Enter a manual reference temperature for temperature
Temperature 7.9.2 Calibrate
compensation of the process measurement

A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines.

To calibrate temperature: S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


1. Press the MENU button S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER. SN Calibrate
3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to +025.0C
the desired measurement. Press ENTER.
4. Select Temperature. Press ENTER.

The adjacent screen will appear.

The following sub-section provides you with the initial S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
display screen that appears for temperature calibration. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Use the flow diagram for Temp calibration at the SN Calibrate
end of Sec. 7 to complete calibration. Cal in progress.
Please wait.
7.9.2 CALIBRATION
The adjacent screen will appear during Temperature
Cal.

If the sensor Temperature offset is greater than 5 C S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


from the default value, the following screen will S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
appear: SN Temp Offset > 5C
Continue?
You may continue by selecting Yes or suspend this No
operation by selecting No. Yes

If the Temp Cal is successful, the screen will return to


the Cal Menu.

Note: To select automatic or manual temp compensation


or to program temperature units as C or F, refer to
Sec. 5.3 Programming Temperature in this manual

97
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.10 TURBIDITY

7.10.1 DESCRIPTION
This section describes how to calibrate the turbidity sensor against a user-prepared standard as a 2-point calibra-
tion with di-ionized water, against a 20 NTU user-prepared standard as a single point calibration, and against a
grab sample using a reference turbidimeter.

THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE THE MODEL 1056 WITH AN ATTACHED TURBIDITY
SENSOR AS PART OF THE COMPLETE CLARITY II TURBIDITY SYSTEM. THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION
ROUTINES ARE COVERED.

TABLE 7-12 TURBIDITY CALIBRATION ROUTINES


Measure Sec. Calibration function: default value Description
Turbidity 7.10.2 Slope Calibration Slope cal with pure water and a standard of known turbidity
7.10.3 Standardize Calibration Standardizing the sensor to a known turbidity
Standardizing the sensor to a known turbidity based on a
7.10.4 Grab Calibration
reference turbidimeter

A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines.
To calibrate Turbidity: The following screen will appear.
1. Press the MENU button
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to
SN Calibrate?
Turbidity. Press ENTER.
Turbidity
4. Select Turbidity. Press ENTER.

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
display screen that appears for each calibration rou- S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
tine. Use the flow diagram for Turbidity calibration SN Calibrate
at the end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts to Slope
complete calibration. Standard
Grab

7.10.2 SLOPE CALIBRATION Turbidity tered light signal and converts the result to turbidity. In
highly filtered samples, which scatter little light, the
This section describes how to conduct a 2-point cali- dark current can be a substantial amount of the signal
bration of the turbidity sensor against a user-prepared generated by the detector.
20NTU standard. The calibration requires two steps.
First, immerse the sensor in filtered water having very
low turbidity and measure the sensor output. Next,
increase the turbidity of the filtered water by a known
amount, typically 20 NTU, and measure the sensor
output again. The analyzer takes the two measure-
ments, applies a linearization correction (if necessary),
and calculates the sensitivity. Sensitivity is the sensor
output (in mV) divided by turbidity. A typical new sen-
sor has a sensitivity of about 10 mV/NTU. As the sen-
sor ages, the sensitivity decreases. The figure below
illustrates how turbidity calibration works. Before
beginning the calibration, the analyzer does a dark
current measurement. Dark current is the signal gener-
ated by the detector when no light is falling on it. The
analyzer subtracts the dark current from the raw scat-

98
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

This screen appears after selecting Slope calibration. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Slope Cal
Sensor in pure H2O?
Press ENTER

The following screen will appear if Slope Cal is suc- S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
cessful. The screen will return to the Turbidity Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Menu. SN Slope Cal
Cal Complete

The following screen may appear if Slope Cal is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
unsuccessful. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Slope Cal
Calibration
Error

Press EXIT

7.10.3 STANDARDIZE CALIBRATION - Turbidity This screen appears after selecting Standard calibration.
The turbidity sensor can also be calibrated against a
commercial standard. Stable 20.0 NTU standards are S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
available from a number of sources. Calibration using a
SN Standard Cal
commercial standard is simple. Filtered deionized water
Sensor in Standard?
is not required. Before beginning the calibration, the Press ENTER
analyzer does a dark current measurement. Dark cur-
rent is the signal generated by the detector even when
no light is falling on it. The analyzer subtracts the dark
current from the raw scattered light signal and converts
the result to turbidity. In highly filtered samples, which
scatter little light, the dark current can be a substantial
amount of the signal generated by the sensor.

The following screen will appear if Standard Cal is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
successful. The screen will return to the Turbidity Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
Menu. SN Standard Cal
Cal Complete

The following screen may appear if Standard Cal is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
unsuccessful. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Standard Cal
Calibration
Error

Press EXIT

99
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

7.10.4 GRAB CALIBRATION - Turbidity This screen appears after selecting Grab calibration.
If desired, the turbidity sensor can be calibrated
S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
against the turbidity reading from another instrument. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
The analyzer treats the value entered by the user as SN Grab Cal
though it were the true turbidity of the sample. Wait for stable
Therefore, grab sample calibration changes the sensi- reading
tivity, it does not apply an offset to the reading.

The following screen will appear if Grab Cal is successful. S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
The screen will return to the Turbidity Cal Menu. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Grab Cal
Cal Complete

The following screen may appear if Grab Cal is S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
unsuccessful. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Grab Cal
Calibration
Error

Press EXIT

7.11 PULSE FLOW

7.11.1 DESCRIPTION
A variety of pulse flow sensors can be wired to the Flow signal input board to measure flow volume, total volume
and flow difference (if 2 Flow signal boards are installed). The Model 1056 Flow signal board will support flow
sensors that are self-driven (powered by the rotation of the impeller paddle-wheel).

THIS SECTION DESCRIBES HOW TO CALIBRATE THE MODEL 1056 WITH AN ATTACHED FLOW SENSOR.
THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION ROUTINES ARE COVERED.

TABLE 7-13 FLOW CALIBRATION ROUTINES


Measure Sec. Calibration function Description
Pulse 7.11.2 K Factor A constant value representing pulses/Gal of flow
Flow Alternate cal method requires manual entry of frequency (Hz)
7.11.3 Frequency/Velocity & Pipe
per velocity and Pipe diameter used
7.11.4 In process Calibration Calibration based on known volume per unit of time
7.11.5 Totalizer Control User settings to stop, restart and reset total volume meter

A detailed flow diagram is provided at the end of Sec. 7 to guide you through the calibration routines.
To calibrate Pulse Flow: S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
1. Press the MENU button S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER. SN Calibrate?


3. Select Sensor 1 or Sensor 2 corresponding to Pulse Flow
Flow. Press ENTER.
4. Select Pulse Flow. Press ENTER.

The following screen will appear.

100
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

To calibrate Pulse Flow scroll to the desired item and S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
press ENTER. . S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Calibration
The following sub-sections provide you with the initial K Factor: 12.34 p/Gal
display screen that appears for each calibration rou- Freq/Velocity & Pipe
tine. Use the diagram for Pulse Flow calibration at In Process
the end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts to com- Totalizer Control
plete calibration.

7.11.2 CALIBRATION K Factor S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


This screen appears after selecting K Factor. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN K Factor
12.34 p/Gal
.

To calibrate Pulse Flow scroll to the desired item and S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
press ENTER. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Calibration
The following sub-sections provide you with the initial K Factor: 12.34 p/Gal
display screen that appears for each calibration rou- Freq/Velocity & Pipe
tine. Use the diagram for Pulse Flow calibration at In Process
the end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts to com- Totalizer Control
plete calibration.
Simply enter the know K factor provided with the flow
. sensor specifications. The screen will return to the
Pulse Flow Cal Menu and the updated K factor will
appear.

7.11.3 CALIBRATION Freq/Velocity & Pipe S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


This screen appears after selecting Freq/Velocity & S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

Pipe calibration. SN Freq/Velocity


12.34 Hz per ft/sec

After completing the entry of the Freq/Velocity ratio, the S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
following screen will appear: S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Pipe Diameter
10.00 in

The following screen will appear if the entries are suc- S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
cessful. The screen will return to the Pulse Flow Cal S2: 12.34pH 25.0C

Menu. SN Freq/Velocity&Pipe
Updated K Factor
12.34 p/Gal

101
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

The following screen may appear if the entries are S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
unsuccessful. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Freq/Velocity&Pipe
Calibration
Error

Press EXIT

7.11.4 CALIBRATION In Process Cal S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
This screen appears after selecting In Process Cal.
SN InProcess Cal
The following screen will appear if the entries are suc- Updated K Factor
cessful. The screen will return to the Pulse Flow Cal 12.34 p/Gal
Menu.

The following screen will appear if the entries are suc- S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
cessful. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
Calibration
Error

Press EXIT

7.11.5 CALIBRATION Totalizer Control S1: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


This screen appears after selecting Totalizer Control. S2: 12.34pH 25.0C
SN Totalizer Control
Stop
Resume
Reset
123456789012.3 G

The user can suspend the totalizer by selecting Stop, re-enable the totalizer by selecting Resume and return the
totalizer volume count to zero by selecting Reset. The live totalizer volume count is displayed during these
menu operations.

102
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION
FIGURE 7-1 Calibrate pH

103
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION
FIGURE 7-2 Calibrate ORP

104
FIGURE 7-3 Calibrate Contacting and Toroidal Conductivity
MODEL 1056
SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

105
106
FIGURE 7-4 Calibrate Free Chlorine, Total Chlorine, Monochloramine, and
pH-independent Free Chlorine
MODEL 1056
SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION
FIGURE 7-5 Calibrate Oxygen

107
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

FIGURE 7-6 Calibrate Ozone

108
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

FIGURE 7-7 Calibrate Temperature

109
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

FIGURE 7-8 Calibrate Turbidity

110
MODEL 1056 SECTION 7.0
CALIBRATION

FIGURE 7-9 Calibrate Flow

111
MODEL 1056 SECTION 8.0
RETURN OF MATERIAL

SECTION 8.0
RETURN OF MATERIAL

17.1 GENERAL.
To expedite the repair and return of instruments, proper communication between the customer and the factory is
important. Before returning a product for repair, call 1-949-757-8500 for a Return Materials Authorization (RMA)
number.

17.2 WARRANTY REPAIR.


The following is the procedure for returning instruments still under warranty:
1. Call Rosemount Analytical for authorization.
2. To verify warranty, supply the factory sales order number or the original purchase order number. In the case
of individual parts or sub-assemblies, the serial number on the unit must be supplied.
3. Carefully package the materials and enclose your Letter of Transmittal (see Warranty). If possible, pack the
materials in the same manner as they were received.
4. Send the package prepaid to:

Rosemount Analytical IMPORTANT


Liquid Division Please see second section of Return of
2400 Barranca Parkway Materials Request form. Compliance with
Irvine, CA 92606 the OSHA requirements is mandatory for
Attn: Factory Repair the safety of all personnel. MSDS forms
and a certification that the instruments have
RMA No. ____________ been disinfected or detoxified are required.
Mark the package: Returned for Repair
Model No. ____

17.3 NON-WARRANTY REPAIR.


The following is the procedure for returning for repair instruments that are no longer under warranty:

1. Call Rosemount Analytical for authorization.

2. Supply the purchase order number, and make sure to provide the name and telephone number of the individ-
ual to be contacted should additional information be needed.
3. Do Steps 3 and 4 of Section 17.2.

NOTE
Consult the factory for additional information regarding service or repair.

112
The right people, the right answers, right now.

Immediate, Reliable Analytical Support


Now theres a way to quickly get the right answers for your liquid analytical instrumentation ques-
tions: the Analytical Customer Support Center.
Our staff of trained professionals is ready to provide the information you need. If you are placing an
order, verifying delivery, requesting application information, or just want to contact a Rosemount
Analytical representative, a call to the Customer Support Center will provide you with the right peo-
ple, the right answers, right now.

A Worldwide Network of Sales and Service


Emerson Process Managements field sales offices are your source for more information on the fill line of Rosemount Analytical
products. Field sales personnel will work closely with you to supply technical data and application information.
For more information, please contact your nearest Emerson Process Management sales office.

THE AMERICAS - ADDITIONAL SALES OFFICES IN:


HEADQUARTERS
Argentina India Romania
Rosemount Analytical Inc. Australia Indonesia Russia
Liquid Division Austria Ireland Saudi Arabia
2400 Barranca Parkway Azerbajan Israel Singapore
Irvine, CA 92606 Bahrain Italy Slovak Republic
Phone: 949-757-8500 Belgium Jamaica South Africa
Toll Free: 800-854-8257 Bolivia Japan Spain
Fax: 949-474-7250 Brazil Jordan Sweden
Brunei Kazakhstan Switzerland
Bulgaria Korea Syria
ASIA-PACIFIC Canada Kuwait Taiwan
Fisher-Rosemount Chile Malaysia Thailand
Singapore Private Ltd. China Mexico Tobago
1 Pandan Crescent Colombia Netherlands Trinidad
Singapore 0512 Costa Rica New Zealand Tunisia
Republic of Singapore Croatia Nigeria Turkey
Phone: 65-777-8211 Czech Republic Norway Ukraine
Fax: 65-777-0947 Denmark Oman United Arab
Egypt Pakistan Emirates
Ecuador Paraguay United Kingdom
Finland Peru Uruguay
EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST, AND
France Philippines Uzbekistan
AFRICA
Germany Poland Venezuela
Fisher-Rosemount Ltd. Greece Portugal Yemen
Heath Place Hong Kong Puerto Rico
Bognor Regis Hungary Qatar
West Sussex PO22 9SH
England
Phone: 44-1243-863121
Fax: 44-1243-845354

VISIT OUR WEBSITE AT


www.RAIhome.com
WOORI SYSTEM HYUNDAI
Co., Ltd. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL E&C
Document No. : MF-VI-SS-78-1001
PROJECT CODE : Revision : 0 Date: 2016/01/27
Item Name : EFFLUENT MONITORING SYSTEM

CHAPTER 2. MANUALS

2.2 Transmitter Manual(1066)


1066 Instruction Manual
LIQ_MAN_1066
Rev. G

1066 Liquid Analytical December 2014

Transmitter
This page left intentionally blank
Essential Instructions
Read this page before proceeding

Emerson designs, manufactures, and tests its Rosemount Analytical products to meet many
national and international standards. Because these instruments are sophisticated technical prod-
ucts, you must properly install, use, and maintain them to ensure they continue to operate within
their normal specifications. The following instructions must be adhered to and integrated into your
safety program when installing, using, and maintaining Rosemount Analytical products. Failure to
follow the proper instructions may cause any one of the following situations to occur: Loss of life;
personal injury; property damage; damage to this instrument; and warranty invalidation.
Read all instructions prior to installing, operating, and servicing the product. If this Instruction
Manual is not the correct manual, telephone 1-800-854-8257 and the requested manual will
be provided. Save this Instruction Manual for future reference.
If you do not understand any of the instructions, contact your Emerson representative for
clarification.
Follow all warnings, cautions, and instructions marked on and supplied with the product.
Inform and educate your personnel in the proper installation, operation, and maintenance of
the product.
Install your equipment as specified in the Installation Instructions of the appropriate
Instruction Manual and per applicable local and national codes. Connect all products to the
proper electrical and pressure sources.
To ensure proper performance, use qualified personnel to install, operate, update, program, and
maintain the product.
When replacement parts are required, ensure that qualified people use replacement parts
specified by Rosemount. Unauthorized parts and procedures can affect the products
performance and place the safe operation of your process at risk. Look alike substitutions may
result in fire, electrical hazards, or improper operation.
Ensure that all equipment doors are closed and protective covers are in place, except when main-
tenance is being performed by qualified persons, to prevent electrical shock and personal injury.

WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD


DO NOT OPEN WHILE CIRCUIT IS LIVE. ONLY CLEAN WITH DAMP CLOTH.

NOTICE
If a 475 Universal HART Communicator is used with these transmitters, the software within the 475
may require modification. If a software modification is required, please contact your local Emerson
Processs Management Service Group or National Response Center at 1-800-654-7768.

Electrostatic ignition hazard.


Special condition for safe use (when installed in hazardous area)
1. The plastic enclosure, excepting the front panel, must only be cleaned with a damp cloth. The
surface resistivity of the non-metallic enclosure materials is greater than one gigaohm. Care
must be taken to avoid electrostatic charge build-up. The 1066 Transmitter must not be
rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth.
2. The panel mount gasket has not been tested for type of protection IP66 or Class II and III. Type
of protection IP66 and Class II, III refer the enclosure only.

Essential Instructions I
3. The surface resistivity of the non-metallic enclosure materials is greater than one gigaohm.
Care must be taken to avoid electrostatic charge build-up. The Model 1066 Transmitter must
not be rubbed or cleaned with solvents or a dry cloth.
4. Special Condition of Use of 1066-C-FF/FI-67 and 1066-T-FF/FI-67. For use with simple appara-
tus model series 140, 141, 142, 150, 400, 401, 402, 402VP, 403, 403VP, 404, and 410VP con-
tacting conductivity sensors and model series 222, 225, 226, 228 toroidal sensors.

About this document


This manual contains instructions for installation and operation of the 1066 Smart Transmitter.
The following list provides notes concerning all revisions of this document.

Rev. Level Date Notes


A 1/2012 This is the initial release of the product manual. The manual
has been reformatted to reflect the Emerson documentation
style and updated to reflect any changes in the product offering.

B 3/2012 This product manual version adds specifications and instrument


instructions for Contacting Conductivity, Toroidal Conductivity,
Chlorine, Oxygen, and Ozone measurements.

C 9/2012 This product manual version adds FM agency approval.

D 3/2013 Updated CSA Intrinsically Safe Installation drawings.

E 7/2013 Updated CSA test Standards and Intrinsically Safe installation


drawings and update CE certificates. Added FM temperature
specifications to Non-Incendive Hazardous Location Approval.
F 9/2013 Added Section 10: HART Communications
G 11/2014 Changed agency water exposure testing description to Type.

II
1066 Instruction Manual Table of Contents
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Contents
Section 1: Quick Start Guide
1.1 Quick start guide..........................................................................................................1

Section 2: Description and Specifications


2.1 Features and Applications ............................................................................................3
2.2 General specifications...................................................................................................4
2.3 pH/ORP ........................................................................................................................4
2.3.1 Performance Specifications - Transmitter (pH input) ......................................6
2.2.2 Performance Specifications - Transmitter (ORP input) ....................................6
2.4 Contacting Conductivity (Codes C) ...........................................................................7
2.4.1 Performance Specifications.............................................................................7
2.4.2 Recommended Sensors for Conductivity .......................................................8
2.5 Toroidal Conductivity (Codes T) ................................................................................8
2.5.1 Performance Specifications.............................................................................8
2.5.2 Recommended Sensors for Conductivity........................................................9
2.6 Chlorine (Codes CL) ...................................................................................................9
2.6.1 Free and Total Chlorine....................................................................................9
2.6.2 Performance Specifications.............................................................................9
2.6.3 Recommended Sensors ..................................................................................9
2.6.4 Monochloromine ............................................................................................9
2.6.5 Performance Specifications...........................................................................10
2.6.6 Recommended Sensors ................................................................................10
2.7 Dissolved Oxygen (Codes DO).................................................................................10
2.7.1 Free and Total Chlorine..................................................................................10
2.7.2 Performance Specifications...........................................................................10
2.8 Dissolved Oxygen (Codes DO).................................................................................10
2.8.1 Free and Total Chlorine..................................................................................10
2.8.2 Performance Specifications...........................................................................10
2.9 Ordering Information .................................................................................................11

Section 3: Installation
3.1 Unpacking and Inspection..........................................................................................13
3.2 Installation general information ..............................................................................13
3.3 Preparing conduit openings .......................................................................................13

Section 4: Wiring
4.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 17
4.1.1 General Information ......................................................................................17
4.1.2 Digital Communication.................................................................................17
4.2 Power Supply/Current Loop 1066-HT......................................................................17

Table of Contents III


Table of Contents 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

4.2.1 Power Supply and Load Requirements ..........................................................17


4.2.2 Power Supply-Current Loop Wiring...............................................................18
4.2.3 Current Output wiring...................................................................................19
4.3 Power Supply Wiring For 1066-FF...............................................................................19
4.3.1 Power Supply Wiring .....................................................................................19
4.4 Sensor Wiring to Main Board ......................................................................................21

Section 5: Intrinsically Safe Installation


5.1 All Intrinsically Safe Installations ................................................................................27

Section 6: Display and operation


6.1 User Interface.............................................................................................................37
6.2 Instrument Keypad.....................................................................................................37
6.3 Main Display ...............................................................................................................38
6.4 Menu System..............................................................................................................38

Section 7: Programming Basics


7.1 General.......................................................................................................................41
7.2 Changing the Startup Settings ...................................................................................41
7.2.1 Purpose .........................................................................................................41
7.2.2 Procedure......................................................................................................42
7.3 Choosing Temperature Units & Automatic/Manual Temperature Compensation......42
7.3.1 Purpose .........................................................................................................42
7.3.2 Procedure......................................................................................................42
7.4 Contacting Conductivity Calibration..........................................................................42
7.4.1 Purpose .........................................................................................................42
7.4.2 Definitions.....................................................................................................43
7.4.3 Procedure: Configure Outputs ......................................................................43
7.4.4 Procedure: Assigning Measurements the Low and High Current Outputs ....43
7.4.4 Procedure: Ranging the Current Outputs......................................................43
7.5 Setting a Security Code ..............................................................................................43
7.5.1 Purpose .........................................................................................................43
7.5.2 Procedure......................................................................................................44
7.6 Security Access...........................................................................................................45
7.6.1 How the Security Code Works.......................................................................45
7.6.2 Procedure......................................................................................................45
7.7 Using Hold..................................................................................................................45
7.7.1 Purpose .........................................................................................................45
7.7.2 Using the Hold Function................................................................................45
7.8 Resetting Factory Default Settings .............................................................................46
7.8.1 Purpose .........................................................................................................46
7.8.2 Procedure......................................................................................................46

IV Table of Contents
1066 Instruction Manual Table of Contents
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Section 8: Programming Measurements


8.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................47
8.2 pH Measurement Programming ................................................................................48
8.2.1 Description....................................................................................................48
8.2.2 Measurement................................................................................................48
8.2.3 Preamp..........................................................................................................48
8.2.4 Solution Temperature Correction .................................................................49
8.2.5 Temperature Coefficient ...............................................................................49
8.2.6 Resolution .....................................................................................................49
8.2.7 Filter ..............................................................................................................49
8.2.8 Reference Impedance....................................................................................49
8.3 ORP Measurement Programming ..............................................................................49
8.3.1 Measurement................................................................................................50
8.3.2 Preamp..........................................................................................................50
8.3.3 Filter ..............................................................................................................50
8.3.4 Reference Impedance....................................................................................50
8.4 Contacting Conductivity ............................................................................................51
8.4.1 Description....................................................................................................51
8.4.2 Sensor Type ...................................................................................................51
8.4.3 Measure ........................................................................................................52
8.4.4 Range ............................................................................................................52
8.4.5 Cell Constant.................................................................................................52
8.4.6 RTD Offset.....................................................................................................52
8.4.7 RTD Slope......................................................................................................52
8.4.8 Temp Comp ..................................................................................................52
8.4.9 Slope .............................................................................................................53
8.4.10 Reference Temp ............................................................................................53
8.4.11 Filter ..............................................................................................................53
8.4.12 Custom Setup ...............................................................................................53
8.4.13 Cal Factor ......................................................................................................53
8.5 Toroidal Conductivity .................................................................................................54
8.5.1 Description....................................................................................................54
8.5.2 Sensor Type ...................................................................................................54
8.5.3 Measure ........................................................................................................55
8.5.4 Range ............................................................................................................55
8.5.5 Cell Constant.................................................................................................55
8.5.6 Temp Comp ..................................................................................................55
8.5.7 Slope .............................................................................................................56
8.5.8 Reference Temp ............................................................................................56
8.5.9 Filter ..............................................................................................................56
8.5.10 Custom Setup ...............................................................................................56
8.6 Chlorine Measurement...............................................................................................57
8.6.1 Free Chlorine .................................................................................................57
Table of Contents V
Table of Contents 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

8.6.1.1 Measure..........................................................................................58
8.6.1.2 Units ...............................................................................................58
8.6.1.3 Filter................................................................................................58
8.6.1.4 Free Chlorine pH Correction ...........................................................58
8.6.1.5 Manual pH Correction ....................................................................58
8.6.1.6 Resolution.......................................................................................58
8.6.2 Total Chlorine ................................................................................................59
8.6.2.1 Description .....................................................................................59
8.6.2.2 Measure..........................................................................................59
8.6.2.3 Units ...............................................................................................59
8.6.2.4 Filter................................................................................................59
8.6.2.5 Resolution.......................................................................................60
8.6.3 Monochloramine ..........................................................................................60
8.6.3.1 Measure: Monochloramine.............................................................60
8.6.3.2 Units ...............................................................................................60
8.6.3.3 Filter................................................................................................61
8.6.3.4 Resolution.......................................................................................61
8.7 Oxygen.......................................................................................................................61
8.7.1 Oxygen Measurement Application .................................................62
8.7.2 Units ...............................................................................................62
8.7.3 Partial Press.....................................................................................62
8.7.4 Salinity............................................................................................62
8.7.5 Filter................................................................................................62
8.7.6 Pressure Units .................................................................................62
8.8 Ozone.........................................................................................................................63
8.8.1 Units ...............................................................................................63
8.8.2 Filter................................................................................................63
8.8.3 Resolution.......................................................................................63

Section 9: Calibration
9.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................71
9.2 Calibration..................................................................................................................71
9.2.1 Auto Calibration .........................................................................................................72
9.2.2 Manual Calibration pH................................................................................73
9.2.3 Entering a Known Slope Value pH ..............................................................73
9.2.4 Standardization pH.....................................................................................73
9.2.5 SMART sensor auto calibration upload pH..................................................73
9.3 ORP Calibration ..........................................................................................................74
9.3.1 Standardization ORP...................................................................................74
9.4 Contacting Conductivity Calibration..........................................................................75
9.4.1 Entering the Cell Constant.............................................................................76
9.4.2 Zeroing the Instrument .................................................................................76

VI Table of Contents
1066 Instruction Manual Table of Contents
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

9.4.3 Calibrating the Sensor in a Conductivity Standard (in process cal)................76


9.4.4 Calibrating the Sensor To A Laboratory Instrument (meter cal) ....................77
9.4.5 Cal Factor ......................................................................................................77
9.5 Toroidal Conductivity Calibration...............................................................................78
9.5.1 Entering the Cell Constant.............................................................................78
9.5.2 Zeroing the Instrument .................................................................................79
9.5.3 Calibrating the Sensor in a Conductivity Standard (in process cal)................79
9.6 Calibration Chlorine.................................................................................................80
9.6.1 Calibration Free Chlorine ............................................................................80
9.6.1.1 Zeroing the Sensor..........................................................................81
9.6.1.2 In Process Calibration......................................................................81
9.6.2 Calibration Total Chlorine...........................................................................81
9.6.2.1 Zeroing the Sensor..........................................................................82
9.6.2.2 In Process Calibration......................................................................82
9.6.3 Calibration Monochloromine ..................................................................................83
9.6.4 Zeroing the Sensor ........................................................................................84
9.6.5 In Process Calibration ....................................................................................84
9.7 Calibration Chlorine.................................................................................................84
9.7.1 Zeroing the Sensor ........................................................................................86
9.7.2 Calibrating the Sensor in Air ..........................................................................86
9.7.3 Calibrating the Sensor Against A Standard Instrument (in process cal) .........87
9.8 Calibration Ozone....................................................................................................87
9.8.1 Zeroing the Sensor ........................................................................................88
9.8.2 In Process Calibration ....................................................................................88
9.9 Calibrating Temperature ............................................................................................89
9.9.1 Calibration.....................................................................................................89

Section 10: HART Communications


10.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................97
10.2 Physical Installation and Configuration ......................................................................97
10.3 Measurements Available via HART .............................................................................99
10.4 Diagnostics Available via HART.................................................................................100
10.5 HART Hosts ..............................................................................................................101
10.6 Wireless Communication using the 1066 ................................................................104
10.7 Field Device Specification (FDS) ...............................................................................104
10.6 Wireless Communication using the 1066 ................................................................104
APPENDIX 10.1 Device Variables .......................................................................................105
APPENDIX 10.2 Additional Transmitter Status Command 48 Status Bits ........................107
APPENDIX 10.3 1066 HART Configuration Parameters......................................................112
APPENDIX 10.4 475 Menu Tree for 1066 HART 7...............................................................119

Table of Contents VII


Table of Contents 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

Section 11: Return of Material


11.1 General.....................................................................................................................125
11.2 Warranty Repair .......................................................................................................125
11.3 Non-Warranty Repair ...............................................................................................125

EC Declarations of Conformity..........................................................................................................126

VIII
1066 Instruction Manual Section 1: Quick Start Guide
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Section 1: Quick Start Guide


1.1 1. For mechanical installation instructions, see page 14 for panel mounting and page 15 for pipe
or wall mounting.
2. Wire the sensor to the main circuit board. See pages 21-23 for wiring instructions. Refer to the
sensor instruction sheet for additional details. Make loop power connections.
3. Once connections are secured and verified, apply DC power to the transmitter.
4. When the transmitter is powered up for the first time, Quick Start screens appear. Quick Start
operating tips are as follows:
a. A highlighted field shows the position of the cursor.
b. To move the cursor left or right, use the keys to the left or right of the ENTER key. To scroll
up or down or to increase or decrease the value of a digit use the keys above and below the
ENTER key. Use the left or right keys to move the decimal point.
c. Press ENTER to store a setting. Press EXIT to leave without storing changes. Pressing EXIT
during Quick Start returns the display to the initial start-up screen (select language).
5. Choose the desired language and press ENTER.
6. Choose measurement and press ENTER.
a. For pH, choose preamplifier location. Select Analyzer to use the integral preamplifier in the
transmitter; select Sensor/J-Box if your sensor is SMART or has an integral preamplifier or if
you are using a remote preamplifier located in a junction box.
5. If applicable, choose units of measurement.
6. For contacting and toroidal conductivity, choose the sensors type and enter the numeric cell
constant using the keys.
7. Choose temperature units: C or F.
8. After the last step, the main display appears. The outputs are assigned to default values.
9. To change output settings, to scale the 4-20mA current outputs, to change measurement-
related settings from the default values, and to enable pH diagnostics, press MENU. Select
Program and follow the prompts. Refer to the appropriate menu.
10. To return the transmitter to the factory default settings, choose Program under the main
menu, and then scroll to Reset.
11. Please call the Rosemount Analytical Customer Support Center at 1-800-854-8257 if you
need further support.

Quick Start Guide 1


Section 2: Description and specifications 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

This page left intentionally blank

2 Description and Specifications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 2: Description and specifications
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Section 2: Description and Specifications


2.1 Features and Applications
This loop-powered multi-parameter unit serves industrial, commercial and municipal applications
with the widest range of liquid measurement inputs available for a two-wire liquid transmitter.
The 1066 Smart transmitter supports continuous measurement of one liquid analytical input. The
design supports easy internal access and wiring connections.
ANALYTICAL INPUTS: Ordering options for pH/ORP, Resistivity/Conductivity, % Concentration,
Total Chlorine, Free Chlorine, Monochloramine, Dissolved Oxygen, and Ozone.
LARGE DISPLAY: The high-contrast LCD provides live measurement readouts in large digits and
shows up to four additional variables or diagnostic parameters.
DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS: HART version 7 digital communications are standard on 1066.
MENUS: Menu screens for calibrating and programming are simple and intuitive. Plain language
prompts and help screens guide the user through the procedures. All menu screens are available in
eight languages. Live process values are displayed during programming and calibration.
QUICK START PROGRAMMING: Popular Quick Start screens appear the first time the unit is powered.
The instrument prompts the user to configure the sensor loop in a few quick steps for immediate com-
missioning.
USER HELP SCREENS: Fault and warning messages include help screens similar to PlantWeb alerts
that provide useful troubleshooting tips to the user. These on-screen instructions are intuitive and
easy to use.
DIAGNOSTICS: The transmitter continuously monitors itself and the sensor for problems. A display
banner on the screen alerts Technicians to Fault and/or Warning conditions.
LANGUAGES: Rosemount Analytical extends its worldwide reach by offering eight languages
English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Chinese and Russian.
CURRENT OUTPUTS: HART units include two 4-20 mA electrically isolated current outputs giving
the ability to transmit the live measurement value and the process temperature reported from the
sensor.
INPUT DAMPENING: is automatically enabled to suppress noisy process readings.
SMART-ENABLED pH: Rosemount Analyticals SMART pH capability eliminates field calibration of
pH probes through automatic upload of calibration data and history.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION: Most measurements require temperature compen-
sation. The 1066 will automatically recognize Pt100, Pt1000 or 22k NTC RTDs built into the sensor.
SMART WIRELESS THUM ADAPTOR COMPATIBLE: Enable wireless transmissions of process vari-
ables and diagnostics from hard-to-reach locations.

Specifications 3
Section 2: Description and specifications 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

2.2 Specifications - General


Case: Polycarbonate. IP66 (CSA, FM), Type 4X (CSA)
Dimensions: Overall 155 x 155 x 131mm (6.10 x 6.10 x 5.15 in.). Cutout: 1/2 DIN 139mm x
139mm (5.45 x 5.45 in.)
Conduit openings: Six. Accepts PG13.5 or 1/2 in. conduit fittings
Display: Monochromatic graphic liquid crystal display. No backlight. 128 x 96 pixel display resolu-
tion. Active display area: 58 x 78mm (2.3 x 3.0 in.). All fields of the main instrument display can be
customized to meet user requirements.
Ambient temperature and humidity: -20 to 65C (-4 to 149F), RH 5 to 95% (non-condensing).
Storage Temperature: -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F)
HART Communications: PV, SV, TV, and 4V assignable to measurement, temperature and all live
HART diagnostics.
RFI/EMI: EN-61326
Complies with the following Standards:
CSA: C22.2 No 0 10; C22.2 No 0.4 04; C22.2 No. 25-M1966: , C22.2 No. 94-M91: , C22.2
No.142-M1987: , C22.2 No. 157-M1992: , C22.2 No. 213-M1987: , C22.2 No. 60529:05. UL: 50;
508; 913; 1203. ANSI/ISA: 12.12.02-2011.
ATEX: IEC 60079-0:2011, 60079-11:2011
IECEx: IEC 60079-0: 2011 Edition: 6.0, I EC 60079-11 : 2011-06 Edition: 6.0
FM: 3600: 2011, 3610: 2010, 3611: 2004, 3810: 2005, IEC 60529:2004, ANSI/ISA 60079-0: 2009,
ANSI/ISA 60079-11: 2009

Hazardous Location Approvals


Intrinsic Safety (with appropriate safety barrier):
Class I, II, III, Div. 1* IECEx BAS 11.0098X
Groups A-G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
T4 Tamb = -20C to 65C T4 Tamb = -20C to 65C
Enclosure 4X, IP66
Class I, II & III, Division 1, Groups A-G T4
ATEX 1180 II 1 G Tamb = -20C to 40C for -FI option
Baseefa11ATEX0195X Tamb = -20C to 65C for -HT and -FF options
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga IP66 enclosure
T4 Tamb = -20C to 65 Class I, Zone 0, AEx ia IIC T4
For Non-Incendive Field Wiring Installation, see drawing 1400670
Tamb = -20C to 40C for -FI option
Tamb = -20C to 65C for -HT and -FF options
For Non-Incendive Field Wiring Installation, see drawing 1400669

Non-Incendive:

Class I, Div. 2, Groups A-D* Class I, Division 2 Groups A-D


Dust Ignition Proof Class II & III, Div 1, Groups EFG Dust Ignition proof Class II & III, Div 1, Groups EFG
Class II & III, Div. 1, Groups E-G Class II & III, Division 1, Groups E-G
Type 4/4X Enclosure IP66 enclosure
T4 Tamb = -20C to 65C For Non-Incendive Field Wiring Installation, see drawing 1400670
For Non-Incendive Field Wiring Installation, see drawing 1400669

*Additionally approved as a system with models 140,141,142, 150, 400, 400VP, 401, 402, 402VP, 403,403VP, 404 & 410VP contacting conductivity
sensors and models 222, 225, 226 & 228 inductive conductivity sensors.

4 Specifications
1066 Instruction Manual Section 2: Description and specifications
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Input: One isolated sensor input. Measurement choices of pH/ORP, resistivity/conductivity/TDS, %


concentration, total and free chlorine, monochloramine, dissolved oxygen, dissolved ozone, and
temperature. For contacting conductivity measurements, temperature element can be a PT1000
RTD or a PT100 RTD. Other measurements (except ORP) and use PT100 or PT1000 RTDs or a 22k
NTC (D.O. only).
Power & Load Requirements: Supply voltage at the transmitter terminals should be at least
12.7Vdc. Power supply voltage should cover the voltage drop on the cable plus the external load
resistor required for HART communications (250 minimum). Minimum power supply voltage is
12.7Vdc. Maximum power supply voltage is 42.4 Vdc (30 Vdc for intrinsically safe operation). The
graph shows the supply voltage required to maintain 12 Vdc (upper line) and 30 Vdc (lower line)
at the transmitter terminals when the current is 22 mA.

FIGURE 2-1. Load/Power Supply Requirements

1500
1364
1250 ohms

1000
Load, ohms

750
with HART 545
communication ohms
500

250
without HART
communication
0
12 18 24 30 36 42
Power supply voltage, Vdc
HART option

Analog Outputs: Two-wire loop powered (Output 1 only). Two 4-20 mA electrically isolated cur-
rent outputs (Output 2 must be externally powered). Superimposed HART digital signal on Output
1. Fully scalable over the operating range of the sensor.
Weight/Shipping Weight: 2 lbs/3 lbs (1 kg/1.5 kg)

Specifications 5
Section 2: Description and specifications 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

2.3 pH/ORP (Ordering Code P)


For use with any standard pH or ORP sensor. SMART pH sensor with SMART pre-amplifiers from
Rosemount Analytical. Measurement choices are pH, ORP, or Redox. The automatic buffer recog-
nition feature uses stored buffer values and their temperature curves for the most common buffer
standards available worldwide. The transmitter will recognize the value of the buffer being meas-
ured and perform a self stabilization check on the sensor before completing the calibration.
Manual or automatic temperature compensation is menu selectable. Change in pH due to process
temperature can be compensated using a programmable temperature coefficient.

2.3.1 Performance Specifications - Transmitter (pH input)


Measurement Range [pH]: 0 to 14 pH
Accuracy: 0.01 pH
Buffer recognition: NIST, DIN 19266, JIS 8802, and BSI.
Input filter: Time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 4 sec.
Response time: 5 seconds to 95% of final reading
Recommended Sensors for pH:
All standard pH sensors. Supports SMART pH sensors from Rosemount Analytical

2.3.2 Performance Specifications - Transmitter (ORP input)


Measurement Range [ORP]: -1400 to +1400 mV
Accuracy: 1 mV
Input filter: Time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 4 sec.
Response time: 5 seconds to 95% of final reading
Recommended Sensors for ORP: All standard ORP sensors

FIGURE 2-2. General purpose and high performance pH sensors 3900, 396PVP
and 3300HT

6 Specifications
1066 Instruction Manual Section 2: Description and specifications
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

2.4 Contacting Conductivity (Codes C)


Measures conductivity in the range 0 to 600,000 S/cm (600mS/cm). Measurement choices are
conductivity, resistivity, total dissolved solids, salinity, and % concentration. In addition, the
Custom Curve feature allows users to define a three to five point curve to measure ppm, %, or a
no unit variable. The % concentration selection includes the choice of five common solutions (0-
12% NaOH, 0-15% HCl, 0-20% NaCl, and 0-25% or 96-99.7% H2SO4). The conductivity concentra-
tion algorithms for these solutions are fully temperature compensated. Three temperature com-
pensation options are available: manual slope (X%/C), high purity water (dilute sodium chloride),
and cation conductivity (dilute hydrochloric acid). Temperature compensation can be disabled,
allowing the transmitter to display raw conductivity. For more information concerning the use of
the contacting conductivity sensors, refer to the product data sheets.
Note: The 410VP 4-electrode high-range conductivity sensor is compatible with the 1066.

2.4.1 Performance Specifications ENDURANCE series of


TM

conductivity sensors
Temperature specifications:

Temperature range 0-200C

Temperature Accuracy,
0.1C
Pt-1000, 0-50C
Temperature Accuracy,
0.5C
Pt-1000, Temp. > 50C

Input filter: Time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 2 sec.


Response time: 3 seconds to 95% of final reading using the default input filter
Salinity: Uses Practical Salinity Scale
Total Dissolved Solids: Calculated by multiplying conductivity at 25C by 0.65

TABLE 2-1. Performance Specifications: Recommended Range Contacting Conductivity


Cell 0.01S/cm 0.1S/cm 1.0S/cm 10S/cm 100S/cm 1000S/cm 10mS/cm 100mS/cm 1000mS/cm
Constant

0.01
0.01S/cm to 200S/cm 200S/cm to 2000S/cm

0.1 0.1S/cm to 2000S/cm 2000S/cm to 20mS/cm

1.0 1 S/cm to 20mS/cm 20mS/cm to 200mS/cm

4-electrode 2S/cm to 1400mS/cm

0.6% of reading in recommended range


Linearity for Standard
Cable 50 ft (15 m) 2% of reading outside high recommended range
5% of reading outside low recommended range
4% of reading in recommended range

Specifications 7
Section 2: Description and specifications 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

2.4.2 Recommended Sensors for Conductivity


All Rosemount Analytical ENDURANCE 400 series conductivity sensors (Pt 1000 RTD) and 410VP
4-electrode sensor.

2.5 Toroidal Conductivity (Codes T)


Measures conductivity in the range of 1 S/cm to 2,000,000 S/cm (2 S/cm). Measurement choices
are conductivity, resistivity, total dissolved solids, salinity, and % concentration. The % concentration
selection includes the choice of five common solutions (0-12% NaOH, 0-15% HCl, 0-20% NaCl, and 0-
25% or 96-99.7% H2SO4). The conductivity concentration algorithms for these solutions are fully
temperature compensated. For other solutions, a simple-to-use menu allows the customer to enter
his own data. The transmitter accepts as many as five data points and fits either a linear (two points)
or a quadratic function (three to five points) to the data. Reference temperature and linear tempera-
ture slope may also be adjusted for optimum results. Two temperature compensation options are
available: manual slope (X%/C) and neutral salt (dilute sodium chloride). Temperature compensation
can be disabled, allowing the transmitter to display raw conductivity. For more information concern-
ing use of the toroidal conductivity sensors, refer to the product data sheets.

2.5.1 Performance Specifications High performance 225 Toroidal &


226 Conductivity sensors

Temperature specifications:

Temperature range -25 to 210C (-13 to 410F)

Temperature Accuracy,
0.5C
Pt-100, -25 to 50C
Temperature Accuracy,
1C
Pt-100, 50 to 210C

TABLE 2-2. Performance Specifications: Recommended Range Toroidal Conductivity

Model 1S/cm 10S/cm 100S/cm 1000S/cm 10mS/cm 100mS/cm 1000mS/cm 2000mS/cm

226
50S/cm to 500mS/cm 500mS/cm to 2000mS/cm
225 & 228
50S/cm to 1500mS/cm 1500mS/cm to 2000mS/cm

242
100S/cm to 2000mS/cm

222
(1in & 2in) 500S/cm to 2000mS/cm

Loop Performance 226: 1% of reading 5S/cm in recommended range


(Following Calibration) 225 & 228: 1% of reading 15S/cm in recommended range
222, 242: 4% of reading 5mS/cm in recommended range
225, 226 & 228: 5% of reading outside high recommended range

8 Specifications
1066 Instruction Manual Section 2: Description and specifications
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Repeatability: 0.25% 5 S/cm after zero cal


Input filter: time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 2 sec.
Response time: 3 seconds to 95% of final reading
Salinity: Uses Practical Salinity Scale
Total Dissolved Solids: Calculated by multiplying conductivity at 25C by 0.65

2.5.2 Recommended Sensors for Conductivity


All Rosemount Analytical submersion/immersion and flow-through toroidal sensors.

2.6 Chlorine (Codes CL)


2.6.1 Free and Total Chlorine
The 1066 is compatible with the 499ACL-01 free chlorine sensor and the 499ACL-02 total chlorine
sensor. The 499ACL-02 sensor must be used with the TCL total chlorine sample conditioning system.
The 1066 fully compensates free and total chlorine readings for changes in membrane permeability
caused by temperature changes. For free chlorine measurements, both automatic and manual pH
correction are available. For automatic pH correction select an appropriate pH sensor. For more infor-
mation concerning the use and operation of the amperometric chlorine sensors and the TCL meas-
urement system, refer to the product data sheets.

2.6.2 Performance Specifications


Resolution: 0.001 ppm or 0.01 ppm selectable
Input Range: 0nA 100A
Automatic pH correction for Free Chlorine: (user selectable for
code -CL): 6.0 to 10.0 pH
Temperature compensation: Automatic (via RTD) or manual (0-
50C). 499ACL-01
Input filter: Time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 5 sec. Chlorine sensor
Response time: 6 seconds to 95% of final reading

2.6.3 Recommended Sensors


Chlorine: 499ACL-01 Free Chlorine or 499ACL-02 Total Residual Chlorine
pH: These pH sensors are recommended for automatic pH correction of free chlorine readings:
3900-02-10, 3900-01-10, and 3900VP-02-10.

2.6.4 Monochloramine
The 1066 is compatible with the 499A CL-03 Monochloramine sensor. The 1066 fully compensates
readings for changes in membrane permeability caused by temperature changes. Because mono-
chloramine measurement is not affected by pH of the process, no pH sensor or correction is required.
For more information concerning the use and operation of the amperometric chlorine sensors, refer
to the product data sheets.

Specifications 9
Section 2: Description and specifications 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

2.6.5 Performance Specifications


Resolution: 0.001 ppm or 0.01 ppm selectable
Input Range: 0nA 100A
Temperature compensation: Automatic (via RTD) or manual (0-50C).
Input filter: Time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 5 sec.
Response time: 6 seconds to 95% of final reading

2.6.6 Recommended Sensors


Rosemount Analytical 499ACL-03 Monochloramine sensor

2.7 Dissolved Oxygen (Codes DO)


The 1066 is compatible with the 499ADO, 499ATrDO, Hx438, Gx438 and Bx438 dissolved oxygen
sensors and the 4000 percent oxygen gas sensor. The 1066 displays dissolved oxygen in ppm, mg/L,
ppb, g/L, % saturation, % O2 in gas, ppm O2 in gas. The transmitter fully compensates oxygen read-
ings for changes in membrane permeability caused by temperature changes. Automatic air calibra-
tion, including salinity correction, is standard. The only required user entry is barometric pressure.
For more information on the use of amperometric oxygen sensors, refer to the product data sheets.

2.7.1 Performance Specifications


Resolution: 0.01 ppm; 0.1 ppb for 499A TrDO sensor (when O2 <1.00 ppm); 0.1%
Input Range: 0nA 100A
Temperature Compensation: Automatic (via RTD) or manual (0-50C).
Input filter: Time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 5 sec.
Response time: 6 seconds to 95% of final reading Dissolved Oxygen
499ADO sensor with
Variopol connection
2.7.2 Recommended Sensors
Rosemount Analytical amperometric membrane and steam-sterilizable sensors listed above

2.8 Dissolved Ozone (Codes OZ)


The 1066 is compatible with the 499AOZ sensor. The 1066 fully compensates ozone readings for
changes in membrane permeability caused by temperature changes. For more information concern-
ing the use and operation of the amperometric ozone sensors, refer to the product data sheets.

2.8.1 Performance Specifications


Resolution: 0.001 ppm or 0.01 ppm selectable
Input Range: 0nA 100A
Temperature Compensation: Automatic (via RTD) or manual (0-35C)
Input filter: Time constant 1 - 999 sec, default 5 sec.
Response time: 6 seconds to 95% of final reading Dissolved Ozone
499AOZ sensors with
2.8.2 Recommended Sensors Variopol connection

Rosemount Analytical 499A OZ ozone sensor


10 Specifications
1066 Instruction Manual Section 2: Description and specifications
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

2.9 Ordering Information


The 1066 2-Wire Transmitter is intended for the continuous determination of pH, ORP (Redox),
conductivity, (both contacting and toroidal), and for measurements using membrane-covered
amperometric sensors (oxygen, ozone, free and total chlorine, and monochloramine). For free
chlorine measurements, which often require continuous pH correction a second input for a pH
sensor is available. Two 4-20mA analog outputs are standard on HART units. The 1066 is compat-
ible with SMART pH sensors from Rosemount Analytical. HART digital communications is standard
and FOUNDATION fieldbus digital communications is offered as an option.
Communication with the 1066 is through:
 Local keypad interface
 475 HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus Communicator
 HART protocol version 7
 FOUNDATION fieldbus
 AMS (Asset Management Solutions) Aware
 SMART Wireless THUM Adapter

TABLE 2-3. Ordering Information

Description
1066 pH/ORP, Conductivity, Chlorine, Oxygen, and Ozone 2-Wire Transmitter
Measurement
P pH/ORP
C Contacting Conductivity
T Toroidal Conductivity
CL Chlorine
DO Dissolved Oxygen
OZ Ozone

Communication
HT HART Digital Communication Superimposed on 4-20mA Output
FF FOUNDATION fieldbus Digital Output
FI FOUNDATION fieldbus Digital Output with FISCO

Agency Approval
60 None Required
FM Approved, Intrinsically Safe (appropriate sensor & safety barrier
67
required), and Non-Incendive
CSA Approved , Intrinsically Safe (appropriate sensor & safety barrier
69
required), and Non-Incendive
73 ATEX/IECEx Approved, Intrinsically Safe (safety barrier required)

Specifications 11
Section 2: Description and specifications 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

This page left intentionally blank

12 Specifications
1066 Instruction Manual Section 3: Installation
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Section 3: Installation
3.1 Unpacking and inspection
Inspect the shipping container. If it is damaged, contact the shipper immediately for instructions.
Save the box. If there is no apparent damage, unpack the container. Be sure all items shown on the
packing list are present. If items are missing, notify Rosemount Analytical immediately.

3.2 Installation general information


1. Although the transmitter is suitable for outdoor use, installation is direct sunlight or in areas
of extreme temperatures is not recommended unless a sunshield is used.
2. Install the transmitter in an area where vibration and electromagnetic and radio frequency
interference are minimized or absent.
3. Keep the transmitter and sensor wiring at least one foot from high voltage conductors. Be sure
there is easy access to the transmitter.
4. The transmitter is suitable for panel, pipe, or surface mounting.
5. The transmitter case has six 1/2-inch (PG13.5) conduit openings. Use separate conduit open-
ings for the power/output cable, the sensor cable, and the other the sensor cable as needed
(pH input for free chlorine with continuous pH correction).
6. Use weathertight cable glands to keep moisture out to the transmitter. If conduit is used, plug
and seal the connections at the transmitter housing to prevent moisture from getting inside
the instrument.

3.3 Preparing conduit openings


There are six conduit openings in all configurations of 1066.
Conduit openings accept 1/2-inch conduit fittings or PG13.5 cable glands. To keep the case water-
tight, block unused openings with Type 4X or IP66 conduit plugs.
To maintain ingress protection for outdoor use, seal unused conduit holes with suitable conduit
plugs.

NOTE: Use watertight fittings and hubs that comply with your requirements. Connect the conduit
hub to the conduit before attaching the fitting to the transmitter.

Electrical installation must be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (ANSI/NFPA-70) and/or
any other applicable national or local codes.

Installation 13
Section 3: Installation 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

FIGURE 3-1. Panel Mounting Dimensions

14 Installation
1066 Instruction Manual Section 3: Installation
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

FIGURE 3-2. Pipe and wall mounting dimensions (Mounting bracket PN: 23820-00)

Installation 15
Section 3: Installation 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

This page left intentionally blank

16 Installation
1066 Instruction Manual Section 4: Wiring
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Section 4: Wiring
4.1 General
4.1.1 General Information
The 1066 is easy to wire. All wiring connections are located on the main circuit board. The front
panel is hinged at the bottom. The panel swings down for easy access to the wiring locations.

4.1.2 Digital Communication


HART and FOUNDATION fieldbus communications are available as ordering options for 1066. HART
units support Bell 202 digital communications over analog 4-20mA current output 1.

4.2 Power Supply/Current Loop 1066-HT


4.2.1 Power Supply and Load Requirements
Refer to Figure 4-1. The supply voltage must be at least 12.7 Vdc at the transmitter terminals.. The
power supply must be able to cover the voltage drop on the cable as well as the load resistor (250
minimum) required for HART communications. The maximum power supply voltage is 42.0 Vdc.
For intrinsically safe installations, the maximum power supply voltage is 30.0 Vdc. The graph shows
load and power supply requirements. The upper line is the power supply voltage needed to provide
12.7 Vdc at the transmitter terminals for a 22 mA current. The lower line is the power supply voltage
needed to provide 30 Vdc for a 22 mA current. The power supply must provide a surge current dur-
ing the first 80 milliseconds of startup. The maximum current is about 24 mA.

For digital communications, the load must be at least 250 ohms. To supply the 12.7 Vdc lift off
voltage at the transmitter, the power supply voltage must be at least 17.5 Vdc.

FIGURE 4-1. Load/Power Supply Requirements


1500
1364
1250 ohms

1000
Load, ohms

750
with HART 545
communication ohms
500

250
without HART
communication
0
12 18 24 30 36 42
Power supply voltage, Vdc
HART option

Wiring 17
Section 4: Wiring 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

4.2.2 Power Supply-Current Loop Wiring


Refer to Figure 4-2.
Run the power/signal wiring through the opening nearest TB-2.
For optimum EMI/RFI protection:
1. Use shielded power/signal cable and ground the shield at the power supply.
2. Use a metal cable gland and be sure the shield makes good electrical contact with the gland.
3. Use the metal backing plate when attaching the gland to transmitter enclosure. The
power/signal cable can also be enclosed in an earth-grounded metal conduit.
Do not run power supply/signal wiring in the same conduit or cable tray with loop power lines.
Keep power supply/signal wiring at least 6 ft (2 m) away from heavy electrical equipment.

FIGURE 4-2. HART Communications

18 Wiring
1066 Instruction Manual Section 4: Wiring
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

4.2.3 Current Output wiring


The 1066 HART units are shipped with two 4-20mA current outputs. Current Output 1 is loop
power; it is the HART communications channel. Current output 2 is available to report process
temperature measured by the temperature sensing element or RTD within the sensor.
Wiring locations for the outputs are on the main board which is mounted on the hinged door of
the instrument. Wire the output leads to the correct position on the main board using the lead
markings (+/positive, -/negative) on the board.

FIGURE 4-3. 1066 HART Loop Power Wiring

4.3 Power Supply Wiring For 1066-FF


4.3.1 Power Supply Wiring
Run the power/signal wiring through the opening nearest TB2. Use shielded cable and ground the
shield at the power supply. To ground the transmitter, attach the shield to TB2-3.

Wiring 19
Section 4: Wiring 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

NOTE: For optimum EMI/RFI immunity, the power supply/output cable should be shielded and
enclosed in an earth-grounded metal conduit. Do not run power supply/signal wiring in the same
conduit or cable tray with loop power lines. Keep power supply/signal wiring at least 6 ft (2 m)
away from heavy electrical equipment.

FOUNDATION fieldbus
Figure 4-4 shows a 1066-P-FF being used to measure and control pH and chlorine levels in drink-
ing water. The figure also shows three ways in which Fieldbus communication can be used to read
process variables and configure the transmitter.

FIGURE 4-4. Configuring 1066-P Transmitter with FOUNDATION fieldbus

1066
Transmitter

FIGURE 4-5. Typical Fieldbus Network Electrical Wiring Configuration

20 Wiring
1066 Instruction Manual Section 4: Wiring
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

4.4 Sensor Wiring to Main Board


Wire the correct sensor leads to the main board using the lead locations marked directly on the
board. Rosemount Analytical SMART pH sensors can be wired to the 1066 using integral cable
SMART sensors or compatible VP8 pH cables. After wiring the sensor leads, carefully take up
the excess sensor cable through the cable gland.
Keep sensor and output signal wiring separate from loop power wiring. Do not run sensor and
power wiring in the same conduit or close together in a cable tray.

FIGURE 4-6. pH/ORP sensor wiring to the 1066 printed circuit board

Wiring 21
Section 4: Wiring 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

FIGURE 4-7. Contacting and Toroidal Conductivity sensor wiring to the 1066 circuit board

22 Wiring
1066 Instruction Manual Section 4: Wiring
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

FIGURE 4-8. Chlorine, oxygen, ozone sensor wiring to 1066 printed circuit board (1066-CL, 1066-DO,
1066-OZ)

HINGE SIDE OF FRONT PANEL

(OUTPUT1) SENSOR WIRING


OUTPUT 2 LOOP PWR TB5 TB3 TB2
+24V +24V ANODE RTN REF

GND GND CATHODE SNS SHLD

TB7 RTN IN GND


THUM SOL
TB6 +V SHLD
-V pH

TB4 TB1

1066 CIRCUIT BOARD


ASSY 24359- 00

CHLORINE, OXYGEN, OZONE SENSOR WIRING


(FOLLOW RECOMMENDED ORDER)

1) TB5/ANODE ANODE
& CATHODE CATHODE

2) TB3/RTD RETURN
SENSE
RTD IN

3) TB2/ SOLUTION NO CONNECTION


GROUND NO CONNECTION
SOLUTION GROUND
NOTE:
A) TB1, TB4, TB6 AND TB7 NOT USED FOR OXYGEN AND OZONE SENSOR WIRING.
B) TB1, TB2 AND TB4 MAY BE USED FOR pH SENSOR WIRING IF FREE CHLORINE MEASEMENT REQUIRES
LIVE pH INPUT.
1066 AMP
SENSOR WIRING
40106611 A

Wiring 23
Section 4: Wiring 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

FIGURE 4-9. Power/Current Loop wiring with wireless THUM Adaptor

24 Wiring
1066 Instruction Manual Section 4: Wiring
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

FIGURE 4-10. HART Loop Power Wiring

Wiring 25
Section 4: Wiring 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

This page left intentionally blank

26 Wiring
1066 Instruction Manual Section 4: Wiring
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Section 5: Intrinsically Safe Installation


5.1 All Intrinsically Safe Installations
FIGURE 5-1. CSA Installation

SCHEMATIC, INSTALLATION
MODEL 1066 XMTR, (CSA)

Intrinsically Safe Installation 27


Section 4: Wiring 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

FIGURE 5-2. CSA Installation

SCHEMATIC, INSTALLATION
MODEL 1066 XMTR, (CSA)

28 Intrinsically Safe Installation


Instruction Manual Section 5: Intrinsically Safe Installation
LIQ_MAN_1066-P-HT December 2014

FIGURE 5-3. CSA Installation

SCHEMATIC, INSTALLATION
MODEL 1066 XMTR, (CSA)

Intrinsically Safe Installation 29


Section 5: Intrinsically Safe Installation 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

FIGURE 5-4. CSA Label Information

LABEL, INFO, 1066


CSA

30 Intrinsically Safe Installation


1066 Instruction Manual Section 5: Intrinsically Safe Installation
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

FIGURE 5-5. ATEX, IECEx Label Information

LABEL, INFO, 1066

9241717-00
ATEX

Intrinsically Safe Installation 31


Section 5: Intrinsically Safe Installation 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

FIGURE 5-6. FM installation

SCHEMATIC, INSTALLATION
MODEL 1066 XMTR, (FM)

32 Intrinsically Safe Installation


1066 Instruction Manual Section 5: Intrinsically Safe Installation
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

FIGURE 5-7. FM installation

SCHEMATIC, INSTALLATION
MODEL 1066 XMTR, (FM)

Intrinsically Safe Installation 33


Section 5: Intrinsically Safe Installation 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

FIGURE 5-8. FM installation

SCHEMATIC, INSTALLATION
MODEL 1066 XMTR, (FM)

34 Intrinsically Safe Installation


1066 Instruction Manual Section 5: Intrinsically Safe Installation
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

FIGURE 5-9. FM label information

LABEL, INFO, 1066


FM

Intrinsically Safe Installation 35


Section 5: Intrinsically Safe Installation 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

This page left intentionally blank

36 Intrinsically Safe Installation


1066 Instruction Manual Section 6: Display and Operation
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Section 6: Display and Operation


6.1 User Interface
The 1066 has a large display which shows the meas-
urement readout and temperature in large digits and
up to four additional process variables or diagnostic
parameters concurrently. The displayed variables can
be customized to meet user requirements. This is
called display Format. The intuitive menu system
allows access to Calibration, Hold (of current outputs),
Programming, and Display functions. In addition, a
dedicated DIAG button is available to provide access to
useful operational information on installed sensor(s)
and any problematic conditions that might occur. The
display flashes Fault and/or Warning when these con-
ditions occur. Help screens are displayed for most fault
and warning conditions to guide the user in trou-
bleshooting. During calibration and programming, key presses cause different displays to appear.
The displays are self-explanatory and guide the user step-by-step through the procedure.

6.2 Instrument Keyboard


There are four Function keys and four Selection keys on the instrument keypad.
Function Keys:

The MENU key is used to access menus for programming and calibrating the instrument. Four top-
level menu items appear when pressing the MENU key:
Calibrate: calibrate the attached sensor and analog output(s).
Hold: Suspend current output(s).
Program: Program outputs, measurement, temperature, security and reset.
Display: Program display format, language, warnings, and contrast
Pressing MENU from the main (live values) screen always causes the main menu screen to appear.
Pressing MENU followed by EXIT causes the main screen to appear.

Pressing the DIAG key displays active Faults and Warnings, and provides detailed instrument infor-
mation and sensor diagnostics including: Faults, Warnings, Sensor information, Out 1 and Out 2
live current values, model configuration string e.g. 1066-P-HT-60 and Instrument Software ver-
sion. Pressing DIAG provides useful diagnostics and information (as applicable): Measurement,
Sensor Type, Raw signal value, Cell constant, Zero Offset, Temperature, Temperature Offset,
selected measurement range, Cable Resistance, Temperature Sensor Resistance, software version.

The ENTER key. Pressing ENTER stores numbers and settings and moves the display to the next
screen.

The EXIT key. Pressing EXIT returns to the previous screen without storing changes.

Display and Operation 37


Section 6: Display and Operation 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

Selection Keys:
Surrounding the ENTER key, four Selection keys up, down, right and left, move the cursor to all
areas of the screen while using the menus.
Selection keys are used to:
1. Select items on the menu screens
2. Scroll up and down the menu lists
3. Enter or edit numeric values
4. Move the cursor to the right or left
5. Select measurement units during operations

6.3 Main Display


The 1066 displays the primary measurement
value and temperature, and up to four secondary
measurement values, a fault and warning banner,
and a digital communications icon.
Process Measurements:

One process variable and process temperature is


displayed by default. For all configurations, the
Upper display area shows the live process variable
and the Center display area shows the
Temperature (default screen settings).

Secondary Values:

Up to four secondary values are shown in display quadrants at the bottom half of the screen. All four
secondary value positions can be programmed by the user to any displayable parameter available.

Fault and Warning Banner:

If the transmitter detects a problem with itself or the sensor the word Fault or Warning will appear
at the bottom of the display. A fault requires immediate attention. A warning indicates a problem-
atic condition or an impending failure. For troubleshooting assistance, press Diag.

Formatting the Main Display

The main display screen can be programmed to show primary process variables, secondary
process variables and diagnostics.
1. Press MENU
2. Scroll down to Display. Press ENTER.
3. Main Format will be highlighted. Press ENTER.
4. The sensor 1 process value will be highlighted in reverse video. Press the selection keys to
navigate down to the screen sections that you wish to program. Press ENTER.
5. Choose the desired display parameter or diagnostic for each of the four display sections in
the lower screen.
6. Continue to navigate and program all desired screen sections. Press MENU and EXIT. The
screen will return to the main display.

38 Display and Operation


1066 Instruction Manual Section 6: Display and Operation
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

The default display shows the live process measurement in the upper display area and temperature
in the center display area. The user can elect to disable the display of temperature in the center dis-
play area using the Main Format function. See Fig. 4-1 to guide you through programming the
main display to select process parameters and diagnostics of your choice.

6.4 Menu System


The 1066 uses a scroll and select menu system.
Pressing the MENU key at any time opens the
top-level menu including Calibrate, Hold,
Program and Display functions.
To find a menu item, scroll with the up and down
keys until the item is highlighted. Continue to
scroll and select menu items until the desired
function is chosen.
To select the item, press ENTER. To return to a
previous menu level or to enable the main live
display, press the EXIT key repeatedly. To return
immediately to the main display from any menu level, simply press MENU then EXIT.
The selection keys have the following functions:
The Up key (above ENTER) increments numerical values, moves the decimal place one place
to the right, or selects units of measurement.
The Down key (below ENTER) decrements numerical values, moves the decimal place one
place to the left, or selects units of measurement
The Left key (left of ENTER) moves the cursor to the left.
The Right key (right of ENTER) moves the cursor to the right.
To access desired menu functions, use the Quick Reference. During all menu displays (except main
display format and Quick Start), the live process measurement and temperature value are dis-
played in the top two lines of the Upper display area. This conveniently allows display of the live val-
ues during important calibration and programming operations. Menu screens will time out after
two minutes and return to the main live display.

Display and Operation 39


Section 6: Display and Operation 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

This page left intentionally blank

40 Display and Operation


1066 Instruction Manual Section 7: Transmitter Programming
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Section 7: Programming the Transmitter Basics


7.1 General
Typical programming steps include the following listed procedures. Each of these programming
functions are easily and quickly accomplished using the intuitive menu system.
Changing the measurement type, measurement units and temperature units.
Choose temperature units and manual or automatic temperature compensation mode
Configure and assign values to the current outputs
Set a security code for two levels of security access
Accessing menu functions using a security code
Enabling and disabling Hold mode for current outputs
Resetting all factory defaults, calibration data only, or current output settings only

7.2 Changing Startup Settings


7.2.1 Purpose
To change the measurement type, measurement units, or temperature units that were initially
entered in Quick Start, choose the Reset analyzer function or access the Program menus for the
sensor. The following choices for specific measurement type, measurement units are available for
each sensor measurement board.

TABLE 7-1. Measurements and Measurement Units


Signal board Available measurements Measurements units:
pH/ORP P pH, ORP, Redox pH, mV (ORP, Redox)
Conductivity, Resistivity, TDS, Salinity,
S/cm, mS/cm, S/cm
Contacting conductivity C NaOH (0-12%), HCl (0-15%), Low H2SO4,
% (concentration)
High H2SO4, NaCl (0-20%),
Custom Curve
Conductivity, Resistivity, TDS, Salinity,
S/cm, mS/cm, S/cm
Toroidal conductivity T NaOH (0-12%), HCl (0-15%), Low H2SO4,
% (concentration)
High H2SO4, NaCl (0-20%),
Custom Curve
Chlorine CL
Free Chlorine, Total Chlorine, Monochloramine ppm, mg/L

ppm, mg/L, ppb, g/L % Sat, Partial


Oxygen DO Oxygen (ppm), Trace Oxygen (ppb),
Pressure, % Oxygen In Gas, ppm
Percent Oxygen in gas
Oxygen In Gas
Ozone OZ Ozone ppm, mg/L, ppb, g/L

Transmitter Programming 41
Section 7: Transmitter Programming 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

7.2.2 Procedure
Follow the Reset Analyzer procedure (Sec 7.8) to reconfigure the transmitter to display new
measurements or measurement units. To change the specific measurement or measurement
units for each measurement type, refer to the Program menu for the appropriate measurement
(Sec. 6.0).

7.3 Choosing Temperature Units and


Automatic/Manual Temperature Compensation
7.3.1 Purpose
Most liquid analytical measurements (except ORP and Redox)
1.234S/cm 25.0C
require temperature compensation. The 1066 performs tempera-
Temperature
ture compensation automatically by applying internal temperature
Units: C
correction algorithms. Temperature correction can also be turned Temp Comp: Auto
off. If temperature correction is off, the 1066 uses the temperature Manual: +25.0C
entered by the user in all temperature correction calculations.

7.4 Configuring and Ranging Current Outputs


7.4.1 Purpose
The 1066 has two analog current outputs. Ranging the outputs means assigning values to the
low (4 mA) and high (20 mA) outputs. This section provides a guide for configuring and ranging
the outputs. ALWAYS CONFIGURE THE OUTPUTS FIRST.

7.4.2 Definitions
1. CURRENT OUTPUTS. The transmitter provides a continuous output current (4-20 mA)
directly proportional to the process variable or temperature. The low and high current out-
puts can be set to any value.
2. ASSIGNING OUTPUTS. Assign a measurement or temperature to Output 1 or Output 2.
3. DAMPEN. Output dampening smooths out noisy readings. It also increases the response
time of the output. Output dampening does not affect the response time of the display.
4. MODE. The current output can be made directly proportional to the displayed value (linear
mode) or directly proportional to the common logarithm of the displayed value (log mode).

7.4.3 Procedure: Configure Outputs 1.234S/cm 25.0C


OutputM Configure
Under the Program/Outputs menu, the adjacent screen will Assign: Meas
Scale: Linear
appear to allow configuration of the outputs. Follow the menu Dampening: 0sec
screens in Fig. 7-1 to configure the outputs.
Fault Mode: Fixed
Fault Value: 21.00mA

42 Transmitter Programming
1066 Instruction Manual Section 7: Transmitter Programming
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

FIGURE 7-1. Configuring and 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C

Ranging the Current Outputs Output Range Output Range


O1 SN 4mA: 0.000 OM 4mA: 1.000
O1 SN 20mA: 20.00 OM 20mA: 1.000%
O2 SN 4mA: 0C OM 4mA: 1.000%
Range S2 20mA: 100C OM 20mA: 7.0 pH

1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C


MAIN MENU

1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Program

Program 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Outputs OutputM Assign
Output Configure
Outputs
Outputs Configure OutputM Configure S1 Measurement
Measurement Range Output1
Assign: S1 Meas S1 Temperature
Temperature Configure Output2 Range: 4-20mA
Simulate
Simulate Scale: Linear
Security Dampening: 0sec
Diagnostic Setup 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Reset Analyzer OutputM Range
1.234S/cm 25.0C
4-20mA
1.234S/cm 25.0C
Simulate 0-20mA
OutputN Hold At
Output 1
Output 2 12.00mA
1.234S/cm 25.0C

Scale
Linear
Log

7.4.4 Procedure: Ranging the Current Outputs 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Output Range
The adjacent screen will appear under Program/Output/Range. O1 SN 4mA: 0.000S/cm
Enter a value for 4mA and 20mA for each output. Follow the menu O1 SN 20mA: 20.00S/cm
O2 SN 4mA: 0C
screens in Fig. 7-1 to assign values to the outputs.
O2 SN 20mA: 100C

7.5 Setting a Security Code


7.5.1 Purpose
The security codes prevent accidental or unwanted changes to program settings, displays, and
calibration. The 1066 has two levels of security code to control access and use of the instrument
to different types of users. The two levels of security are:
All: This is the Supervisory security level. It allows access to all menu functions, including
Programming, Calibration, Hold and Display.
Calibration/Hold: This is the operator or technician level menu. It allows access to only cali-
bration and Hold of the current outputs.

7.5.2 Procedure
1. Press MENU. The main menu screen appears. Choose Program.
2. Scroll down to Security. Select Security.
3. The security entry screen appears. Enter a three digit security code for each of the desired
security levels. The security code takes effect two minutes after the last key stroke. Record the
security code(s) for future access and communication to operators or technicians as needed.
4. The display returns to the security menu screen. Press EXIT to return to the previous screen.
To return to the main display, press MENU followed by EXIT.
Fig. 7-2 displays the security code screens.

Transmitter Programming 43
Section 7: Transmitter Programming 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

FIGURE 7-2. Setting a Security Code

MAIN MENU
1.234S/cm 25.0C

Program
Program
Outputs
Measurement
Temperature
1.234S/cm 25.0C
Security
Security Calibration/Hold: 000
All: 000
Diagnostic Setup
Reset Analyzer

7.6 Security Access


7.6.1 How the Security Code Works
When entering the correct access code for the Calibration/Hold security level, the Calibration and
Hold menus are accessible. This allows operators or technicians to perform routine maintenance.
This security level does not allow access to the Program or Display menus. When entering the cor-
rect access code for All security level, the user has access to all menu functions, including
Programming, Calibration, Hold and Display.

7.6.2 Procedure
1. If a security code has been programmed, selecting the Calibrate, Hold, Program or Display top
menu items causes the security access screen to appear
2. Enter the three-digit security code for the appropriate security level. 1.234S/cm 25.0C
3. If the entry is correct, the appropriate menu screen appears. If the Security Code
entry is incorrect, the Invalid Code screen appears. The Enter 000
Security Code screen reappears after 2 seconds.

7.7 Using Hold


7.7.1 Purpose
The transmitter output is always proportional to measured value. To prevent improper operation
of systems or pumps that are controlled directly by the current output, place the analyzer in hold
before removing the sensor for calibration and maintenance. Be sure to remove the transmitter
from hold once calibration is complete. During hold, both outputs remain at the last value. Once
in hold, all current outputs remain on Hold indefinitely.

44 Transmitter Programming
1066 Instruction Manual Section 7: Transmitter Programming
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

FIGURE 7-3. Using Hold

MAIN MENU
1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
Hold outputs?

Hold
Hold
No
Hold: No
Yes

7.7.2 Using the Hold Function


To hold the outputs,
1. Press MENU. The main menu screen appears. Choose Hold.
2. The Hold Outputs? screen appears. Choose Yes to place the analyzer in hold. Choose No to
take the analyzer out of hold.
3. The Hold screen will then appear and Hold will remain on indefinitely until Hold is disabled.
See Figure 7-3.

7.8 Resetting Factory Default Settings


7.8.1 Purpose
This section describes how to restore factory calibration and default values. The process also
clears all fault messages and returns the display to the first Quick Start screen. The 1066 offers
three options for resetting factory defaults.
1. Reset all settings to factory defaults
2. Reset sensor calibration data only
3. Reset analog output settings only

7.8.2 Procedure
To reset to factory defaults, reset calibration data only or reset analog outputs only, follow the
Reset Analyzer flow diagram.

Transmitter Programming 45
Section 7: Transmitter Programming 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

FIGURE 7-4. Resetting Factory Default Settings

46 Transmitter Programming
1066 Instruction Manual Section 8: Programming Measurements
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Section 8: Programming Measurements


8.1 Introduction
The 1066 automatically recognizes the measurement input upon first power-up and each time
the transmitter is powered. Completion of Quick Start screens upon first power up enable meas-
urements, but additional steps may be required to program the transmitter for the desired meas-
urement application. This section covers the following programming and configuration
functions:
1. Selecting measurement type or sensor type (all sections)
2. Identifying the preamp location (pH-see Sec. 8.2)
3. Enabling manual temperature correction and entering a reference temperature (all sections)
4. Enabling sample temperature correction and entering temperature correction slope (selected
sections)
5. Defining measurement display resolution (pH and amperometric)
6. Defining measurement display units (all sections)
7. Adjusting the input filter to control display and output reading variability or noise (all sections)
8. Selecting a measurement range (conductivity see Secs 8.4, 8.5)
9. Entering a cell constant for a contacting or toroidal sensor (see Secs 8.4, 8.5)
10. Creating an application-specific concentration curve (conductivity-see Secs 8.4, 8.5)
11. Enabling automatic pH correction for free chlorine measurement (Sec. 8.6.1)

To fully configure the transmitter, you may use the following:


1. Reset Transmitter function to reset factory defaults and configure to the desired measure-
ment. Follow the Reset Transmitter menu to reconfigure the transmitter to display new meas-
urements or measurement units.
2. Program menus to adjust any of the programmable configuration items. Use the following
configuration and programming guidelines for the applicable measurement.

Programming Measurements 47
Section 8: Programming Measurements 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

8.2 pH Measurement Programming


8.2.1 Description
The section describes how to configure the 1066 transmitter for pH measurements. The follow-
ing programming and configuration functions are covered.
1. Measurement type: pH Select pH, ORP, Redox.
2. Preamp location: Transmitter Identify preamp location (automatic detection for SMART pH
sensors)
3. Filter: 4 sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
4. Reference Z: Low Select low or high reference impedance
5. Resolution: 0.01pH Select 0.01pH or 0.1pH for pH display resolution
To configure pH:
1.234S/cm 25.0C
1. Press MENU SN Configure
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Measure: pH
Preamp: Analyzer
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Soln Temp Corr: Off
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults are shown). Resolution: 0.01pH
To program any function, scroll to the desired item and press ENTER. Filter: 4 sec
Reference Z: Low

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each con-
figuration function. Use the flow diagram for pH programming and the 1066 live screen prompts
for each function to complete configuration and programming.

8.2.2 Measurement 1.234S/cm 25.0C


SN Measurement
The display screen for selecting the measurement is shown. The default
value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the pH/ORP Programming flow pH
diagram to complete this function. ORP
Redox

8.2.3 Preamp
The display screen for identifying the Preamp location is shown. The
1.234S/cm 25.0C
default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the pH/ORP SN Preamp
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. Analyzer
Sensor/JBox
Note: Sensor/JBox must be selected to support SMART pH sensors from
Rosemount Analytical.

48 Programming Measurements
1066 Instruction Manual Section 8: Programming Measurements
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

8.2.4 Solution Temperature Correction 1.234S/cm 25.0C


SN Soln Temp Corr.
The display screen for selecting the Solution temperature correction Off
algorithm is shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer Ultra Pure Water
High pH
to the pH/ORP Programming flow diagram to complete this function.
Custom

8.2.5 Temperature Coefficient


The display screen for entering the custom solution temperature 1.234S/cm 25.0C
coefficient is shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer SN Soln Temp Coeff.
- 0.032pH/C
to the pH/ORP Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.2.6 Resolution 1.234S/cm 25.0C


SN Resolution
The display screen for selecting 0.01pH or 0.1pH for pH display reso- 0.01pH
lution is shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to 0.1pH
the pH/ORP Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.2.7 Filter
The display screen for entering the input filter value in seconds is 1.234S/cm 25.0C
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the SN Input filter
04 sec
pH/ORP Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.2.8 Reference Impedance


1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for selecting Low or High Reference impedance is SN Reference Z
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Low
pH/ORP Programming flow diagram to complete this function. High

8.3 ORP Measurement Programming


The section describes how to configure the 1066 transmitter for ORP measurements. The follow-
ing programming and configuration functions are covered:
1. Measurement type: pH Select pH, ORP, Redox.
2. Preamp location: Transmitter Identify preamp location
3. Filter: 4 sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
4. Reference Z: Low Select low or high reference impedance
5. Sensor wiring scheme: Normal or Reference to Ground

Programming Measurements 49
Section 8: Programming Measurements 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

To configure ORP: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


1. Press MENU SN Configure
Measure: pH
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Preamp: Analyzer
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Flter: 4 sec
Reference Z: Low
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults are shown).
To program any displayed function, scroll to the desired item and press ENTER.

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each con-
figuration function. Use the flow diagram for ORP programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the
1066 live screen prompts for each function to complete configuration and programming.

8.3.1 Measurement 1.234S/cm 25.0C


SN Measurement
The display screen for selecting the measurement is shown. The pH
ORP
default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the pH/ORP Redox
Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.3.2 Preamp
1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for identifying the Preamp location is shown. The SN Preamp
default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the pH/ORP Analyzer
Sensor/JBox
Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.3.3 Filter
1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for entering the input filter value in seconds is
SN Input filter
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the 04 sec
pH/ORP Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.3.4 Reference Impedance


1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Reference Z
The display screen for Selecting Low or high Reference impedance is
Low
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the
High
pH/ORP Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

50 Programming Measurements
1066 Instruction Manual Section 8: Programming Measurements
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

8.4 Contacting Conductivity Measurement


Programming
8.4.1 Description
The section describes how to configure the 1066 transmitter for conductivity measurements
using contacting conductivity sensors. The following programming and configuration functions
are covered.
1. Measure: Conductivity Select Conductivity, Resistivity, TDS. Salinity or % conc
2. Type: 2-Electrode Select 2-Electrode or 4-Electrode type sensors
3. Cell K: 1.00000/cm Enter the cell Constant for the sensor
4. Measurement units
5. Filter: 2 sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
6. Range: Auto Select measurement Auto-range or specific range
7. Temp Comp: Slope Select Temp Comp: Slope, Neutral Salt, Cation or Raw
8. Slope: 2.00%/C Enter the linear temperature coefficient
9. Ref Temp: 25.0C Enter the Reference temp
10. Cal Factor: default=0.95000/cm Enter the Cal Factor for 4-Electrode sensors from the sensor tag

1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Configure
Type: 2-Electrode
To configure the contacting conductivity:
Measure: Cond
1. Press MENU Range: Auto
Cell K: 1.00000/cm
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. RTD Offset: 0.00C
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. RTD Slope: 0
Temp Comp: Slope
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults are shown). To Slope: 2.00%/C
program any displayed function, scroll to the desired item and press Ref Temp: 25.0C
ENTER. Filter: 2 sec
Custom Setup

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each con-
figuration function. Use the flow diagram for contacting conductivity programming at the end of
Sec. 8 and the 1066 live screen prompts for each function to complete configuration and pro-
gramming.

8.4.2 Sensor Type


1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for selecting 2-Electrode or 4-Electrode type sensors is SN Type
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the contact- 2-Electrode
ing conductivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 4-Electrode

Programming Measurements 51
Section 8: Programming Measurements 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

8.4.3 Measure 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the measurement is shown. The default SN Measurement
Conductivity
value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the contacting conductivity Resistivity
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. TDS
Salinity
NaOH (0-12%)
HCl (0-15%)
Low H2SO4
High H2SO4
NaCl (0-20%)
Custom Curve

8.4.4 Range 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for Selecting Auto-ranging or a specific range is SN Range
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Note: Ranges are Auto
shown as conductance, not conductivity. Refer to the contacting con- 50 S
500 S
ductivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 2000 S
20 mS
200 mS
600 mS

8.4.5 Cell Constant 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering a cell Constant for the sensor is shown. SN Cell Constant
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the contacting con- 1.00000 /cm
ductivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.4.6 RTD Offset 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for Entering the RTD Offset for the sensor is shown. SN RTD Offset
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the contacting con- 0.00C
ductivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.4.7 RTD Slope 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the RTD slope for the sensor is shown. SN RTD Slope
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the contacting con- 2.00%/C
ductivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.4.8 Temp Comp 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for Selecting Temperature Compensation as Slope, SN Temp Comp
Slope
Neutral Salt, Cation or Raw is shown. The default value is displayed in
Neutral Salt
bold type. Refer to the contacting conductivity Programming flow dia- Cation
gram to complete this function. Raw

52 Programming Measurements
1066 Instruction Manual Section 8: Programming Measurements
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

8.4.9 Slope 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for Entering the conductivity/temp Slope is shown. SN Slope
2.00 %/C
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the contacting con-
ductivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.4.10 Reference Temp


1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for manually entering the Reference temperature is
SN Ref Temp
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the contact-
(25.0C normal)
ing conductivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function. +25.0C

8.4.11 Filter 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in seconds is shown. SN Input filter
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the contacting con-
ductivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 02 sec

8.4.12 Custom Setup 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screens for creating a custom curve for converting conduc- SN Custom Curve
tivity to concentration is shown. Refer to the contacting conductivity Configure
Enter Data Points
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. Calculate Curve

1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Calculate Curve
When the custom curve data entry is complete, press ENTER. The dis- Custom curve
play will confirm the determination of a custom curve fit to the entered fit completed.
data by displaying this screen: In Process Cal
recommended.

If the custom curve fit is not completed or is unsuccessful, the display will 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Calculate Curve
read as follows and the screen will return to the beginning custom curve Failure
screen.

8.4.13 Cal Factor


Upon initial installation and power up, if 4-electrode was selected for the
1.234S/cm 25.0C
sensor type in the Quick Start menus, the user enters a Cell Constant and
SN Cal Factor
a Cal Factor using the instrument keypad. The cell constant is needed 0.95000/cm
to convert measured conductance to conductivity as displayed on the
transmitter screen. The Cal Factor entry is needed increase the accura-
cy of the live conductivity readings, especially at low conductivity read-
ings below 20uS/cm. Both the Cell Constant and the Cal Factor are
printed on the tag attached to the 4-electrode sensor/cable.

Programming Measurements 53
Section 8: Programming Measurements 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

8.5 Toroidal Conductivity Measurement Programming


8.5.1 Description
The section describes how to configure the 1066 transmitter for conductivity measurements
using inductive/toroidal sensors. The following programming and configuration functions are cov-
ered:

1. Measure: Conductivity Select Conductivity, Resistivity, TDS. Salinity or % conc


2. Sensor Model: 228 Select sensor type
3. Measurement units
4. Range selection
5. Cell K: 3.00000/cm Enter the cell Constant for the sensors
6. Temp Comp: Slope Select Temp Comp: Slope, Neutral Salt, Cation or Raw
7. Slope: 2.00%/C Enter the linear temperature coefficient
8. Ref Temp: 25.0C Enter the Reference temp
9. Filter: 2 sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Configure
Model: 228
To configure toroidal conductivity: Measure: Cond
Range: Auto
1. Press MENU
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Cell K: 3.00000/cm
RTD Offset: 0.00C
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. RTD Slope: 0
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults are shown). To Temp Comp: Slope
Slope: 2.00%/C
program any displayed function, scroll to the desired item and press Ref Temp: 25.0C
ENTER. Filter: 2 sec
Custom Setup

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each con-
figuration function. Use the flow diagram for toroidal conductivity programming at the end of
Sec. 8 and the 1066 live screen prompts for each function to complete configuration and pro-
gramming.

8.5.2 Sensor Type 1.234S/cm


SN Model
25.0C

228
The display screen for selecting the sensor model is shown. The default 225
value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the toroidal conductivity 226
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 247

Other

54 Programming Measurements
1066 Instruction Manual Section 8: Programming Measurements
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

8.5.3 Measure 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the measurement is shown. The default Measurement
Conductivity
value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the toroidal conductivity
Resistivity
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. TDS
Salinity

NaOH (0-12%)
HCl (0-15%)
Low H2SO4
High H2SO4
NaCl (0-20%)
Custom Curve

8.5.4 Range
The display screen for Selecting Auto-ranging or a specific range is
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Note: Ranges are 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Range
shown as conductance, not conductivity. Refer to the toroidal conduc-
Auto
tivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 50-600 S
0.5-100 mS
NOTE: when manually changing ranges, a Zero calibration and recal-
90-1500 mS
ibration in a solution of known conductivity must be performed
with the toroidal sensor wired to the instrument. Refer to sec. 9.5.2
Zeroing the Instrument and sec. 9.5.3 Calibrating the Sensor in a
Conductivity Standard.

8.5.5 Cell Constant


The display screen for entering a cell Constant for the sensor is shown.
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the toroidal conduc- 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Cell Constant
tivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function.
2.7000 /cm
NOTE: When manually changing ranges, the Cell Constant may
change through the calibration process.

8.5.6 Temp Comp


The display screen for Selecting Temperature Compensation as Slope, 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Neutral Salt, or Raw is shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Temp Comp
Refer to the toroidal conductivity Programming flow diagram to com- Slope
plete this function. Raw

Programming Measurements 55
Section 8: Programming Measurements 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

8.5.7 Slope
The display screen for Entering the conductivity/temp Slope is shown. 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Slope
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the toroidal conduc-
2.00%/C
tivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.5.8 Ref Temp 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for manually Entering the Reference temperature is SN Ref Temp
(25.0C normal)
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the toroidal
+25.0C
conductivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.5.9 Filter 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in seconds is shown. SN Input filter
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the toroidal conduc-
tivity Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 02 sec

Using the highest range (90mS to 1500mS) in very low conductivity


processes below 100S (conductance) might generate a high noise
value relative to the actual process value. In these cases, it is recom-
mended to increase the input filter setting above the default value
of 2 sec. to suppress the effect of noise.

8.5.10 Custom Setup 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screens for creating custom curves for converting conductiv- SN Custom Curve
Configure
ity to concentration is shown. Refer to the toroidal conductivity
Enter Data Points
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. Calculate Curve

When the custom curve data entry is complete, press ENTER. The dis- 1.234S/cm 25.0C
play will confirm the determination of a custom curve fit to the entered SN Calculate Curve
data by displaying this screen: Custom curve
fit completed.
In Process Cal
recommended.

If the custom curve fit is not completed or is unsuccessful, the display will 1.234S/cm 25.0C
read as follows and the screen will return to the beginning custom curve SN Calculate Curve
screen. Failure

56 Programming Measurements
1066 Instruction Manual Section 8: Programming Measurements
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

8.6 Chlorine Measurement Programming


The 1066 can measure any of three variants of Chlorine:
Free Chlorine
Total Chlorine
Monochloramine
The section describes how to configure the 1066 transmitter for Chlorine measurements.

8.6.1 Free Chlorine Measurement Programming


This Chlorine sub-section describes how to configure the 1066 transmitter for Free Chlorine meas-
urement using amperometric chlorine sensors. Automatic temperature compensation is available
using Auto or Manual pH correction. For maximum accuracy, use automatic temperature com-
pensation.
The following programming and configuration functions are covered:
1. Measure: Free Chlorine Select Free Chlorine, Total Cl, Monochloramine
2. Units: ppm Select units ppm or mg/L
3 Resolution: 0.001 Select display resolution 0.01 or 0.001
4. Free Cl Correct: Live Select Live/Continuous pH correction or Manual
5. Manual pH: 7.00 pH For Manual pH correction, enter the pH value
6. Filter: 5sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds

To configure chlorine for free chlorine:


1. Press MENU 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Configure
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Measure: Free Chlorine
Units: ppm
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER.
Filter: 5sec
Free Cl Correct: Live
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults are shown). To Manual pH: 7.00 pH
Resolution: 0.001
program any displayed function, scroll to the desired item and press
ENTER.

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each con-
figuration function. Use the flow diagram for chlorine programming at the end of Sec. 8 and the
1066 live screen prompts for each function to complete configuration and programming.

Programming Measurements 57
Section 8: Programming Measurements 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

8.6.1.1 Measure 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the measurement is shown. The default SN Measurement
Free Chlorine
value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow
Total Chlorine
diagram to complete this function. Monochloramine

8.6.1.2 Units
1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for selecting units as ppm or mg/L is shown. The
SN Units
default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine ppm
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. mg/L

8.6.1.3 Filter 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in seconds is shown. SN Input filter
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 05 sec

8.6.1.4 Free Chlorine pH Correction 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for Selecting Live/Continuous pH correction or SN Free Cl
Manual pH correction is shown. The default value is displayed in bold pH Correction
type. Refer to the Chlorine Programming flow diagram to complete this Live/Continuous
Manual
function.

8.6.1.5 Manual pH Correction 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for manually entering the pH value of the measured SN Manual pH
process liquid is shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer 07.00 pH
to the Chlorine Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.6.1.6 Resolution 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting display resolution as 0.001 or 0.01 is SN Resolution -
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine 0.001
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 0.01

58 Programming Measurements
1066 Instruction Manual Section 8: Programming Measurements
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

8.6.2 Total Chlorine Measurement Programming

8.6.2.1 Description
This Chlorine sub-section describes how to configure the 1066 transmitter for Total Chlorine
measurement using amperometric chlorine sensors. The following programming and configura-
tion functions are covered:
1. Measure: Free Chlorine Select Free Chlorine, pH Ind. Free Cl. Total Cl, Monochloramine
2. Units: ppm Select units ppm or mg/L
3. Resolution: 0.001 Select display resolution 0.01 or 0.001
4. Filter: 5sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds

To configure chlorine measurement for total chlorine:


1.234S/cm 25.0C
1. Press MENU SN Configure
Measure: Free Chlorine
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Units: ppm
Filter: 5sec
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Resolution: 0.001

The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults are shown). To program any displayed
function, scroll to the desired item and press ENTER.

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each con-
figuration function. Use the flow diagram for chlorine programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the
1066 live screen prompts for each function to complete configuration and programming.

8.6.2.2 Measure 1.234S/cm 25.0C


SN Measurement
The display screen for selecting the measurement is shown. The default
Free Chlorine
value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the chlorine Programming flow Total Chlorine
diagram to complete this function. Monochloramine

8.6.2.3 Units
The display screen for selecting units as ppm or mg/L is shown. The 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Units
default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine
ppm
Programming flow diagram to complete this function mg/L

8.6.2.4 Filter
1.234S/cm 25.0C
The display screen for entering the input filter value in seconds is shown.
SN Input filter
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 05 sec

Programming Measurements 59
Section 8: Programming Measurements 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

8.6.2.5 Resolution 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting display resolution as 0.001 or 0.01 is SN Resolution
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine 0.001
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 0.01

8.6.3 Monochloramine Measurement Programming


This Chlorine sub-section describes how to configure the 1066 transmitter for Monochloramine
measurement using amperometric chlorine sensors. The following programming and configura-
tion functions are covered:
1. Measure: Free Chlorine Select Free Chlorine, pH Ind. Free Cl. Total Cl, Monochloramine
2. Units: ppm Select units ppm or mg/L
3. Resolution: 0.001 Select display resolution 0.01 or 0.001
4. Filter: 5sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds

To configure chlorine for monochloramine: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


SN Configure
1. Press MENU
Measure: Free Chlorine
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Units: ppm
Filter: 5sec
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER. Resolution: 0.001

The following screen format will appear (factory defaults are shown). To program any displayed
function, scroll to the desired item and press ENTER.

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each con-
figuration function. Use the flow diagram for chlorine programming at the end of Sec. 8 and the
1066 live screen prompts for each function to complete configuration and programming.

8.6.3.1 Measure: Monochloramine 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting the measurement is shown. The SN Measurement
Free Chlorine
default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine Total Chlorine
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. Monochloramine

8.6.3.2 Units 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting units as ppm or mg/L is shown. The SN Units
default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Chlorine ppm
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. mg/L

60 Programming Measurements
1066 Instruction Manual Section 8: Programming Measurements
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

8.6.3.3 Filter 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in seconds is SN Input filter
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the
Chlorine Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 05 sec

8.6.3.4 Resolution 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting display resolution as 0.001 or 0.01 is SN Resolution
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the 0.001
Chlorine Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 0.01

8.7 Oxygen Measurement Programming


This section describes how to configure the 1066 transmitter for dissolved and gaseous oxygen
measurement using amperometric oxygen sensors. The following programming and configura-
tion functions are covered:
1. Sensor type: Select Water/Waste, Trace. BioRx, BioRx-Other, Brew, %O2 In Gas
2. Measure type: Select Concentration, % Saturation, Partial Pressure, Oxygen in Gas
3. Units: ppm Select ppm, mg/L, ppb, g/L, % Sat, %O2-Gas, ppm Oxygen-Gas
4. Pressure Units: bar Select pressure units: mm Hg, in Hg, Atm, kPa, mbar, bar
5. Salinity: 00.0 Enter Salinity as
6. Filter: 5sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds
7. Partial Press: mmHg Select mm Hg, in Hg. atm, kPa, mbar or bar for Partial pressure

To configure Oxygen:
1.234S/cm 25.0C
1. Press MENU SN Configure
Type: Water/Waste
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Units: ppm
Partial Press: mmHg
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER.
Salinity: 00.0
Filter: 5sec
The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults are shown). To Pressure Units: bar
program any displayed function, scroll to the desired item and press Use Press: At Air Cal
Custom Setup
ENTER.

The following sub-sections show the initial display screen that appears for each configuration func-
tion. Use the flow diagram for oxygen programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the 1066 live screen
prompts for each function to complete configuration and programming.

Programming Measurements 61
Section 8: Programming Measurements 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Type
8.7.1 Oxygen Measurement application Water/Waste
Trace Oxygen
The display screen for programming the measurement is shown. The BioRx-Rosemount
default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Oxygen BioRx-Other
Programming flow diagram to complete this function.
Brewing
Oxygen In Gas

8.7.2 Units 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for selecting units as ppm , mg/L, ppb, g/L, % SN Units
Saturation, %Oxygen in Gas, or ppm Oxygen in Gas is shown. The ppm
mg/L
default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Oxygen
ppb
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. g/L

% Saturation
Partial Pressure
% Oxygen In Gas
ppm Oxygen In Gas

1.234S/cm 25.0C

8.7.3 Partial Press SN Partial Press


mm Hg
The display screen for selecting pressure units for Partial pressure is shown. in Hg
This selection is needed if the specified measurement is Partial pressure. atm
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Oxygen kPa
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. mbar
bar

8.7.4 Salinity
The display screen for Entering the Salinity (as parts per thousand) of the 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Salinity
process liquid to be measured is shown. The default value is displayed in
00.0
bold type. Refer to the Oxygen Programming flow diagram to complete
this function.
Enter Salinity as

8.7.5 Filter 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The display screen for entering the input filter value in seconds is shown. SN Input filter
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Oxygen
Programming flow diagram to complete this function. 05 sec

1.234S/cm 25.0C
8.7.6 Pressure Units Pressure Units
mm Hg
The display screen for selecting pressure units for atmospheric pressure is in Hg
shown. This selection is needed for the display of atmospheric pressure. atm
The default value is displayed in bold type. The user must enter a known kPa
value for local atmospheric pressure. Refer to the Oxygen Programming mbar
flow diagram to complete this function. bar

62 Programming Measurements
1066 Instruction Manual Section 8: Programming Measurements
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

8.8 OZONE Measurement Programming


This section describes how to configure the 1066 transmitter for ozone measurement using
amperometric ozone sensors. The following programming and configuration functions are cov-
ered:
1. Units: ppm Select ppm, mg/L, ppb, g/L
2. Resolution: 0.001 Select display resolution 0.01 or 0.001
3. Filter: 5sec Override the default input filter, enter 0-999 seconds

To configure Ozone:
1.234S/cm 25.0C
1. Press MENU SN Configure
Units: ppm
2. Scroll down to Program. Press ENTER. Filter: 5 sec
Resolution: 0.001
3. Scroll down to Measurement. Press ENTER.

The adjacent screen format will appear (factory defaults are shown). To program any displayed
function, scroll to the desired item and press ENTER.

The following sub-sections show the initial display screen that appears for each configuration func-
tion. Use the flow diagram for ozone programming at the end of Sec. 6 and the 1066 live screen
prompts for each function to complete configuration and programming.
Note: Ozone measurement boards are detected automatically by the analyzer. No measurement
selection is necessary.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
8.8.1 Units SN Units
The display screen for selecting measurement units is shown. The default ppm
mg/L
value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Ozone Programming flow dia-
ppb
gram to complete this function. g/L

8.8.2 Filter 1.234S/cm 25.0C


SN Input filter
The display screen for entering the input filter value in seconds is shown.
The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Ozone 05 sec
Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

8.8.3 Resolution 1.234S/cm 25.0C


SN Resolution
The display screen for selecting display resolution as 0.001 or 0.01 is 0.001
shown. The default value is displayed in bold type. Refer to the Ozone 0.01
Programming flow diagram to complete this function.

Programming Measurements 63
Section 8: Programming Measurements 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

FIGURE 8-1. Configuring pH/ORP Measurements

64 Programming Measurements
1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Measurement SN Type
Conductivity 2-Electrode
LIQ_MAN_1066

Resistivity 4-Electrode
TDS
Salinity 1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Range
1.234S/cm 25.0C
Auto
SN Cell Constant

Programming Measurements
0-50 S
1066 Instruction Manual

50-500 S 1.00000 /cm


500-2000 S
2000 S - 20 mS 1.234S/cm 25.0C
20 mS - 200 mS
200 mS - 600 mS SN RTD Offset
0.00C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Configure
M Program Measure: Cond 1.234S/cm 25.0C
A P
Outputs 1.234S/cm 25.0C Type: 2-Electrode
I r SN RTD Slope
Measurement Range: Auto
N o Configure? 2.00%/C
g Temperature Measurement
Figure 8-2. Configure Contacting Measurements

Cell K: 1.00000/cm
M r contacting RTD Offset: 0.00C 1.234S/cm 25.0C
E a Security
RTD Slope: 0 SN Temp Comp
N m Reset Analyzer Temp Comp: Slope
Slope
U Frequency Slope: 2.00%/C
1.234S/cm 25.0C Neutral Salt
Ref Temp: 25.0C
Cation
Filter: 2 sec SN Slope
Raw
Custom Setup 2.00 %/C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C SN Ref Temp
1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Custom Curve
(25.0C normal)
SN Custom Config
Configure Units: ppm +25.0C
Enter Data Points # of Points: 2
Calculate Curve Ref Temp: 25.0 C
Slope: 2.00 %/C 1.234S/cm 25.0C

1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Units
1.234S/cm 25.0C
%
SN Calculate Curve SN Data Points ppm
Curve fit in Pt1: 1.000 ppm mg/L
Pt1: 1.000 S/cm g/L
progress
Pt2: 1.000 ppm
Pt2: 1.000 S/cm 1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
Pt3: 1.000 ppm SN PointM
Pt3: 1.000 S/cm
SN Calculate Curve 1.000 ppm
Custom curve Pt4: 1.000 ppm
fit completed. Pt4: 1.000 S/cm
In Process Cal Pt5: 1.000 ppm
recommended. Pt5: 1.000 S/cm
December 2014
Section 8: Programming Measurements

65
66
1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Measurement
Conductivity
December 2014

Resistivity
TDS
Salinity
1.234S/cm 25.0C
NaOH (0-12%) 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Model HCl (0-15%)
Low H2SO4 SN Cell Constant
228 High H2SO4
225 3.00000 /cm
NaCl (0-20%)
226
247 1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Range
1.234S/cm 25.0C
Auto
50-600 S SN RTD Offset
1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C
0.5-100 mS
0.00C
M SN Configure 90-1500 mS
Section 8: Programming Measurements

Program
A P Model: 228 200S
I Outputs 1.234S/cm 25.0C
r 1.234S/cm 25.0C Measure: Cond
Figure 8-3. Configure Toroidal Measurements

N o Measurement
Measurement Range: Auto SN RTD Slope
g Temperature Configure? 2.00%/C
M r Measurement Cell K: 3.00000/cm
E a Security Toroidal RTD Offset: 0.00C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
N m Reset Analyzer RTD Slope: 0
U Temp Comp: Slope SN Temp Comp
Frequency Slope: 2.00%/C 1.234S/cm 25.0C Slope
Ref Temp: 25.0C Neutral Salt
SN Slope
Filter: 2 sec Raw
Custom Setup 2.000 %/C
1.234S/cm 25.0C

1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C SN Ref Temp


SN Custom Curve SN Custom Config (25.0C normal)
Configure Units: ppm +25.0C
Enter Data Points # of Points: 2
Calculate Curve Ref Temp: 25.0 C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
slope: 2.00 %/C
SN Units
1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C %
SN Calculate Curve SN Data Points ppm
Curve fit in mg/L
Pt1: 1.000 ppm g/L
progress Pt1: 1.000 S/cm
Pt2: 1.000 ppm
Pt2: 1.000 S/cm
1.234S/cm 25.0C Pt3: 1.000 ppm
1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Calculate Curve Pt3: 1.000 S/cm
Pt4: 1.000 ppm SN PointM
Custom curve
fit completed. Pt4: 1.000 S/cm 1.000 ppm
In Process Cal Pt5: 1.000 ppm
recommended. Pt5: 1.000 S/cm
LIQ_MAN_1066
1066 Instruction Manual

Programming Measurements
LIQ_MAN_1066

1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Units
ppm
mg/L
ppb

Programming Measurements
g/L
1066 Instruction Manual

1.234S/cm 25.0C % Saturation


Partial Pressure
SN Type
% Oxygen In Gas
Water/Waste ppm Oxygen In Gas
Trace Oxygen
BioRx-Rosemount
BioRx-Other 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Brewing SN Partial Press
Oxygen In Gas
mm Hg
in Hg 1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C atm
Figure 8-4. Configure Oxygen Measurements

kPa SN Salinity
M Program 1.234S/cm 25.0C
A mbar 00.0
P
Outputs SN Configure bar
I r 1.234S/cm 25.0C
N o Alarms Type: Water/Waste 1.234S/cm 25.0C
g Measurement
Measurement Configure? Units: ppm
Temperature Partial Press: mmHg SN Input filter
M r Measurement
E Oxygen 05 sec
a
Security Salinity: 00.0
N m Filter: 5sec
U Reset Analyzer Pressure Units: bar
Frequency Resolution: 0.001
Use Press: At Air Cal 1.234S/cm 25.0C

Presssure Units
1.234S/cm 25.0C mm Hg
in Hg
SN Resolution
atm
0.001 kPa
0.01 mbar
bar

1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Use Pressure?
At Air Cal
mA Input
December 2014
Section 8: Programming Measurements

67
68
December 2014

1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Measurement
Free Chlorine 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Total Chlorine SN Units
Monochloramine ppm
mg/L
Section 8: Programming Measurements

1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Program
SN Input filter SN Free Cl
SN Configure
FIGURE 8-5. Configuring Chlorine Measurements

Outputs 05 sec pH Correction


1.234S/cm 25.0C Measure: Free Chlorine
Measurement
Measurement
Units: ppm Live/Continuous
Temperature Configure? Manual
Measurement

Program
Filter: 5sec
Security Chlorine

MAIN MENU
Dual Cal: Disable
Diagnostic Setup Free Cl Correct: Live
Reset Analyzer Manual pH: 7.00 pH
Frequency Resolution: 0.001
1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Manual pH
07.00 pH
1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Resolution
0.001
0.01
LIQ_MAN_1066
1066 Instruction Manual

Programming Measurements
LIQ_MAN_1066

Programming Measurements
1066 Instruction Manual

1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C SN Units

Program ppm
mg/L
FIGURE 8-5. Configuring Ozone Measurements

Outputs 1.234S/cm 25.0C ppb


1.234S/cm 25.0C g/L
Measurement
Measurement
Temperature SN Configure
Configure?
Measurement Units: ppm 1.234S/cm 25.0C

Program
Security Ozone

MAIN MENU
SN Input filter
Filter: 5sec
Reset Analyzer 05 sec
Resolution: 0.001
Frequency

1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Resolution
0.001
0.01
December 2014
Section 8: Programming Measurements

69
Section 8: Programming Measurements 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

This page left intentionally blank

70 Programming Measurements
1066 Instruction Manual Section 9: Calibration
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Section 9: Calibration
9.1 Introduction
Calibration is the process of adjusting or standardizing the transmitter to a lab test or a calibrated
laboratory instrument, or standardizing to some known reference (such as a commercial buffer).
The auto-recognition feature of the transmitter will enable the appropriate calibration screens to
allow calibration for any configuration of the transmitter. Completion of Quick Start upon first
power up enables live measurements but does not ensure accurate readings in the lab or in
process. Calibration should be performed with each attached sensor to ensure accurate, repeat-
able readings.
This section covers the following calibration functions:
1. Auto buffer cal for pH (pH Cal - Sec. 9.2)
2. Manual buffer cal for pH (pH Cal - Sec. 9.2)
3. Set calibration stabilization criteria for pH (pH Cal - Sec. 9.2)
4. Standardization calibration (1-point) for pH, ORP and Redox (pH Cal - Sec. 9.2 and 9.3)
5. SMART sensor auto calibration upload

9.2 Calibration
New sensors must be calibrated before use. Regular recalibration is also necessary. Use auto cali-
bration instead of manual calibration. Auto calibration avoids common pitfalls and reduces errors.
The transmitter recognizes the buffers and uses temperature-corrected pH values in the calibra-
tion. Once the 1066 successfully completes the calibration, it calculates and displays the calibra-
tion slope and offset. The slope is reported as the slope at 25C.

To calibrate the pH loop with a connected pH sensor, access the Calibration screen by pressing
ENTER from the main screen and press ENTER.

The following calibration routines are covered:


1. Auto Calibration - pH 2 point buffer calibration with auto buffer recognition
2. Manual Calibration - pH 2 point buffer calibration with manual buffer value entry
3. Standardization - pH 1 point buffer calibration with manual buffer value entry
4. Entering A Known Slope Value - pH Slope calibration with manual entry of known slope value
5. SMART sensor auto calibration auto detection and upload of cal data

To calibrate pH:
1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
3. Select pH. Press ENTER.

The following sub-sections show the initial display screen that 1.234S/cm 25.0C
appears for each calibration routine. Use the flow diagram for pH SN Calibrate?
pH
calibration at the end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts to com-
Temperature
plete calibration.
Calibration 71
Section 9: Calibration 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

9.2.1 Auto Calibration


1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN pH Cal
This screen appears after selecting pH calibration.
Buffer Cal
Standardize
Slope: 59.16mV/pH
Offset: 600 mV

Note that pH auto calibration criteria can be changed. The following criteria can be adjusted:
Stabilization time (default 10 sec.)
Stabilization pH value (default 0.02 pH)
Type of Buffer used for AUTO CALIBRATION (default is Standard, 1.234S/cm 25.0C
non-commercial buffers). SN Setup
Stable Time: 10 sec
The following commercial buffer tables are recognized by the analyzer: Stable Delta: 0.02 pH
Standard (NIST plus pH7) Buffer: Standard
DIN 19267
Ingold
Merck

This screen will appear if the auto cal is successful. The screen will 1.234S/cm 25.0C
return to the pH Buffer Cal Menu. SN pH Auto Cal
Slope: 59.16 mV/pH
Offset: 60 mV

The following screens may appear if the auto cal is unsuccessful.

1. A High Slope Error will generate this screen display: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN pH Auto Cal
High Slope Error
Calculated: 62.11 mV/pH
Max: 62.00 mV/pH
Press EXIT

2. A Low Slope Error will generate this screen display: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN pH Auto Cal
Low Slope Error
Calculated: 39.11mV/pH
Min: 40.00 mV/pH
Press EXIT

3. An Offset Error will generate this screen display: 1.234S/cm 25.0C


SN pH Auto Cal
Offset Error
Calculated: 61.22mV
Max: 60.00mV
Press EXIT

72 Calibration
1066 Instruction Manual Section 9: Calibration
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

9.2.2 Manual Calibration pH


New sensors must be calibrated before use. Regular recalibration is 1.234S/cm 25.0C
also necessary. Use manual calibration if non-standard buffers are SN pH Manual Cal
being used; otherwise, use auto calibration. Auto calibration avoids Buffer 1
common pitfalls and reduces errors. The adjacent appears after Buffer 2
selecting Manual pH calibration.

9.2.3 Entering a Known Slope Value pH


1.234S/cm 25.0C
If the electrode slope is known from other measurements, it can be SN pH Slope@25C
59.16 mV/pH
entered directly in the 1066 transmitter. The slope must be entered as
the slope at 25C.

9.2.4 Standardization pH
The pH measured by the 1066 transmitter can be hanged to match 1.234S/cm 25.0C
the reading from a second or referee instrument. The process of mak- SN Enter Value
ing the two readings agree is called standardization. During standard- 07.00pH
ization, the difference between the two pH values is converted to the
equivalent voltage. The voltage, called the reference offset, is added
to all subsequent measured cell voltages before they are converted to pH. If a standardized sensor
is placed in a buffer solution, the measured pH will differ from the buffer pH by an amount equiva-
lent to the standardization offset.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
This screen may appear if pH Cal is unsuccessful. An Offset Error will SN Standardize
generate this screen display: Offset Error
Calculated: 96mV
Max: 60mV
If the pH Cal is successful, the screen will return to the Cal sub-menu. Press EXIT

9.2.5 SMART sensor auto calibration upload pH


All calibration data including slope (mV/pH unit), offset (mV), glass impedance (MegOhms), and
reference impedance (kOhms) is automatically downloaded to the SMART sensor upon successful
calibration. This data transfer to the sensor is transparent and does not require any user action.
Calibrated SMART sensors will be loop-calibrated when wired or attached (via VP8 cable connec-
tion) to any SMART-enabled Rosemount Analytical instrument.
To calibrate any SMART sensor, choose any available calibration method. Note that new SMART
sensors upon first shipment from Emerson are pre-calibrated and do not require buffer calibra-
tion or standardization to be used in process immediately.

Calibration 73
Section 9: Calibration 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

9.3 ORP and Redox Calibration


For process control, it is often important to make the measured ORP or Redox agree with the ORP
or Redox of a standard solution. During calibration, the measured ORP or Redox is made equal to
the ORP or Redox of a standard solution at a single point.

To calibrate the ORP loop with a connected ORP sensor, access the Calibration screen by pressing
ENTER from the main screen and press ENTER.

The following calibration routine is covered:

1. Standardization ORP 1 point buffer calibration with manual buffer value entry.

To calibrate ORP:
1.234S/cm 25.0C
1. Press the MENU button. SN Calibrate?
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER. ORP
3. Select ORP and Redox. Press ENTER. Temperature

The following sub-sections show the initial display screen that appears for each calibration routine.
Use the flow diagram for ORP calibration at the end of Sec. 8 and the live screen prompts to
complete calibration.

9.3.1 Standardization ORP and Redox


For process control, it is often important to make the measured ORP
and Redox agree with the ORP and Redox of a standard solution. 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Enter Value
During calibration, the measured ORP and Redox is made equal to the
+0600 mV
ORP and Redox of a standard solution at a single point. This screen
appears after selecting ORP and Redox calibration:

If the ORP and Redox Cal is successful, the screen will return to the Cal sub-menu.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The following screen may appear if ORP and Redox Cal is unsuccessful. SN Standardize
Offset Error
Calculated: 61.22mV
Max: 60.00mV
Press EXIT

74 Calibration
1066 Instruction Manual Section 9: Calibration
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

9.4 Contacting Conductivity Calibration


New conductivity sensors rarely need calibration. The cell constant printed on the label is suffi-
ciently accurate for most applications.
CALIBRATING AN IN-SERVICE CONDUCTIVITY SENSOR
After a conductivity sensor has been in service for a period of time, recalibration may be necessary.
There are three ways to calibrate a sensor.
a. Use a standard instrument and sensor to measure the conductivity of the process stream. It is
not necessary to remove the sensor from the process piping. The temperature correction used
by the standard instrument may not exactly match the temperature correction used by the
1066. To avoid errors, turn off temperature correction in both the transmitter and the standard
instrument.
b. Place the sensor in a solution of known conductivity and make the transmitter reading match
the conductivity of the standard solution. Use this method if the sensor can be easily removed
from the process piping and a standard is available. Be careful using standard solutions having
conductivity less than 100 S/cm. Low conductivity standards are highly susceptible to atmos-
pheric contamination. Avoid calibrating sensors with 0.01/cm cell constants against conductiv-
ity standards having conductivity greater than 100 S/cm. The resistance of these solutions
may be too low for an accurate measurement. Calibrate sensors with 0.01/cm cell constant
using method c.
c. To calibrate a 0.01/cm sensor, check it against a standard instrument and 0.01/cm sensor while
both sensors are measuring water having a conductivity between 5 and 10 S/cm. To avoid drift
caused by absorption of atmospheric carbon dioxide, saturate the sample with air before mak-
ing the measurements. To ensure adequate flow past the sensor during calibration, take the
sample downstream from the sensor. For best results, use a flow-through standard cell. If the
process temperature is much different from ambient, keep connecting lines short and insulate
the flow cell.
To calibrate the conductivity loop with a connected contacting conductivity sensor, access the
Calibration screen by pressing ENTER from the main screen and press ENTER.
The following calibration routines are covered:
1. Zero Cal Zero the transmitter with the sensor attached
2. In Process Cal Standardize the sensor to a known conductivity
3. Cell K: 1.00000/cm Enter the cell Constant for the sensor
4. Meter Cal Calibrate the transmitter to a lab conductivity instrument
5. Cal Factor: 0.95000/cm Enter the Cal Factor for 4-Electrode sensors from the sensor tag

To calibrate contacting conductivity:


1.234S/cm 25.0C
1. Press the MENU button SN Calibrate?
Conductivity
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER. Temperature
3. Select Conductivity. Press ENTER.
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate Conductivity or Temperature, scroll to the desired
item and press ENTER.

Calibration 75
Section 9: Calibration 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

The following sub-sections show the initial display screen that appears for 1.234S/cm 25.0C
each calibration routine. Use the flow diagram for Conductivity calibra- SN Calibration
tion at the end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts for each routine to Zero Cal
complete calibration. In Process Cal
Meter Cal
The adjacent screen appears after selecting Conductivity calibration: Cell K: 1.00000/cm

9.4.1 Entering the Cell Constant


New conductivity sensors rarely need calibration. The cell constant print-
1.234S/cm 25.0C
ed on the label is sufficiently accurate for most applications. The cell con- SN Cell Constant
stant should be entered: 1.00000 /cm
When the unit is installed for the first time
When the probe is replaced
The display screen for entering a cell Constant for the sensor is shown. The default value is dis-
played in bold type.

9.4.2 Zeroing the Instrument 1.234S/cm 25.0C


This procedure is used to compensate for small offsets to the conductivi- SN Zero Cal
ty signal that are present even when there is no conductivity to be meas- In Air
ured. This procedure is affected by the length of extension cable and In Water
should always be repeated if any changes in extension cable or sensor
have been made. Electrically connect the conductivity probe as it will 1.234S/cm 25.0C
actually be used and place the measuring portion of the probe in air. Be SN Zero Cal
sure the probe is dry. Sensor Zero Done

The adjacent screen will appear after selecting Zero Cal from the
Conductivity Calibration screen:
1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen will appear if zero Cal is successful. The screen will SN Zero Cal
Sensor Zero Fail
return to the conductivity Cal Menu.
Offset too high
The adjacent screen may appear if zero Cal is unsuccessful.
Press EXIT

9.4.3 Calibrating the Sensor in a Conductivity Standard


(in process cal)
This procedure is used to calibrate the sensor and transmitter against a solution of known con-
ductivity. This is done by submerging the probe in the sample of known conductivity, then adjust-
ing the displayed value, if necessary, to correspond to the conductivity value of the sample. Turn
temperature correction off and use the conductivity of the standard. Use a calibrated thermome-
ter to measure temperature. The probe must be cleaned before performing this procedure.
The adjacent screen will appear after selecting In Process Cal from the
Conductivity Calibration screen: 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
The adjacent screen will appear if In Process Cal is successful. The screen Wait for stable
will return to the conductivity Cal Menu. reading.

The adjacent screen may appear if In Process Cal is unsuccessful. The


screen will return to the conductivity Cal Menu.

76 Calibration
1066 Instruction Manual Section 9: Calibration
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

The adjacent screen will appear if In Process Cal is successful. The screen 1.234S/cm 25.0C
will return to the conductivity Cal Menu. SN InProcess Cal
Updated cell
constant:
1.00135/cm

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen may appear if In Process Cal is unsuccessful. The SN InProcess Cal
Calibration
screen will return to the conductivity Cal Menu.
Error

Press EXIT

9.4.4 Calibrating the Sensor To A Laboratory Instrument


(meter cal)
This procedure is used to check and correct the conductivity reading of the 1066 using a labora-
tory conductivity instrument. This is done by submerging the conductivity probe in a bath and
measuring the conductivity of a grab sample of the same bath water with a separate laboratory
instrument. The 1066 reading is then adjusted to match the conductivity reading of the lab instru-
ment.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Meter Cal
The adjacent screen will appear after selecting Meter Cal from the Use precision
Conductivity Calibration screen: resistors only
After pressing ENTER, the display shows the live value measured by the
sensor 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Enter Value
xx.xx k

If the meter cal is successful the screen will return to the conductivity Cal
Menu. 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Meter Cal
Calibration
The adjacent screen will appear if Meter Cal is unsuccessful. The screen will Error
return to the conductivity Cal Menu.
Press EXIT

9.4.5 Cal Factor


Upon initial installation and power up, if 4-electrode was selected for the 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Cal Factor
sensor type in the Quick Start menus, the user enters a Cell Constant and 0.95000 /cm
a Cal Factor using the instrument keypad. The cell constant is needed to
convert measured conductance to conductivity as displayed on the trans-
mitter screen. The Cal Factor entry is needed increase the accuracy of the live conductivity read-
ings, especially at low conductivity readings below 20uS/cm. Both the Cell Constant and the Cal
Factor are printed on the tag attached to the 4-electrode sensor/cable.

Calibration 77
Section 9: Calibration 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

9.5 Toroidal Conductivity Calibration


Calibration is the process of adjusting or standardizing the transmitter to a lab test or a calibrated
laboratory instrument, or standardizing to some known reference (such as a conductivity stan-
dard). This section contains procedures for the first time use and for routine calibration of the
1066 transmitter.
To calibrate the conductivity loop with a connected contacting conductivity sensor, access the
Calibration screen by pressing ENTER from the main screen and press ENTER.
The following calibration routines are covered:
1. Zero Cal Zero the transmitter with the sensor attached
2. In Process Cal Standardize the sensor to a known conductivity
3. Cell K: 1.00000/cm Enter the cell Constant for the sensor
4. Meter Cal Calibrate the transmitter to a lab conductivity instrument
To calibrate toroidal conductivity:
1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
3. Select Conductivity. Press ENTER.
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate Toroidal Conductivity or Temperature, scroll to the
desired item and press ENTER
The following sub-sections show the initial display screen that appears for each calibration routine.
Use the flow diagram for Conductivity calibration at the end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts
to complete calibration.
1.234S/cm 25.0C
Calibration
The adjacent screen appears after selecting Conductivity calibration: Zero Cal
In Process Cal
Cell K: 2.7000/cm

9.5.1 Entering the Cell Constant


New toroidal sensors always need to be calibrated. The cell constant provided on the sensor label
is a nominal value and does not need to be entered.
This procedure sets up the transmitter for the probe type connected to the transmitter. Each type
of probe has a specific cell constant
The display screen for entering a cell constant for the sensor is shown. 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Cell Constant
The default value is displayed in bold type.
2.7000/cm

78 Calibration
1066 Instruction Manual Section 9: Calibration
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

9.5.2 Zeroing the Instrument


This procedure is used to compensate for small offsets to the conductivity signal that are present
even when there is no conductivity to be measured. This procedure is affected by the length of
extension cable and should always be repeated if any changes in extension cable or sensor have
been made. Electrically connect the conductivity probe as it will actually be used and place the
measuring portion of the probe in air.
1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Zero Cal
In Air
The adjacent screen will appear after selecting Zero Cal from the In Water
Conductivity Calibration screen:
1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Zero Cal
The adjacent screen will appear if zero Cal is successful. The screen will Sensor Zero Done
return to the conductivity Cal Menu.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen may appear if zero Cal is unsuccessful. SN Zero Cal
Sensor Zero Fail
Offset too high

Press EXIT

9.5.3 Calibrating the Sensor in a Conductivity Standard


(in process cal)
This procedure is used to check and correct the conductivity reading of the 1066 to ensure that
the reading is accurate. This is done by submerging the probe in the sample of known conductivi-
ty, then adjusting the displayed value, if necessary, to correspond to the conductivity value of the
sample. The probe must be cleaned before performing this procedure. The temperature reading
must also be checked and standardized if necessary, prior to performing this procedure.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen will appear after selecting In Process Cal from the SN InProcess Cal
Wait for stable
Conductivity Calibration screen:
reading.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The following screen will appear if In Process Cal is successful. The screen SN InProcess Cal
will return to the conductivity Cal Menu. Updated cell
constant:
3.01350/cm

1.234S/cm 25.0C
This screen may appear if In Process Cal is unsuccessful. The screen will SN InProcess Cal
return to the conductivity Cal Menu. Calibration
Error

Press EXIT

Calibration 79
Section 9: Calibration 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

9.6 Calibration Chlorine


The 1066 can measure three variants of Chlorine:
Free Chlorine
Total Chlorine
Monochloramine
The section describes how to calibrate any compatible amperometric chlorine sensor. The follow-
ing calibration routines are covered in the family of supported Chlorine sensors:
Air Cal
Zero Cal
In Process Cal

9.6.1 Calibration Free Chlorine


A free chlorine sensor generates a current directly proportional to the concentration of free chlo-
rine in the sample. Calibrating the sensor requires exposing it to a solution containing no chlorine
(zero standard) and to a solution containing a known amount of chlorine (full-scale standard). The
zero calibration is necessary because chlorine sensors, even when no chlorine is in the sample,
generate a small current called the residual current. The transmitter compensates for the residual
current by subtracting it from the measured current before converting the result to a chlorine
value. New sensors require zeroing before being placed in service, and sensors should be zeroed
whenever the electrolyte solution is replaced.
To calibrate the chlorine sensor, access the Calibration screen by pressing ENTER from the main
screen and press ENTER.
The following calibration routines are covered:
1. Zero Cal Zeroing the sensor in solution with zero free chlorine
2. Grab Cal Standardizing to a sample of known free chlorine concentration

To calibrate free chlorine:


1. Press the MENU button
1.234S/cm 25.0C
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER. SN Calibrate?
3. Select Free Chlorine. Press ENTER. Free Chlorine
Temperature
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate Free Chlorine or Temperature,
scroll to the desired item and press ENTER.
The following sub-sections show the initial display screen that appears for each calibration routine.
Use the flow diagram for Chlorine calibration at the end of Sec. 7 and the live screen prompts to
complete calibration.
1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen appears after selecting Free Chlorine calibration: SN Calibration
Zero Cal
In Process Cal

80 Calibration
1066 Instruction Manual Section 9: Calibration
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

9.6.1.1 Zeroing the Sensor 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The adjacent screen will appear during Zero Cal. Be sure sensor has been SN Zero Cal
running in zero solution for at least two hours before starting zero step. Zeroing
Wait

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen will appear if In Zero Cal is successful. The screen will SN Zero Cal
return to the Amperometric Cal Menu. Sensor zero done

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is unsuccessful. The screen SN Zero Cal
will return to the Amperometric Cal Menu. Sensor zero failed

Press EXIT

9.6.1.2 In Process Calibration 1.234S/cm 25.0C


The adjacent screen will appear prior to In Process Cal SN InProcess Cal
Wait for stable
reading.

If the In Process Cal is successful, the screen will return to the Cal sub-menu.
The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is unsuccessful. The screen 1.234S/cm 25.0C
will return to the Amperometric Cal Menu. SN InProcess Cal
Calibration
Error

Press EXIT

9.6.2 Calibration Total Chlorine


Total chlorine is the sum of free and combined chlorine. The continuous determination of total
chlorine requires two steps. First, the sample flows into a conditioning system (TCL) where a pump
continuously adds acetic acid and potassium iodide to the sample. The acid lowers the pH, which
allows total chlorine in the sample to quantitatively oxidize the iodide in the reagent to iodine. In
the second step, the treated sample flows to the sensor. The sensor is a membrane-covered
amperometric sensor, whose output is proportional to the concentration of iodine. Because the
concentration of iodine is proportional to the concentration of total chlorine, the transmitter can
be calibrated to read total chlorine. Because the sensor really measures iodine, calibrating the sen-
sor requires exposing it to a solution containing no iodine (zero standard) and to a solution con-
taining a known amount of iodine (full-scale standard). The Zero calibration is necessary because
the sensor, even when no iodine is present, generates a small current called the residual current.
The transmitter compensates for the residual current by subtracting it from the measured current
before converting the result to a total chlorine value. New sensors require zeroing before being
placed in service, and sensors should be zeroed whenever the electrolyte solution is replaced. The
best zero standard is deionized water. The purpose of the In Process Calibration is to establish the

Calibration 81
Section 9: Calibration 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

slope of the calibration curve. Because stable total chlorine standards do not exist, the sensor
must be calibrated against a test run on a grab sample of the process liquid. Several manufactur-
ers offer portable test kits for this purpose.
To calibrate the chlorine sensor, access the Calibration screen by pressing ENTER from the main
screen, and press ENTER.
The following calibration routines are covered:
1. Zero Cal Zeroing the sensor in solution with zero total chlorine
2. Grab Cal Standardizing to a sample of known total chlorine concentration
To calibrate total chlorine:
1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
1.234S/cm 25.0C
3. Select Total Chlorine. Press ENTER. SN Calibrate?
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate Total Chlorine or Total Chlorine
Temperature
Temperature, scroll to the desired item and press ENTER

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each cali-
bration routine. Use the flow diagram for Chlorine calibration at the end 1.234S/cm 25.0C
of Sec. 9 and the live screen prompts to complete calibration. SN Calibration
Zero Cal
This adjacent screen appears after selecting Total Chlorine calibration: In Process Cal

1.234S/cm 25.0C
9.6.2.1 Zeroing the Sensor SN Zero Cal
The adjacent screen will appear during Zero Cal. Be sure sensor has been Zeroing
running in zero solution for at least two hours before starting zero step. Wait

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen will appear if In Zero Cal is successful. The screen will SN Zero Cal
Sensor zero done
return to the Amperometric Cal Menu.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is unsuccessful. The screen SN Zero Cal
will return to the Amperometric Cal Menu. Sensor zero failed

Press EXIT

1.234S/cm 25.0C
9.6.2.2 In Process Calibration SN InProcess Cal
The adjacent screen will appear prior to In Process Cal Wait for stable
reading.
If the In Process Cal is successful, the screen will return to the Cal sub-
menu. 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
The adjacent screen may appear if In Process Cal is unsuccessful. The Calibration error
screen will return to the Amperometric Cal Menu.
Press EXIT

82 Calibration
1066 Instruction Manual Section 9: Calibration
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

9.6.3 Calibration Monochloromine


A monochloramine sensor generates a current directly proportional to the concentration of
monochloramine in the sample. Calibrating the sensor requires exposing it to a solution contain-
ing no monochloramine (zero standard) and to a solution containing a known amount of mono-
chloramine (full-scale standard). The Zero calibration is necessary because monochloramine sen-
sors, even when no monochloramine is in the sample, generate a small current called the residual
or zero current. The transmitter compensates for the residual current by subtracting it from the
measured current before converting the result to a monochloramine value. New sensors require
zeroing before being placed in service, and sensors should be zeroed whenever the electrolyte
solution is replaced. The best zero standard is deionized water. The purpose of the In Process cali-
bration is to establish the slope of the calibration curve. Because stable monochloramine stan-
dards do not exist, the sensor must be calibrated against a test run on a grab sample of the process
liquid. Several manufacturers offer portable test kits for this purpose.
To calibrate the chlorine sensor, access the Calibration screen by pressing ENTER from the main
screen, and press ENTER.
The following calibration routines are covered:
1. Zero Cal Zeroing the sensor in solution with zero total chlorine
2. Grab Cal Standardizing to a sample of known monochloramine concentration
To calibrate monochloramine:
1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
3. Select Monochloramine. Press ENTER.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate Monochloramine or SN Calibrate?
Temperature, scroll to the desired item and press ENTER. Monochloramine
Temperature

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each cali-
bration routine. Use the flow diagram for Chlorine calibration at the end of Sec. 9 and the live
screen prompts to complete calibration.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Calibration
The adjacent screen appears after selecting Monochloramine calibration:
Zero Cal
In Process Cal

Calibration 83
Section 9: Calibration 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

9.6.4 Zeroing the Sensor 1.234S/cm


SN Zero Cal
25.0C

The adjacent screen will appear during Zero Cal. Be sure sensor has been Zeroing
running in zero solution for at least two hours before starting zero step. Wait

1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Zero Cal
The adjacent screen will appear if In Zero Cal is successful. The screen will
Sensor zero done
return to the Amperometric Cal Menu.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is unsuccessful. The screen SN Zero Cal
will return to the Amperometric Cal Menu. Sensor zero failed

Press EXIT

9.6.5 In Process Calibration


The adjacent screen will appear prior to In Process Cal 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal
If the In Process Cal is successful, the screen will return to the Cal sub- Wait for stable
menu. reading.

1.234S/cm 25.0C

The adjacent screen may appear if In Process Cal is unsuccessful. The SN InProcess Cal
Calibration
screen will return to the Amperometric Cal Menu. Error

Press EXIT

9.7 Calibration Oxygen


Oxygen sensors generate a current directly proportional to the concentration of dissolved oxygen
in the sample. Calibrating the sensor requires exposing it to a solution containing no oxygen (zero
standard) and to a solution containing a known amount of oxygen (full-scale standard). The Zero
Calibration is necessary because oxygen sensors, even when no oxygen is present in the sample,
generate a small current called the residual current. The transmitter compensates for the residual
current by subtracting it from the measured current before converting the result to a dissolved
oxygen value. New sensors require zeroing before being placed in service, and sensors should be
zeroed whenever the electrolyte solution is replaced. The recommended zero standard is 5% sodi-
um sulfite in water, although oxygen-free nitrogen can also be used. The 499A TrDO sensor, used
for the determination of trace (ppb) oxygen levels, has very low residual current and does not nor-
mally require zeroing. The residual current in the 499A TrDO sensor is equivalent to less than 0.5
ppb oxygen. The purpose of the In Process Calibration is to establish the slope of the calibration
curve. Because the solubility of atmospheric oxygen in water as a function of temperature and
barometric pressure is well known, the natural choice for a full-scale standard is air-saturated
water. However, air-saturated water is difficult to prepare and use, so the universal practice is to
use air for calibration. From the point of view of the oxygen sensor, air and air-saturated water are

84 Calibration
1066 Instruction Manual Section 9: Calibration
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

identical. The equivalence comes about because the sensor really measures the chemical poten-
tial of oxygen. Chemical potential is the force that causes oxygen molecules to diffuse from the
sample into the sensor where they can be measured. It is also the force that causes oxygen mole-
cules in air to dissolve in water and to continue to dissolve until the water is saturated with oxygen.
Once the water is saturated, the chemical potential of oxygen in the two phases (air and water) is
the same. Oxygen sensors generate a current directly proportional to the rate at which oxygen
molecules diffuse through a membrane stretched over the end of the sensor. The diffusion rate
depends on the difference in chemical potential between oxygen in the sensor and oxygen in the
sample. An electrochemical reaction, which destroys any oxygen molecules entering the sensor,
keeps the concentration (and the chemical potential) of oxygen inside the sensor equal to zero.
Therefore, the chemical potential of oxygen in the sample alone determines the diffusion rate and
the sensor current. When the sensor is calibrated, the chemical potential of oxygen in the stan-
dard determines the sensor current. Whether the sensor is calibrated in air or air-saturated water
is immaterial. The chemical potential of oxygen is the same in either phase. Normally, to make the
calculation of solubility in common units (like ppm DO) simpler, it is convenient to use water-sat-
urated air for calibration. Automatic air calibration is standard. The user simply exposes the sen-
sor to water-saturated air. The transmitter monitors the sensor current. When the current is sta-
ble, the transmitter stores the current and measures the temperature using a temperature ele-
ment inside the oxygen sensor. The user must enter the barometric pressure. From the tempera-
ture the transmitter calculates the saturation vapor pressure of water. Next, it calculates the pres-
sure of dry air by subtracting the vapor pressure from the barometric pressure. Using the fact
that dry air always contains 20.95% oxygen, the transmitter calculates the partial pressure of oxy-
gen. Once the transmitter knows the partial pressure of oxygen, it uses the Bunsen coefficient to
calculate the equilibrium solubility of atmospheric oxygen in water at the prevailing temperature.
At 25C and 760 mm Hg, the equilibrium solubility is 8.24 ppm. Often it is too difficult or messy
to remove the sensor from the process liquid for calibration. In this case, the sensor can be cali-
brated against a measurement made with a portable laboratory instrument. The laboratory
instrument typically uses a membrane-covered amperometric sensor that has been calibrated
against water-saturated air.

To calibrate the oxygen sensor, access the Calibration screen by pressing ENTER from the main
screen, select and press ENTER.
The following calibration routines are covered:
1. Zero Cal Zeroing the sensor in a medium with zero oxygen
2. Air Cal Calibrating the sensor in a water-saturated air sample
3. In Process Cal Standardizing to a sample of known oxygen concentration
4. Sen@ 25C:2500nA/ppm Entering a known slope value for sensor response
To calibrate oxygen:
1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
3. Select Oxygen. Press ENTER.
1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Calibrate?
Oxygen
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate Oxygen or Temperature,
Temperature
scroll to the desired item and press ENTER

Calibration 85
Section 9: Calibration 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each cali-
bration routine. Use the flow diagram for Oxygen calibration at the end of Sec. 9 and the live
screen prompts for each routine to complete calibration.
1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Calibration
Air Cal
The adjacent screen appears after selecting Oxygen calibration: Zero Cal
In Process Cal
Sen@ 25C:2500nA/ppm
Air calibration criteria can be changed. Zero Current: 1234nA
The following criteria can be adjusted:
Stabilization time (default 10 sec.)
Stabilization pH value (default 0.05 ppm)
Salinity of the solution to be measured (default 00.0 parts per thousand)

1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Setup
The adjacent screen will appear to allow adjustment of these criteria: Stable Time: 10 sec
Stable Delta: 0.05 ppm
Salinity: 00.0

1.234 nA
SN Zero Cal
9.7.1 Zeroing the Sensor Zeroing
The adjacent screen will appear during Zero Cal Wait

1.234 nA
SN Zero Cal
The adjacent screen will appear if In Zero Cal is successful. The screen will
Sensor zero done
return to the Amperometric Cal Menu.

1.234 nA
The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is unsuccessful. The screen SN Zero Cal
will return to the Amperometric Cal Menu. Sensor zero failed

Press EXIT

1.234S/cm 25.0C
9.7.2 Calibrating the Sensor in Air SN Air Cal
Start Calibration
The adjacent screen will appear prior to Air Cal
Setup

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen will appear if In Air Cal is successful. The screen will SN Air Cal
return to the Amperometric Cal Menu. Done

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen may appear if In Air Cal is unsuccessful. The screen SN Air Cal
will return to the Amperometric Cal Menu. Failure
Check Sensor

Press EXIT

86 Calibration
1066 Instruction Manual Section 9: Calibration
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

9.7.3 Calibrating the Sensor Against A Standard Instrument


(in process cal)
The adjacent screen will appear prior to In Process Cal
If the In Process Cal is successful, the screen will return to the Cal sub-menu.
The adjacent screen may appear if In Zero Cal is unsuccessful. The screen will return to the
Amperometric Cal Menu.

9.8 Calibration Ozone


An ozone sensor generates a current directly proportional to the concentration of ozone in the
sample. Calibrating the sensor requires exposing it to a solution containing no ozone (zero stan-
dard) and to a solution containing a known amount of ozone (full-scale standard). The Zero
Calibration is necessary because ozone sensors, even when no ozone is in the sample, generate a
small current called the residual or zero current. The transmitter compensates for the residual cur-
rent by subtracting it from the measured current before converting the result to an ozone value.
New sensors require zeroing before being placed in service, and sensors should be zeroed when-
ever the electrolyte solution is replaced. The best zero standard is deionized water. The purpose of
the In Process Calibration is to establish the slope of the calibration curve. Because stable ozone
standards do not exist, the sensor must be calibrated against a test run on a grab sample of the
process liquid. Several manufacturers offer portable test kits for this purpose.
To calibrate the ozone sensor, access the Calibration screen by pressing ENTER from the main
screen, select and press ENTER.
The following calibration routines are covered:
1. Zero Cal Zeroing the sensor in solution with zero total chlorine
2. Grab Cal Standardizing to a sample of known ozone concentration
To calibrate ozone:
1. Press the MENU button
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER.
3. Select Ozone. Press ENTER. 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Calibrate?
The adjacent screen will appear. To calibrate Ozone or Temperature, scroll Ozone
to the desired item and press ENTER. Temperature

Calibration 87
Section 9: Calibration 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

The following sub-sections provide you with the initial display screen that appears for each cali-
bration routine. Use the flow diagram for Ozone calibration at the end of Sec. 9 and the live
screen prompts to complete calibration.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
The adjacent screen appears after selecting Ozone calibration: SN Calibration
Zero Cal
In Process Cal

9.8.1 Zeroing the Sensor 1.234 nA


SN Zero Cal
The following screen will appear during Zero Cal
Zeroing
Wait

1.234 nA
The following screen will appear if In Zero Cal is successful. The screen will SN Zero Cal
return to the Amperometric Cal Menu. Sensor zero done

The following screen may appear if In Zero Cal is unsuccessful. The screen 1.234 nA
SN Zero Cal
will return to the Amperometric Cal Menu.
Sensor zero failed

Press EXIT

1.234S/cm 25.0C

9.8.2 In Process Calibration SN InProcess Cal


Wait for stable
The following screen will appear after selecting In Process Cal reading.

1.234S/cm 25.0C
If the In Process Cal is successful, the screen will return to the Cal sub- SN InProcess Cal
menu. The following screen may appear if In Zero Cal is unsuccessful. The Calibration
Error
screen will return to the Amperometric Cal Menu.
Press EXIT

88 Calibration
1066 Instruction Manual Section 9: Calibration
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

9.9 Calibrating Temperature


Most liquid analytical measurements require temperature compensation (except ORP and Redox).
The 1066 performs temperature compensation automatically by applying internal temperature
correction algorithms. Temperature correction can also be turned off. If temperature correction is
off, the 1066 uses the manual temperature entered by the user in all temperature correction cal-
culations.

To calibrate temperature, access the Calibration screen by pressing ENTER from the main screen,
select Temperature and press ENTER.

The following calibration routine is covered:

1. Temperature with manual temperature entry

To calibrate temperature:
1. Press the MENU button 1.234S/cm 25.0C
2. Select Calibrate. Press ENTER. SN Calibrate
3. Select Temperature. Press ENTER. +025.0C

The adjacent screen will appear.

The following sub-section provides you with the initial display screen that appears for temperature
calibration. Use the flow diagram for Temp calibration at the end of Sec. 7 to complete calibration.

9.9.1 Calibration
The adjacent screen will appear during Temperature Cal. 1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Calibrate
If the sensor Temperature offset is greater than 5 C from the default Cal in progress.
value, the following screen will appear: Please wait.

You may continue by selecting Yes or suspend this operation by 1.234S/cm 25.0C
selecting No. SN Temp Offset > 5C
Continue?
No
If the Temp Cal is successful, the screen will return to the Cal Menu. Yes

Note: To select automatic or manual temp compensation or to program temperature units as C


or F, refer to Sec. 7.3 Programming Temperature in this manual.

Calibration 89
90
M C
A a 1.234S/cm 25.0C
December 2014

I l 1.234S/cm 25.0C SN Calibrate?


N i Free Chlorine TDS
b Calibrate? Total Chlorine Salinity
M r Chloramine NaOH
Ozone
Section 9: Calibration

E a HCl
Oxygen Low H2SO4 1.234S/cm 25.0C
N t 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C
FIGURE 9-1. Calibrate pH

pH High H2SO4
U e ORP SN Buffer SN pH Auto Cal SN pH Auto Buffer 1
NaCl
Redox Resistivity Standard Place Sensor in Wait
Conductivity Custom Concn DIN 19267 Buffer 1
Temperature Ingold Press ENTER
1.234S/cm 25.0C
Merck
SN pH Auto Buffer 1
07.01pH

1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C


1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN pH Cal SN pH Auto Cal SN Setup SN pH Auto Cal
SN pH Buffer Cal
Buffer Cal Start AutoCal Stable Time: 10 sec Place Sensor in
Auto Setup Stable Delta: 0.02 pH Buffer 1
Standardize
Manual Buffer: Standard Press ENTER
Slope: 59.16mV/pH
Offset: 600 mV
1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN pH Manual Cal Manual BufferM SN Manual Cal SN pH Manual Cal
SN pH Auto Buffer 2
Buffer 1 07.00pH Cal in progress. Slope: 59.16mV/pH
Wait
Buffer 2 Please wait. Offset: 60 mV

1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C SN pH Auto Buffer 2
SN Enter Value
SN Standardize SN Standardize 10.01pH
07.00pH
Cal in progress. Offset Error
Please wait. Calculated: 96mV
1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C Max: 60mV
Changing offset Press EXIT SN pH Auto Cal
1.234S/cm 25.0C
overrides Cal in progress.
buffer Cal SN pH Slope@25C Please wait.
59.16 mV/pH

1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C


1.234S/cm 25.0C
Changing slope SN pH Auto Cal
overrides SN pH Offset
Slope: 59.16 mV/pH
buffer Cal
060 mV Offset: 60 mV
LIQ_MAN_1066
1066 Instruction Manual

Calibration
Calibration
1.234S/cm 25.0C
LIQ_MAN_1066

1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C


1.234S/cm 25.0C
M C SN Calibrate?
SN Calibration SN Zero Cal SN Zero Cal
A a
Free Chlorine TDS In Air Sensor must be
I l 1.234S/cm 25.0C Zero Cal
pH Independ. Free Cl Salinity In Water dry and in air
N i In Process Cal
Total Chlorine NaOH Meter Cal
b Calibrate? Chloramine HCl Cell K: 1.00000/cm
1.234S/cm 25.0C
1066 Instruction Manual

M r Ozone Low H2SO4


1.234S/cm 25.0C
E a Oxygen High H2SO4 SN Zero Cal
pH NaCl SN Zero Cal
N t Zeroing
U e ORP Resistivity
Resistivity Sensor must be Wait
Redox Custom Concn
CustomConcn In 0% solution

Conductivity Temperature 1.234S/cm 25.0C


1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Zero Cal SN Zero Cal
Zeroing
Sensor Zero Done
Wait

1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN InProcess Cal
Wait for stable
Figure 9-2. Calibrate Contacting and Toroidal Conductivity

reading.

1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN InProcess Cal SN InProcess Cal


Take sample; Press ENTER if
Press ENTER. reading is stable.

1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Enter Value SN InProcess Cal SN InProcess Cal


10.00 uS/cm Cal in progress. Updated cell
Please wait. constant:
1.00135/cm

1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Meter Cal SN Enter Value SN Meter Cal


Use precision xx.xx k Cal in progress.
resistors only Please wait.
December 2014
Section 9: Calibration

91
92
December 2014
Section 9: Calibration

1.234S/cm 25.0C
M C SN Calibrate? 1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
A a 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Free TDS SN Zero Cal
I l 1.234S/cm 25.0C Free Chlorine
Chlorine SN Zero Cal
pH Independ. Free Cl Salinity SN Calibration Zeroing
N i Total Chlorine Sensor zero done
Total Chlorine NaOH Zero Cal Wait
b Calibrate? Chloramine
Chloramine HCl In Process Cal
M r Ozone Low H2SO4
E a Oxygen High H2SO4
N t pH NaCl
U e ORP Resistivity 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Redox Custom Concn
SN InProcess Cal SN InProcess Cal SN InProcess Cal
Conductivity Temperature Wait for stable Press ENTER if Take sample;
reading reading is stable. Press ENTER.

1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Enter Value
10.00 ppm
Figure 9-3. Calibrate Free Chlorine, Total Chlorine, and Monochloramine

1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN InProcess Cal
Cal in progress.
Please wait.
LIQ_MAN_1066
1066 Instruction Manual

Calibration
1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C

Calibration
M C SN Calibrate?
SN Air Cal 1.234S/cm 25.0C
A a SN Calibration
LIQ_MAN_1066

TDS Start Calibration SN Air Pressure


I l 1.234S/cm 25.0C Air Cal
Free Chlorine Salinity Setup
N i Zero Cal 760 mm Hg
Total Chlorine NaOH In Process Cal
b Calibrate? Chloramine HCl Sen@ 25C:2500nA/ppm
M r Ozone Low H2SO4 1.234S/cm 25.0C
E a Oxygen High H2SO4 Zero Current: 1234nA
Air Cal
N t pH NaCl
1066 Instruction Manual

ORP Wait
U e Resistivity
Redox CustomConcn
Figure 9-4. Calibrate Oxygen

Conductivity Temperature 1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Air Cal
Done

1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN Setup
Stable Time: 10 sec SN Stable Time
Stable Delta: 0.05 ppm 10 sec
Salinity: 00.0

1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Stable Delta
0.05 ppm

1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Zero Cal SN Zero Cal SN Salinity


Zeroing Sensor zero done 00.0
Wait

1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
SN InProcess Cal SN InProcess Cal SN InProcess Cal
SN InProcess Cal
SN Enter Value Cal in progress.
Wait for stable Press ENTER if Take sample;
reading reading is stable. Press ENTER. 10.00 ppm Please wait.
December 2014
Section 9: Calibration

93
94
December 2014
Section 9: Calibration

1.234S/cm 25.0C
Figure 9-5. Calibrate Ozone

M C SN Calibrate?
A a
TDS
I l 1.234S/cm 25.0C Free Chlorine Salinity 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C
N i 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Total Chlorine NaOH
b SN Zero Cal SN Zero Cal
Calibrate? Chloramine HCl SN Calibration
M r Ozone Low H2SO4 Zeroing Sensor zero done
Zero Cal
Oxygen Wait
E a High H2SO4 In Process Cal
N t pH NaCl
U e ORP Resistivity
Redox Custom Concn
1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Conductivity Temperature
SN InProcess Cal SN InProcess Cal SN InProcess Cal
Wait for stable Press ENTER if Take sample;
reading reading is stable. Press ENTER.

1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Enter Value
10.00 ppm

1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN InProcess Cal
Cal in progress.
Please wait.
LIQ_MAN_1066
1066 Instruction Manual

Calibration
Calibration
LIQ_MAN_1066
1066 Instruction Manual

FIGURE 9-6. Calibrate ORP

1.234S/cm 25.0C

M C SN Calibrate?
A a Free Chlorine TDS
I l 1.234S/cm 25.0C Salinity
N i Total Chlorine NaOH
b Calibrate? Chloramine HCl
M r Ozone Low H2SO4 1.234S/cm 25.0C
1.234S/cm 25.0C
E a Oxygen High H2SO4 SN Standardize
pH SN Enter Value
N t NaCl
ORP Resistivity Cal in progress.
U e +0600 mV
Redox Please wait.
CustomConcn

1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN ISE Cal 1.234S/cm 25.0C


Conductivity Temperature 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C
Standardize
SN 2-Point Cal SN Standard M SN Standard M
2-Pt Calibration
Slope: 0mV/decade Standard 1 Stabilizing
Standard 2
0000ppm
Offset: 0 mV Wait
Setup

1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Setup SN Stable Time SN Stable Delta


Stable Time: 10sec 010 sec 0001 mV
Stable Delta: 1 mV
December 2014
Section 9: Calibration

95
96
December 2014
Section 9: Calibration

M C 1.234S/cm 25.0C
FIGURE 9-7. Calibrate Temperature

A a SN Calibrate?
I l 1.234S/cm 25.0C
N i Free Chlorine TDS
b Calibrate? Total Chlorine Salinity
M r Chloramine NaOH
E a Ozone HCl
N t Oxygen Low H2SO4
pH High H2SO4
U e
ORP NaCl
Redox Resistivity
Conductivity Custom Concn 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C 1.234S/cm 25.0C

SN Calibrate SN Calibrate
Temperature
Temperature SN Temp Offset > 5C
+025.0C Cal in progress. Continue?
Please wait. No
Yes
LIQ_MAN_1066
1066 Instruction Manual

Calibration
1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Section 10: HART Communications

10.1 Introduction
The 1066 transmitter can communicate with a HART host using HART Revision 5 or HART Revision
7. The revision of HART used by the 1066 can be selected using the keypad/display or a HART mas-
ter such as AMS or the 475 Handheld Communicator. The default version of HART is Revision 5.
Since some HART hosts cannot accommodate HART 7, the choice of HART Revision should be
based on the capabilities of the host, and should be chosen as a first step in configuration. If HART
Revision 7 can be used with the host, it does offer a number of advantages over Revision 5, includ-
ing long tag name, time stamped data, and measurement status, and enhanced burst mode.
When HART 5 is chosen, the Device Revision of the 1066 is Device Revision 1; when HART 7 is chosen
the Device Revision is Revision 2 (or greater). The Device Revision of the DD (Device Description)
and install files for AMS and DeltaV used should be the same as the Device Revision of the 1066.
A single HART 5 (Device Revision 1) or HART 7 (Device Revision 2 or greater) DD (Device
Description) is used for all model codes of the 1066, which include the pH/ORP, conductivity, oxy-
gen, chlorine, and ozone transmitters. All 1066 transmitters have the same HART device identifi-
cation, as outlined below:

HART 5 Device Identification (1066 Revision 1):


Manufacturer Name: Rosemount Analytical Inc.
Model Name: 1066
Manufacturer ID: 46 (0x2E)
Device Type Code: 33 (0x0021)
HART Protocol Revision: 5.1
Device Revision: 1

HART 7 Device Identification (1066 Revision 2):


Manufacturer Name: Rosemount Analytical Inc.
Model Name: 56
Manufacturer ID: 46 (0x2E)
Device Type Code: 11809 (0x2E21)
HART Protocol Revision: 7.3
Device Revision: 2

10.2 Physical Installation and Configuration

10.2.1 HART Wiring and Output Configuration


HART communications is superimposed on Analog Output 1 for all of the measurements and
parameters of the 1066.

HART Communications 97
Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

10.2.2 HART Multidrop (Bus) Configuration


The HART Polling Address should be left at its default value of 0, unless the 1066 is used in a
Multidrop configuration with up to 14 other transmitters. When the Polling Address is greater than
0, the 4-20 mA output is held at 4 mA or below, and does not change in response to changes in
the measurement in HART 5.
In HART 7, Loop Current Mode should be set to Off to hold the current output to a minimum value.

10.2.3 HART Configuration


To access the HART Configuration screens, select the HART menu item in the Main Menu. If
HART 7 is chosen (Univ Cmd Rev = 7), the following controls are available:

FIGURE 10-1. HART 7 Configuration Screen: Basic Definitions

Univ Cmd Rev toggles between HART version 5 and HART version 7. If the HART host being
used can accommodate HART 7, HART 7 should be chosen due to its larger feature set. If the
host can only use HART 5, then HART 5 must be chosen.
Note: If the 1066 is connected to a HART host and the HART version is changed, the host will
likely detect the transmitter as a new transmitter with a different device revision number.

Polling address Choose 0 unless Multidrop is being used. If Multidrop is being used, each
transmitter should have its own polling address of from 1 to 15.

Loop current mode Set Output 1 current to a minimum value for multidrop applications
(HART 7 only).

Find Device Cmd Setting Find Device to On, enables the 1066 to be identified by the host.
The transmitter returns identity information including device type, revision level, and device
ID (HART 7 only).

98 HART Communications
1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Burst Message 0, 1, 2 Toggles burst messages 0, 1, and/or 2 on or off (HART 7 only). See the
end of section 10.2 for the HART burst commands available.

If HART 5 is chosen (Univ Cmd Rev = 5), the following controls are available:

FIGURE 10-2. HART 5 Configuration Screen: Basic Definitions

Univ Cmd Rev toggles between HART version 5 and HART version 7. If the HART host being
used can accommodate HART 7, HART 7 should be chosen due to its larger feature set. If the
host can only use HART 5, then HART 5 must be chosen.
Note: If the 1066 is connected to a HART host and the HART version is changed, the host will
likely detect the transmitter as a new transmitter with a different device revision number.
Polling address Choose 0 unless Multidrop is being used. If Multidrop is being used, each
transmitter should have its own polling address of from 1 to 15.
Burst Mode Toggles the single HART 5 burst message on or off. See below for the HART
burst commands available.

Burst Commands Available in HART 5 and HART 7


If burst messages are enabled by setting the burst messages to on, the information in the burst
message can be selected using a HART host from the following commands:
Burst command:
Off Turns burst mode off
Cmd 1 Bursts the Primary Value
Cmd 2 Bursts Loop Current + % of range of the Primary Value
Cmd 3 Bursts Dynamic Variables (PV, SV, TV, & QV) + Loop Current
Cmd 9 Bursts up to 8 Device Variables with time stamp and status and Cmd 48 Additional
Transmitter Status (HART 7 only)
Cmd 33 Bursts 4 Device Variables
Cmd 48 Bursts Additional Transmitter Status Bits (HART 7 only)
Cmd 93 Bursts Trend Data (HART 7 only)

10.3 Measurements Available via HART


A number of live measurements are made available by HART in addition to the main measure-
ments such as pH or Conductivity. All of these measurements are called Device Variables, which
can be mapped to the Dynamic Variables PV, SV, TV, and QV for regular reading by the typical
HART host.

HART Communications 99
Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

Each 1066 transmitter type, 1066P, 1066C, etc. will have its own set of Device Variables, based on
the secondary measurements used in making the main measurement. Appendix 10.1 shows the
Device Variable for the each transmitter type, and the Dynamic Variables, which they can be
mapped to.

10.4 Diagnostics Available via HART

10.4.1 Status Information Device Status Bits


Bit 0 Primary Variable out of Limits:
This bit is set when PV is out of its limits.
Bit 1 Non-primary Variable out of Limits:
This bit is set when any active device variable other than the Primary variable is out of its
limits.
Bit 2 Loop Current Saturated:
This bit is set when Analog Output 1 is not fixed, and it is less than 3.8 mA or greater than
22.0 mA.
Bit 3 Loop Current Fixed:
This bit is set when Analog Output 1 is being simulated, calibrated, or when a device fail-
ure is detected and the Analog Output 1 is configured to output a fixed value.
Bit 4 More Status Available:
The more status available bit will be set when the device status condition occurs (i.e. bit
goes from 0 to 1) on at least one of the Additional Transmitter Status bits are set.
Bit 5 Cold Start:
This bit is set when a Master Reset is performed either by Command 42, or a power cycle.
2 bits are maintained internally, for primary and secondary masters.
Bit 6 Configuration Changed:
This bit is set when a configuration or calibration parameter is changed either through a
write command or a local interface command. 2 bits are maintained internally, for pri-
mary and secondary masters.
Bit 7 Field Device Malfunction:
This bit is set when a fault condition is detected in the device electronics or sensor.

10.4.2 Status Information Extended Device Status Bits (HART 7


only)
Bit 0 Maintenance Required:
This bit is set when a device fault is detected.
Bit 1 Device Variable Alert:

100 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

This bit is set when any enabled device variable status is not good.
Bit 2 Critical Power Failures:
This bit is not supported and will always be cleared on 1066.

10.4.3
Additional Transmitter Status (Command 48)
Additional Transmitter Status provides diagnostic status bits specific to the condition of sensors,
electronics, and the memory of the 1066. Calibration errors and notification of events, such as cal-
ibration in progress and relay activation are also indicated by status bits. Appendix 10.2 shows
these bits organized according to the 1066 transmitter measurement type.
10.5
HART Hosts
A HART host can access live measurements, diagnostic messages, and provide a tool for configur-
ing the measurement and calibrating the 1066. The configuration parameters for the 1066 trans-
mitter are listed in Appendix 10.3. Two examples of HART hosts are shown below.
10.5.1
AMS Intelligent Device Manager
The AMS Device Intelligent Device Manager is member of the AMS Suite of asset management
applications, which provides tools for configuration, calibration, diagnosing, and documenting

FIGURE 10-3. Main Measurement and Overall Status

HART Communications 101


Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

FIGURE 10-4. Device Variables and Dynamic Variables

FIGURE 10-5. Diagnostic Messages (Additional Transmitter Status)

102 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

FIGURE 10-6. Configuration

FIGURE 10-7. Calibration

HART Communications 103


Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

10.5.2 transmitters and valves. The following AMS windows are


FIGURE 10-8. 475 Field
examples of these functions:
Communicator

475 Field Communicator


HART (and Fieldbus) devices can be accessed in the field
using the 475, which provides the same basic functional-
ity as the AMS Intelligent Device Manager. Asset man-
agement information can be uploaded into the AMS
database from the 475 for a common database for asset

10.6 Wireless Communication using the 1066


The 1066 can communicate by Wireless HART using
FIGURE 10-9. Wireless
the Smart Wireless THUM Adaptor and the 1420 Smart Communication using the 1066
Wireless Gateway. All the information available with
the wired device can be accessed wirelessly, making it
possible to have the measurements and benefits of
HART communication in locations where running cable
would be difficult or prohibitively expensive.
Although HART 5 or HART 7 can burst the Dynamic
Variables (PV, SV, TV, & QV), HART 7 should be used
with the THUM because up to 8 Device Variables can be
continually burst using Command 9.

10.7 Field Device Specification (FDS)


For more details on the implementation of HART in the 1066 and its command structure, the Field
Device Specification for the relevant Device Revision should be consulted. They can be down-
loaded from our website.

104 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

APPENDIX 10.1 Device Variables


1066 pH Device Variables
Device Variable Name Assignable to Dynamic Variables Variable Range
Primary Value Type:
pH (1) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 14 pH
ORP (2) PV, SV, TV or QV -1500 to 1500 mV
Redox (3) PV, SV, TV or QV -1500 to 1500 mV
Other Device Variables:
Temperature SV, TV or QV -15 to 200 C
5 to 360 F
Sensor mV input TV or QV -750 to 750 mV
Sensor Glass impedance TV or QV 0 to 2000 M
Sensor Reference impedance TV or QV 0 to 10000 k

1066C and 1066T Device Variables


Device Variable Name Assignable to Dynamic Variables Variable Range
Primary Value Type:
Conductivity (7) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 2000000 S/cm
Resistivity (8) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 50000000 -cm
% Concentration:
NaOH (9) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 12 %
HCl (10) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 15 %
Low H2SO4 (11) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 25 %
High H2SO4 (12) PV, SV, TV or QV 96 to 99.7 %
NaCl (13) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 25 %
Custom Concentration (14) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 1000 ppm
0 to 1000 mg/L
0 to 100 g/L
0 to 100 %
0 to 1000 None
TDS (15) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 10000 ppm
Salinity (16) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 36 ppth
Other Device Variables:
Temperature SV, TV or QV -25 to 200 C
-13 to 360 F
Temperature resistance TV or QV 0 to 100000
Conductance TV or QV 0 to 2000000 S
Input resistance TV or QV 0 to 500 k
Raw Conductivity TV or QV 0 to 2000000 S/cm
Raw Resistivity TV or QV 0 to 50000000 ohm-cm

HART Communications 105


Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

1066DO Device Variables


Device Variable Name Assignable to Dynamic Variables Variable Range

Primary Value Type:


Oxygen (17) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 100 ppm
0 to 1000 ppb
0 to 100 mg/L
0 to 1000 g/L
0 to 300 % Saturation
0 to 760 mmHg
0 to 30 inHg
0 to 1 bar
0 to 1000 mbar
0 to 100 kPa
0 to 1 atm
Other Device Variables:
Temperature PV, SV, TV or QV -15 to 200 C
5 to 360 F
Temperature resistance TV or QV 0 to 100000
Sensor input current PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 100000 nA

1066OZ Device Variables


Device Variable Name Assignable to Dynamic Variables Variable Range

Primary Value Type:


Ozone (18) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 20 ppm
0 to 1000 ppb
0 to 20 mg/L
0 to 1000 g/L
Other Device Variables:
Temperature PV, SV, TV or QV -15 to 200 C
5 to 360 F
Temperature resistance TV or QV 0 to 100000
Sensor input current PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 100000 nA

1066CL Device Variables


Device Variable Name Assignable to Dynamic Variables Variable Range

Primary Value Type:


Chlorine (19) PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 20 ppm
0 to 1000 ppb
0 to 20 mg/L
0 to 1000 g/L
Other Device Variables:
Temperature PV, SV, TV or QV -15 to 200 C
5 to 360 F
Temperature resistance TV or QV 0 to 100000
Sensor input current PV, SV, TV or QV 0 to 100000 nA
pH (free chlorine pH compensation) SV, TV or QV 0 to 14 pH

106 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

APPENDIX 10.2 Additional Transmitter Status


Command 48 Status Bits
1066 pH Device Variables
Byte / Bit Meaning / Class Device Status Bits Set
CPU Error / Error
4 More Status Available
1/0 The software checksum is not as expected. The CPU memory has been cor-
7 Field Device Malfunction
rupted.
Self-Test Fail / Error 4 More Status Available
1/1
An electronic component is out of specification. 7 Field Device Malfunction

Factory Data Error / Error


4 More Status Available
1/2 An error was detected in the factory segment of the non-volatile memory. At
7 Field Device Malfunction
least one factory configuration parameter has been corrupted.

Hardware/Software Mismatch / Error 4 More Status Available


1/3
The software is not compatible with the hardware. 7 Field Device Malfunction

Internal Communications Error / Error 4 More Status Available


1/4
The analog input electronics is non-responsive. 7 Field Device Malfunction

Keypad Error / Warning


At least one key in the device keypad is stuck. This condition makes the local
3/0 4 More Status Available
operator interface unuseable. If no other alerts are present, the device can
still perform its other functions normally.

User Data Error / Warning


An error was detected in the non-volatile memory. One or more user config-
3/1 4 More Status Available
uration parameter may be corrupted. Reset analyzer to factory defaults and
re-configure the device. If the problem persists, replace device.

Need Factory Calibration / Warning


3/2 The device's non-volatile memory has been corrupted. The device measure- 4 More Status Available
ments may be out of specification.

Software Mismatch / Warning


3/3 4 More Status Available
The input CPU software is not fully compatible with the main CPU software.

Reset In Progress / Other


3/7 4 More Status Available
The transmitter's configuration is being reset to factory defaults.

6/6 Maintenance Required / Other 4 More Status Available

6/1 Device Variable Alert / Other 4 More Status Available

Simulation Active / Mode


8/0 4 More Status Available
A device variable is being simulated.

8/1 Non-Volatile Memory Defect / Warning 4 More Status Available

8/2 Volatile Memory Defect / Error 4 More Status Available

8/3 Watchdog Reset Executed / Other 4 More Status Available

8/4 Power Supply Condition Out Of Range / Warning 4 More Status Available

8/5 Environmental Condition Out Of Range / Warning 4 More Status Available

Electronic Defect / Error


8/6 4 More Status Available
Reset device or turn power off then on. If problem persists, replace device.

HART Communications 107


Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

1066 pH Device Variables continued


Byte / Bit Meaning / Class Device Status Bits Set
Device Locked / Mode
8/7 Locked device prevents all host modifications. Unlock device to make 4 More Status Available
changes to the device.

Analog Channel 1 Saturated / Warning


The primary variable is outside the analog output range.
10 / 0 4 More Status Available
1. Check the primary value.
2. Check the analog output scaling.

Analog Channel 2 Saturated / Warning


The secondary variable is outside the analog output range.
10 / 1 4 More Status Available
1. Check the secondary value.
2. Check the analog output scaling.

Analog Channel 1 Fixed / Mode


Output 1 is either being tested, calibrated, or accidentally left on hold. A
13 / 0 fault condition could also set the analog output to a fixed value. 4 More Status Available
If there is no active fault, wait for test or calibration to end or take Output 1
out of hold mode.

Analog Channel 2 Fixed / Mode


Output 2 is either being tested, calibrated, or accidentally left on hold. A
13 / 1 fault condition could also set the analog output to a fixed value. 4 More Status Available
If there is no active fault, wait for test or calibration to end or take Output 2
out of hold mode.

Temperature Status Bits


Byte / Bit Meaning / Class Device Status Bits Set
Temperature Error / Error
The temperature measuring circuit is open or shorted. Check the wiring and 4 More Status Available
0/0
the temperature element in the sensor. If the temperature element in the 7 Field Device Malfunction
sensor is open or shorted, replace the sensor.
Temperature High / Warning
The measured temperature is above the temperature range of the transmit-
ter and can damage the sensor. The temperature limits are: 1 Non-primary Variable out
2/0 1066P / 1066DO, CL, and OZ: Temperature > 150C of Limits
1066C and 1066T: Temperature > 300C 4 More Status Available
1. Check process temperature.
2. Check sensor and its wiring.

Temperature Low / Warning


The measured temperature is below the temperature range of the transmit-
ter and can damage the sensor. The temperature limits are: 1 Non-primary Variable out
2/1 1066P / 1066DO, CL, and OZ: Temperature < -15C of Limits
1066C and 1066T: Temperature -25C 4 More Status Available
1. Check process temperature.
2. Check sensor and its wiring.

RTD Sense Line Open / Warning


The sense line of the temperature sensor is not connected.
2/2 1. Check sensor wiring. 4 More Status Available
2. If a 2-wire RTD is being used for temperature compensation, use wire
jumper to connect sense and return terminals.

Temperature Calibration In Progress / Other


5/1 4 More Status Available
A temperature calibration is or has been performed.

108 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

1066pH/ORP Status Bits


Byte / Bit Meaning / Class Device Status Bits Set
Reference Impedance Too High / Error
The reference impedance is above the high fault
setpoint. The reference electrode may be coated or plugged.
4 More Status Available
0/1 1. Clean or replace the sensor.
7 Field Device Malfunction
2. Check sensor wiring.
3. Increase the setpoint value.
4. Set the reference impedance level to high.
Glass Impedance Too High / Error
The glass impedance is above the high fault setpoint. The glass electrode
may be severely coated. 4 More Status Available
0/2
1. Clean or replace sensor. 7 Field Device Malfunction
2. Check sensor wiring.
3. Increase the glass impedance high fault setpoint.
Broken pH Glass / Error
The glass impedance is too low. The glass electrode of the pH sensor may be
cracked. 4 More Status Available
0/3
1. Check sensor. Replace sensor if cracks are present. 7 Field Device Malfunction
2. Check sensor wiring.
3. Check preamplifier location configuration.
pH Voltage Too High / Warning
The sensor voltage is outside the expected range for a pH measurement.
2/3 4 More Status Available
1. Check sensor wiring.
2. Replace sensor.
pH Slope Too High / Warning
The pH slope calculated during buffer calibration exceeded the maximum
slope limit.
1. Check the buffers used and retry buffer calibration.
4/0 4 More Status Available
2. Increase the maximum slope limit (default is 62 mV/pH). Note: A slope of
62 mV/pH or greater indicates that there has been an error made during cali-
bration or a faulty pH sensor.
3. Replace sensor.

pH Slope Too Low / Warning


The pH slope calculated during buffer calibration was below the minimum
slope limit. The pH electrode may be worn out, damaged, or coated.
4/1 1. Check and clean sensor, then retry buffer calibration. 4 More Status Available
2. Decrease minimum slope limit (default is 40 mV/pH). Note that a pH sen-
sor with a slope less than 50 mV/pH is usually near the end of its useful life.
3. Replace sensor.
Zero Offset Error / Warning
The zero offset from a buffer calibration or single point standardization has
exceeded the limit. The reference electrode may be poisoned or plugged.
4/2 1. Check and clean sensor, then retry buffer calibration. 4 More Status Available
2. Increase maximum offset limit (default is 60mV). Note that a pH sensor
with an offset of 60 mV or greater is likely poisoned and has to be replaced.
3. Replace sensor.
4/3 Calibration Error / Warning 4 More Status Available
pH Standardization In Progress / Other
5/4 4 More Status Available
A pH standardization is being or has been performed.
Buffer Calibration In Progress / Other
5/5 4 More Status Available
A pH buffer calibration is being or has been performed.
Stabilization In Progress / Other
5/6 4 More Status Available
A pH sensor is stabilizing or has been stabilizing.

HART Communications 109


Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

1066C and 1066T Status Bits continued


Byte / Bit Meaning / Class Device Status Bits Set

Need Zero Calibration / Warning


The sensor offset is too high resulting in a negative reading. This trigger point for
this alert is dependent upon the conductivity measurement technology:
2/5 4 More Status Available
1066C: (conductance - zero offset) < -2S
1066T: (conductance - zero offset) < -50S
A sensor zero calibration should be performed.
Concentration Out Of Range / Warning
The measured concentration is outside the conductivity range where a valid con-
centration can be derived for the following 5 concentrations:
0 to 20% NaCl
0 to 12% NaOH
2/6 4 More Status Available
0 to 15% HCl
0 to 25% H2SO4
96 to 99.7% H2SO4.
If there are no other fault conditions check process temperature and check that
the actual concentration is outside the range for which curve is defined.
Input Out Of Range / Warning
The input is outside the device measurement range. the range limits are:
1066C (2- electrode conductivity): Conductance > 500mS
2/7 1066CT (4- electrode conductivity): (Conductance > 3000mS) or (Vcond < 0mV) 4 More Status Available
1066T: Conductance > 1500mS
1. Check sensor wiring.
2. Replace sensor.
Calibration Error / Warning
4/3 An error occurred in the last calibration procedure. 4 More Status Available
Check sensor and repeat the calibration procedure.
Sensor Zero Error / Warning
4/4 An error occurred in the last sensor zero procedure. 4 More Status Available
Check sensor and repeat sensor zero procedure.

Sensor Zero In Progress / Other


5/2 4 More Status Available
A sensor zero is being or has been performed.

Zero Cal In Water In Progress / Other


5/3 4 More Status Available
A zero calibration in water is being or has been performed.

Meter Calibration In Progress / Other


5/4 4 More Status Available
A meter calibration is being or has been performed.

Curve Fit In Progress / Other


5/5 4 More Status Available
A curve fit is being or has been performed.

110 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

1066DO, 1066CL, 1066OZ Statuss Bits


Byte / Bit Meaning / Class Device Status Bits Set
SENSOR_CURRENT > 300 nA for OXYGEN BioRx - Other
SENSOR_CURRENT > 800 nA for OXYGEN Brewing
SENSOR_CURRENT > 106 uA for OXYGEN Oxygen in Gas
SENSOR_CURRENT > 350 nA for Ozone
SENSOR_CURRENT > 5 uA for Free Chlorine
2/4 SENSOR_CURRENT > 40 uA for Total Chlorine 4 More Status Available
SENSOR_CURRENT > 20 uA for Monochloramine

1. Make sure the device configuration matches the sensor being used.
2. Check sensor wiring.
3. Replace sensor.

Need Zero Calibration / Warning


The sensor offset is too high resulting in a negative reading.
The sensor zero limits are:
PV < -0.5 if unit is ppm or mg/L
PV < -50 if unit is ppb or ug/L
2/5 PV < -2.0 % for % Saturation 4 More Status Available
PV < -2.0 % for Concentration in Gas
PV < -20 ppm for Concentration in Gas
PV < -30 mmHg for Partial Pressure

Perform sensor a zero calibration.

Calibration Error / Warning


4/3 There has been a calibration error. 4 More Status Available
Check the sensor.

Sensor Zero Error / Warning


4/4 An error occurred in the last sensor zero procedure.
Check sensor and repeat sensor zero procedure.

Sensor Zero In Progress / Other


5/2 4 More Status Available
A sensor zero is being or has been performed.

Air Cal In Progress / Other


5/3 4 More Status Available
An air calibration is being or has been performed.

Stabilization In Progress / Other


5/6 4 More Status Available
The sensor is stabilizing or has stabilized.

HART Communications 111


Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

APPENDIX 10.3 1066 HART Configuration Parameters


Parameters Common to All 1066 Transmitters
Type Enumeration / Range Read/Write Default
input_filter_type Adaptive
Selects between continuous and adaptive filtering ENUM R/W Adaptive
of the measurement. Continuous
pv_damping_value FLOAT 0.0 -- 99.0 seconds R/W 0
Provides the filter time constant.
instrument_software_version FLOAT R
The software version of the main processor.
input_software_version FLOAT R
The software version of the input processor.
Display Parameters:
English Italiano
loi_language Franais Portugus
ENUM R/W English
Selects the language to be displayed by the 1066. Espaol Chinese
Deutsch Russian
loi_warnings Enable
ENUM R/W Enable
Enables or disables the display of transmitter warnings. Disable
loi_configuration_code
Locks and unlocks access to configuration from the UINT (2) R/W 0
keypad display of the 1066. "000" disables.
loi_calibration_code
Locks and unlocks access to calibration from the UINT (2) R/W 0
keypad display of the 1066. "000" disables.
loi_main_display_upper Assign PV
Selects the measurement displayed on the upper ENUM R/W Assign PV
portion of the main display. Blank

loi_main_display_center Compensating pH (free Cl)


Temperature
Selects the measurement displayed on the center ENUM R/W Temperature
PV
portion of the main display. Blank
loi_main_display_left
Selects the measurement or output displayed on ENUM Valid List per 1066 Model R/W
the left portion of the display.
loi_main_display_lower_left
Selects the measurement or output displayed on ENUM Valid List per 1066 Model R/W
the lower left portion of the display.
loi_main_display_right
Selects the measurement or output displayed on ENUM Valid List per 1066 Model R/W
the right portion of the display.
loi_main_display_lower_right
Selects the measurement or output displayed on ENUM Valid List per 1066 Model R/W
the lower right portion of the display.
Valid List
Input mV
1066pH/ORP: Glass Impedance
Ref Impedance
Slope
Zero Offset
Valid List
1066C/T: Raw Conductivity
Raw Resistivity
Valid List
1066DO/CL/OZ: Input Current
pH (if free chlorine)
Valid List
AO 1 Current
All 1066: AO 1 % Output
AO 2 Current
AO 2 % Output

112 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

1066 Temperature Parameters


Type Enumeration / Range Read/Write Default
rtd_offset
The temperature offset resulting from a tempera- FLOAT R/W 0
ture calibration.
rtd_slope
The slope (dimensionless) resulting from a two
FLOAT R/W 1
point temperature calibration. (Valid for cell
constants < 0.02 1/cm)
temp_comp_mode
Manual
Selects automatic or manual temperature ENUM R/W Automatic
Automatic
compensation.
manual_temperature
If manual temperature compensation is chosen,
FLOAT R/W 25.0 C
provides a constant temperature value used by the
transmitter.

1066 pH/ORP
Type Enumeration / Range Read/Write Default
zero_offset
FLOAT R/W 0.0 mV
The zero offset of a pH sensor resulting from a calibration.
pH_slope
FLOAT 40 -- 62 mV/pH R/W 59.16 mV/pH
The slope of a pH sensor resulting from a buffer calibration.
zero_offset_limit
The maximum value of the zero offset allowed for a success- FLOAT R/W 60
ful calibration.
min_pH_slope
The minimum value of the slope allowed for a successful FLOAT 40 -- 62 mV/pH R/W 40 mV/pH
calibration.
max_pH_slope
The maximum value of the slope allowed for a successful FLOAT 40 -- 62 mV/pH R/W 62 mV/pH
calibration.
pH_stabilization_time
The period of time used to determine stability of a pH sensor FLOAT 0 -- 99 seconds R/W 10 seconds
during automatic calibration.
pH_stabilization_value
The pH change used to determine stability of a pH sensor FLOAT 0.01 -- 1.0 pH R/W 0.02 pH
during automatic calibration.
Standard / Nist
pH_buffer_standard DIN 19267 Standard /
ENUM Ingold R/W
The types of pH buffers available for automatic calibration. Merck Nist
Fisher
preamp_location analyzer
ENUM R/W
The location of the preamplifier in a pH measurement. sensor / J-box
reference_impedance_level
Configures the transmitter to use reference electrodes with Low
ENUM R/W Low
impedances less than 500 kohm (low) or greater than 500 High
kohm (high).
Off
pH_solution_temperature_correction ultra pure water
Configures the transmitter to correct the pH measurement ENUM high pH Off
for changes in the pH of the solution with temperature. ammonia
custom
pH_solution_temperature_coefficient
0.000
The coefficient used to correct solution pH when using cus- FLOAT -9.999 -- 9.999 pH/deg C R/W
pH/degC
tom solution pH temperature correction.

HART Communications 113


Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

1066 pH/ORP continued


Type Enumeration / Range Read/Write Default
pH_display_resolution 0.01 pH
ENUM R/W 0.01 pH
Changes the resolution of the displayed pH value. 0.1 pH
pH_sensor_isopotential
The pH at which the millivolt output of the pH sensor FLOAT 0.00 -- 14.00 pH R/W 7.00 pH
remains constant with temperature changes; virtually always
7.00 pH.
refZ_high_fault_setpoint
The high setpoint that triggers a reference electrode FLOAT 0.0 -- 9,999.0 kohm R/W 500.0 kohm
impedance alert.
glassZ_high_fault_setpoint
The high setpoint that triggers a glass pH electrode FLOAT 0.0 -- 9,999.0 Mohm R/W 1,500 Mohm
impedance alert.
diagnostics_switch
Off
Turns the glass and reference electrode impedance ENUM R/W Off
On
measurements on and off.
glassZ_temperature_correction
Off
Turns temperature correction of the glass impedance ENUM R/W Off
On
measurement on and off.
glassZ_measurement_type
Advanced
Toggles between a basic glass impedance measurement, and ENUM R/W Advanced
Basic
an advanced impedance measurement that is more accurate.
calculated_offset
The preliminary zero offset calculated by a pH calibration FLOAT R/W
before it is accepted by the transmitter.
calculated_slope
The preliminary slope calculated by a pH calibration before it FLOAT R/W
is accepted by the transmitter.

114 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

1066C and 1066T


Type Enumeration / Range Read/Write Default
conductivity_unit S/cm
ENUM R/W S/cm
The conductivity unit used by the measurement. mS/cm
cell_constant
The cell constant of the conductivity sensor being used, typically FLOAT 0.0001-- 100.0 /cm R/W 1.00 /cm
determined by calibration.
cable_correction Manual
ENUM R/W Automatic
Selects automatic or manual cable resistance correction. Automatic
manual_cable_resistance
FLOAT 0.0 -- 99.99 ohm R/W 0.0 ohm
The known cable resistance used in manual cable correction.
zero_offset_in_air
FLOAT R only 0.0 S
The zero offset determined by a zero calibration in air.
zero_offset_in_soln
FLOAT R only 0.00%
The zero offset determined by a zero calibration in a solution.
custom_curve_num_data_points 2
3
The number of conductivity and concentration points to be used ENUM R/W 3
4
to calculate a custom concentration curve. 5
Custom Curve Concentration Data Points:

custom_curve_concentration_1 FLOAT R/W

custom_curve_concentration_2 FLOAT R/W

custom_curve_concentration_3 FLOAT R/W

custom_curve_concentration_4 FLOAT R/W

custom_curve_concentration_5 FLOAT R/W

Custom Curve Conductivity Data Points:

custom_curve_conductivity_1 FLOAT R/W

custom_curve_conductivity_2 FLOAT R/W

custom_curve_conductivity_3 FLOAT R/W

custom_curve_conductivity_4 FLOAT R/W

custom_curve_conductivity_5 FLOAT R/W

HART Communications 115


Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

1066C
Type Enumeration / Range Read/Write Default
electrode_type
2-Electrode
Type of contacting conductivity sensor being used ENUM R/W 2-Electrode
4-Electrode
by the transmitter.
cond_range
Selects a particular range for the conductivity
ENUM R/W Automatic
measurement or automatic ranging for 2 and 4
electrode sensors.
Automatic
0-50S
40-500S
2-Electrode:
400-2000S
1.8-20mS
18-200mS
Automatic
0-42S/cm
36-200S/cm
4-Electrode:
180-1000S/cm
0.9-10mS/cm
9-600mS/cm
series_cap_correction Off
ENUM R/W Off
Turns capacitance correction on and off. On
cell_factor
The second calibration constant used by a 4 FLOAT R/W 0.95 /cm
electrode sensor in addition to cell constant.
Linear slope
temp_comp_type
Neutral salt
The type of temperature compensation used by ENUM R/W Linear slope
Cation
the transmitter.
Raw / None
temp_comp_slope
2.0 %/degree
Provides a slope value used in linear temperature FLOAT 0.2 -- 9.99 %/degreec C R/W
C
compensation.
reference_temperature
The temperature that temperature compensation FLOAT R/W 25.0 C
corrects to. It is usually 25 C.

1066T
Type Enumeration / Range Read/Write Default
228
toroidal_sensor_model 225
Selects the model of toroidal sensor being used for ENUM 226 R/W 228
enhanced accuracy. 247
Other
cond_range Automatic
Selects a particular range for the conductivity 50-600S
ENUM R/W Automatic
measurement or automatic ranging for toroidal 0.5-100mS
sensors. 90-1500mS
temp_comp_type
Linear slope
The type of temperature compensation used by ENUM R/W Linear slope
Raw / None
the transmitter.
temp_comp_slope
Provides a slope value used in linear temperature FLOAT R/W 2.0 %/degree C
compensation.
reference_temperature
The temperature that temperature compensation FLOAT R/W 25.0 C
corrects to. It is usually 25 C.

116 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

1066OZ/CL/DO
Type Enumeration / Range Read/Write Default
polar_voltage
The polarization voltage used by the transmitter; FLOAT R/W 0
automatically set by sensor selection.
temp_coeff
The temperature coefficient used to compensate FLOAT R/W 0
temperature; automatically set by sensor selection.
amp_sensor_sensitivity
The response of the sensor to changes in concentra- FLOAT 0.1 -- 1,000,000.0 nA/ppm R/W 2,500 nA/ppm
tion, determined by calibration.
amp_sensor_zero_current
The current output of the sensor when the concen- FLOAT -999.9 -- 999.9 nA R/W 0.0 nA
tration is 0. It is determined by a zero calibration.

1066OZ
Type Enumeration / Range Read/Write Default
ozone_resolution 0.001
ENUM R/W 0.001
The resolution of the displayed ozone measurement. 0.01

1066CL
Type Enumeration / Range Read/Write Default
Free Chlorine
chlorine_type
ENUM Total Chlorine R/W Free Chlorine
The type of chlorine being measured.
Chloramine
chlorine_resolution 0.001 ppm
ENUM R/W 0.001 ppm
The resolution of the displayed chlorine measurement. 0.01 ppm
pH_correction_mode
On
Turns automatic pH compensation of free chlorine measure- ENUM R/W Off
Off
ments on and off.
manual_pH
Provides a constant pH value, if manual pH compensation of a FLOAT 0.00 -- 14.00 pH R/W 7.00 pH
free chlorine measurement is used.

HART Communications 117


Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

1066DO
Type Enumeration / Range Read/Write Default
Water/Waste
Trace Oxygen
oxygen_sensor_type BioRx-Rosemount
ENUM R/W Water/Waste
The type of oxygen sensor used. BioRx-Other
Brewing
Oxygen In Gas
Concentration in Liquid
oxygen_measurement_type Percent Saturation Concentratio
ENUM R/W
The type of oxygen measurement being made. Partial Pressure n in Liquid
Concentration in Gas
oxygen_salinity
The salinity of the process solution, which is used
FLOAT 0.0 - 99.9 ppth R/W 0.0 ppth
by the transmitter to correct for the effect of salini-
ty on the oxygen measurement.
mmHg
inHg
pressure_units psi
The units of pressure used by the oxygen measure- ENUM atm R/W mmHg
ment. kPa
mbar
bar
oxygen_process_pressure
The process pressure used by the transmitter to FLOAT R/W 760.0 mmHg
calculate percent oxygen in gas or % saturation.
oxygen_air_pressure
The barometric pressure used by the transmitter FLOAT R/W 760.0 mmHg
during an air calibration.
oxygen_units
The available units used for the various oxygen ENUM R/W
measurement types.
Units:
Concentration in ppm
ppb ppm
Liquid: mg/L
g/L
Percent Units:
%
Saturation %
Units:
mmHg kPa
Partial Pressure inHg mbar mmHg
psi bar
atm
Units:
Oxygen In Gas ppm %
%
air_cal_stabilization_time
The period of time used to determine stability of an FLOAT 0 -- 99 seconds R/W 10 seconds
oxygen sensor during an air calibration.
air_cal_stabilization_value
The change in the oxygen measurement used to
FLOAT 0.001 -- 9,999.0 R/W 0.05
determine stability of an oxygen sensor during an
air calibration.
air_cal_stabilization_value_unit
FLOAT R/W ppm
The unit used during an air calibration.

118 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

APPENDIX 10.4 475 Menu Tree for 1066 HART 7


1. Overview
1.1. Device Status
1.2. Comm Status
1.3. PV
1.4. SV
1.5. Loop Current
1.6. % of Range
1.7. Find Device
1.8. Device Information
1.8.1. Identification
1.8.1.1. Tag
1.8.1.2. Long Tag
1.8.1.3. Model
1.8.1.4. Serial Number
1.8.1.5. Date
1.8.1.6. Descriptor
1.8.1.7. Message
1.8.2. Revision Numbers
1.8.2.1. Universal
1.8.2.2. Field Device
1.8.2.3. DD Revision
1.8.2.4. Hardware
1.8.2.5. Instrument Software
1.8.2.6. Input Software
2. Configure
2.1. Guided Setup
2.1.1. Basic Setup
2.2. Manual Setup
2.2.1. Device Information
2.2.1.1. Tag
2.2.1.2. Long Tag
2.2.1.3. Descriptor
2.2.1.4. Message
2.2.1.5. Date
2.2.1.6. Current Date
2.2.1.7. Current Time
2.2.1.8. Set Date and Time
2.2.2. Measurement (1066 pH/ORP)
2.2.2.1. PV is
2.2.2.2. Preamp Location
2.2.2.3. Soln Temp Correctn (pH only)
2.2.2.4. Temp Coefficient (PV is pH and Soln Temp Correctn is Custom)
2.2.2.5. Resolution (pH only)
2.2.2.6. Sensor Isopotential (pH only)
2.2.2.7. Input Filter
2.2.2.8. Filter Type
2.2.2.9. Reference Imp
2.2.3. Measurement (1066 DO)
2.2.3.1. Sensor Type
2.2.3.2. Measurement Type
2.2.3.3. PV Unit
2.2.3.4. Salinity
2.2.3.5. Pressure Unit
2.2.3.6. Input Filter
2.2.3.7. Filter Type
2.2.3.8. Polar Voltage
2.2.3.9. Temp Coefficient

HART Communications 119


Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

2.2.4. Measurement (1066 OZ)


2.2.4.1. PV Unit
2.2.4.2. Resolution
2.2.4.3. Input Filter
2.2.4.4. Filter Type
2.2.4.5. Polar Voltage
2.2.4.6. Temp Coefficient
2.2.5. Measurement (1066 CL)
2.2.5.1. Measurement Type
2.2.5.2. PV Unit
2.2.5.3. Resolution
2.2.5.4. pH Correction (Free Chlorine Measurement Type only)
2.2.5.4.1. pH Correction
If pH Correction is manual
2.2.5.4.2. Manual pH
If pH Correction is Live/Continuous
2.2.5.4.3. Preamp Location
2.2.5.4.4. Resolution
2.2.5.4.5. Sensor Isopotential
2.2.5.4.6. Soln Temp Correctn
2.2.5.5. Input Filter
2.2.5.6. Filter Type
2.2.5.7. Polar Voltage
2.2.5.8. Temp Coefficient
2.2.6. Measurement (1066 C and 1066 T)
2.2.6.1. Measurement Type
2.2.6.2. PV Unit
2.2.6.3. Sensor Config
2.2.6.3.1. Sensor Type (Contacting Model)
2.2.6.3.2. Sensor Model (Toroidal Model)
2.2.6.3.3. Range
2.2.6.3.4. Cell Constant
2.2.6.3.5. Cell Factor (4-Electrode)
2.2.6.3.6. RTD Offset (Cell Constant < 0.02)
2.2.6.3.7. RTD Slope (Cell Constant < 0.02)
2.2.6.4. Setup Custom Curve (Custom Curve Measurement)
2.2.6.5. Temp Comp
2.2.6.5.1. Temp Comp Type
2.2.6.5.2. Temp Slope
2.2.6.5.3. Reference Temp
2.2.6.6. Cable Correction (2-Electrode or Toroidal)
2.2.6.6.1. Series Cap Corr
2.2.6.6.2. Cable R. Correction
2.2.6.6.3. Cable Resistance
2.2.6.7. Input Filter
2.2.6.8. Filter Type
2.2.7. Temperature
2.2.7.1. Temperature Unit
2.2.7.2. Temp Comp
2.2.7.3. Manual Value (If Temp Comp is Manual)
2.2.8. Analog Outputs
2.2.8.1. Output 1
2.2.8.1.1. Primary Variable
2.2.8.1.2. PV URV
2.2.8.1.3. PV LRV
2.2.8.1.4. Scale
2.2.8.1.5. Dampening
2.2.8.1.6. Fault Mode
2.2.8.1.7. Fault Value

120 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

2.2.8.2. Output 2
2.2.8.2.1. Secondary Variable
2.2.8.2.2. SV URV
2.2.8.2.3. SV LRV
2.2.8.2.4. Scale
2.2.8.2.5. Dampening
2.2.8.2.6. Fault Mode
2.2.8.2.7. Fault Value
2.2.9. Communications
2.2.9.1. Burst Message 1
2.2.9.1.1. Burst Message
2.2.9.1.2. Message Content
2.2.9.1.3. Update Rate
2.2.9.1.3.1. Trigger Mode
2.2.9.1.3.2. Trigger Level
2.2.9.1.3.3. Trigger Level Unit
2.2.9.1.3.4. Classification
2.2.9.1.3.5. Update Rate
2.2.9.1.3.6. Default Update Rate
2.2.9.2. Burst Message 2
2.2.9.2.1. Burst Message
2.2.9.2.2. Message Content
2.2.9.2.3. Update Rate
2.2.9.2.3.1. Trigger Mode
2.2.9.2.3.2. Trigger Level
2.2.9.2.3.3. Trigger Level Unit
2.2.9.2.3.4. Classification
2.2.9.2.3.5. Update Rate
2.2.9.2.3.6. Default Update Rate
2.2.9.3. Burst Message 3
2.2.9.3.1. Burst Message
2.2.9.3.2. Message Content
2.2.9.3.3. Update Rate
2.2.9.3.3.1. Trigger Mode
2.2.9.3.3.2. Trigger Level
2.2.9.3.3.3. Trigger Level Unit
2.2.9.3.3.4. Classification
2.2.9.3.3.5. Update Rate
2.2.9.3.3.6. Default Update Rate
2.2.9.4. Event Notification
2.2.9.4.1. Event Message
2.2.9.4.2. Unack Update Rate
2.2.9.4.3. Default Update Rate
2.2.9.4.4. Debounce Interval
2.2.9.4.5. Pending Events
2.2.9.4.6. Acknowledge Event (If there are pending events)
2.2.9.5. 12-Point Sample
2.2.9.5.1. Data Sampling
2.2.9.5.2. Device Variable
2.2.9.5.3. Sample Interval
2.2.9.5.4. 12-Point Sample (Data Sampling is not Off)
2.2.9.6. Variable Mapping
2.2.9.6.1. PV is
2.2.9.6.2. SV is
2.2.9.6.3. TV is
2.2.9.6.4. QV is
2.2.9.7. Multidrop
2.2.9.7.1. Polling Address
2.2.9.7.2. Loop Current Mode

HART Communications 121


Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

2.2.10. Device Display


2.2.10.1. Main Display Format
2.2.10.1.1. Upper
2.2.10.1.2. Center
2.2.10.1.3. Left
2.2.10.1.4. Lower Left
2.2.10.1.5. Right
2.2.10.1.6. Lower Right
2.2.10.2. Display Language
2.2.10.3. Warnings
2.2.10.4. Display Contrast
2.2.11.Security
2.2.11.1. HART Lock
2.2.11.1.1. Lock State
2.2.11.1.2. Lock/Unlock
2.2.11.2. Local Operator Interface
2.2.11.2.1. Configuration Code
2.2.11.2.2. Calibration Code
2.3. Alert Setup
2.3.1. Diagnostics (1066 pH/ORP/Redox only)
2.3.1.1. Reference Imp
2.3.1.1.1. High Fault Setpoint
2.3.1.2. Glass Impedance (pH only)
2.3.1.2.1. High Fault Setpoint
2.3.1.2.2. Temp Correction
2.3.1.2.3. Measurement Type
3. Service Tools
3.1. Alerts
3.2. Variables
3.3. Trends
3.4. Maintenance
3.4.1. 1066 DO (1066 DO Only)
3.4.1.1. Oxygen
3.4.1.2. Temperature
3.4.1.3. Input Current
3.4.1.4. Air Calibration
3.4.1.5. Air Calibration Setup
3.4.1.6. Zero Calibration
3.4.1.7. In-Process Cal
3.4.1.8. Sensitivity@25C
3.4.1.9. Zero Current
3.4.2. 1066 CL /1066 OZ (1066 CL /1066 OZ Only)
3.4.2.1. Chlorine/Ozone
3.4.2.2. Temperature
3.4.2.3. Input Current
3.4.2.4. Zero Calibration
3.4.2.5. In-Process Cal
3.4.2.6. Sensitivity@25C
3.4.2.7. Zero Current

122 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 10: HART Communication
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

3.4.3. 1066 pH/ORP (pH Only)


3.4.3.1. pH
3.4.3.2. pH Buffer Calibration
3.4.3.3. Standardize pH
3.4.3.4. pH Slope
3.4.3.5. Zero Offset
3.4.3.6. Calibration Setup
3.4.3.6.1. Limits
3.4.3.6.1.1. Minimum Slope
3.4.3.6.1.2. Maximum Slope
3.4.3.6.1.3. Maximum Offset
3.4.3.6.2. Automatic Buffer Recognition
3.4.3.6.2.1. Buffer Standard
3.4.3.6.2.2. Stable Time
3.4.3.6.2.3. Stable Delta
3.4.4. 1066 pH/ORP (ORP/Redox Only)
3.4.4.1. ORP/Redox
3.4.4.2. Calibrate ORP/Redox
3.4.4.3. Zero Offset
3.4.4.4. Maximum Offset
3.4.5. 1066 C/1066 T (1066 C/1066 T Only)
3.4.5.1. Conductivity
3.4.5.2. Raw Conductivity
3.4.5.3. Temperature
3.4.5.4. Zero Calibration
3.4.5.5. In-Process Calibration
3.4.5.6. Cell Constant
3.4.5.7. Cell Factor (4 electrode)
3.4.5.8. Zero Offset
3.4.5.9. Soln Offset (%Concentration)
3.4.6. Temperature
3.4.6.1. Temperature
3.4.6.2. Calibrate Temp
3.4.6.3. RTD Offset
3.4.7. Analog Outputs
3.4.7.1. Output 1
3.4.7.1.1. Loop Current
3.4.7.1.2. Calibrate Output 1
3.4.7.2. Output 2
3.4.7.2.1. SV Current
3.4.7.2.2. Calibrate Output 2
3.4.8. Meter
3.4.8.1. Input Resistance
3.4.8.2. Meter Calibration
3.4.9. Reset/Restore
3.4.9.1. Reset Device
3.4.9.2. Load Default Configuration
3.4.9.3. Reset Configuration Changed
3.5. Simulate
3.5.1. PV (show current PV type label)
3.5.2. Temperature
3.5.3. End Variable Simulation (If any variable is being simulated)
3.5.4. Output 1
3.5.5. Output 2

HART Communications 123


Section 10: HART Communication 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

This page left intentionally blank

124 HART Communications


1066 Instruction Manual Section 11: Return of Material
LIQ_MAN_1066 December 2014

Section 11: Return of Material


11.1 General
To expedite the repair and return of instruments, proper communication between the customer
and the factory is important. Before returning a product for repair, call 1-949-757-8500 for a
Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number.

11.2 Warranty Repair


The following is the procedure for returning instruments still under warranty:
1. Call Rosemount Analytical for authorization.
2. To verify warranty, supply the factory sales order number or the original purchase order
number. In the case of individual parts or sub-assemblies, the serial number on the unit must
be supplied.
3. Carefully package the materials and enclose your Letter of Transmittal (see Warranty). If
possible, pack the materials in the same manner as they were received.
4. Send the package prepaid to:
Rosemount Analytical
2400 Barranca Parkway IMPORTANT
Irvine, CA 92606 Please see second section of Return of
Attn: Factory Repair Materials Request form. Compliance with
the OSHA requirements is mandatory for
RMA No. ____________ the safety of all personnel. MSDS forms and
Mark the package: Returned for Repair a certification that the instruments have
been disinfected or detoxified are required.
Model No. ___________

11.3 Non-Warranty Repair


The following is the procedure for returning for repair instruments that are no longer under warranty:
1. Call Rosemount Analytical for authorization.
2. Supply the purchase order number, and make sure to provide the name and telephone num-
ber of the individual to be contacted should additional information be needed.
3. Do Steps 3 and 4 of Section 10.2.

NOTE
Consult the factory for additional information regarding service or repair.

Return of Materials 125


EC Declaration of Conformity 1066 Instruction Manual
December 2014 LIQ_MAN_1066

126 EC Declaration of